Actions

Work Header

SMG4 Oneshot Collection

Summary:

This is a collection of short stories based on the web series SMG4. Many of them will be ship-oriented, and I will take requests. Granted, the requests take a long time to make, but an author never shies away from a challenge. Unless it's an illegal ship, please none of those!

Notes:

(See the end of the work for notes.)

Chapter 1: Introduction

Chapter Text

Hi, I'm Lyssa! I've been an SMG4 fan for a super long time, and I've been reading the awesome fanfics everyone has been posting. I'm sort of an amateur writer, so I decided to give the whole fanfiction writing thing a try. I would really love to hear any positive comments or constructive criticism, because I am always looking to become a better writer. That being said, I also take requests. Please send in nothing illegal, but other than that, I will try my best to listen to your guys' ideas! I have many oneshots planned out already, so requests could be a little slow.

Here are some of my opinions on this fandom's ships.

SMG34: This ship is what got me reading fanfics in the first place, and many of the stories I write will be based on these two fruit loops.

Marware: This ship is cute, but I do prefer it when it is written as an enemies to lovers story rather than an established relationship.

Megari: This would be cute. They're not the best, but I can definitely see the draw to the ship and their compatibility.

Megario (I think that's what it's called): I see them as more of siblings, and their age difference is unsettling, to say the least.

Bomg1: They've never interacted. Maybe if they ever talk in an episode, I can begin to see and understand their ship.

Mar4: They would be good as friends with benefits, or maybe with an undefined relationship.

Mar3: I can only see this if the timeline is the YouTube arc.

CatVideo: I recently discovered this ship, but I really like it and I think that it is one of the ships that may be closer to canon than the others.

Symbols I use for the stories

☁️- Fluff (light kissing, crushes, blushing, flustered, etc.)

💔- Angst (the big sad)

🥝- Lime (detailed makeout scenes, suggestive language and actions)

😂- Jokefic (satire fun)

☯️- Platonic (no romantic relationships)

🗑️- Brain Dump (shorter oneshots, usually around 1k words that just come to me randomly)

⚡- AU (this changes the whole future of the episode)

❓- What if (this has no effect on the future, it is just an insignificant episode change)

🌺- Requested Prompt

There will be no sexual activity in this book. I'm not fully comfortable with reading/writing this.

Headcanons

I try my best not to stray from canon, but here are a few of my major ones.

- SMG2 is a girl. He literally wears a dress and sounds feminine, so my stupid ass didn't realize he was a boy until I already began writing many of these. This is why it won't change and it will be having him as a girl.

- Mario is smarter than he looks, he speaks Italian way more than canon, and he is left handed.

- SMG3 has shoulder length hair that he tucks into his hat to look more manly and less gay. But, let's be honest. Who is he fooling?

- SMG4 is an amazing cooker and SMG3 is an amazing baker.

- Mario is 5'8, SMG3 is 5'9, and SMG4 is 5'11.

- Karen is half human, half cat. Don't ask how that happened, this is just what I see her as... 💀

- Boopkins is thirteen years old, making him a minor. This means that I will never ship him with anybody, ever.

- Mr. Puzzles used to work for the government before he was fired and began terrorizing the crew, realizing he wanted a perfect world where he was loved by everyone.

- Eggdog is trying his best to learn English, but he and Beeg speak in Meme Language.

Okay, I think that's everything. I hope you enjoy my one shots, and please leave comments if you see any mistakes! This is not beta read (we die like Axol) and I have no energy to read the stories 100% before I post them.

Thanks for clicking on this book!

Chapter 2: 12:34 A.M ☁️💔 {SMG34}

Summary:

TW: Graphic descriptions of death, PTSD, Panic Attacks, Swearing, and Kissing.

Four's trauma gets the best of him, causing a series of events to happen that no one would expect.

This oneshot takes place one week after the episode "A Night at SMG4's".

Chapter Text

SMG4 takes a sip of his coffee as he stares at his computer. The darkness of the room is illuminated by the bright screen, the only source of light in the castle. Everyone had long since left or gone to sleep, making this the perfect time for him to work on his videos. Getting alone time in the castle was hard, especially with his best friend Mario around, so late at night was one of the only times for the man to work in complete peace.

As he is editing his latest masterpiece, he takes a glance at the digital clock on his desk. The time reads 12:34 A.M. That's quite a normal time for him to be awake, especially when he had a clip to finish, but getting some sleep wouldn't be such a bad idea. Tomorrow, he might be able to wake up before noon. He yawns, powering down his computer by hitting the Shut Down button on the side.

Oddly, instead of turning off, the computer just glitches back to the application he just closed. Four's eyebrows furrow as he tries to shut the device down once more. Again, he is greeted by the editing app. Groaning in frustration, Four almost doesn't hear the door to his bedroom open with a creak.

"Who's there?" Four calls out into the darkness of the castle.

As he squints, someone begins to come into view. They are standing in the corner, clutching something in their left hand. As they lean against the wall, Four makes eye contact with them. The peculiar thing about them is that they don't have eyes at all. Instead, they just have a creepy grin plastered on their- their... TV screen?

Mr. Puzzles walks up to the meme man who is still in the same position. Four's eyes widen in fear as he stares at the TV man. The lights turn on quickly with a simple wave of Mr. Puzzles' hand.

"Surprised to see me again so soon?" He asks, looming over Four with a smile.

"Meggy's house is across the neighborhood in Inkopolis. Although, I doubt she'll go with you." Snapping out of his daze, the content creator glares back at Mr. Puzzles defiantly.

"Oh, don't worry. Those dreams have already been shattered, thank you very much." He sighs, shaking his head in a mixture of annoyance and defeat. "I'm actually here for you, SMG4." He says as Four looks at him in disbelief.

"What could you possibly want with me?" He asks the villain.

"Well, that's easy, my dear." Mr. Puzzles chuckles, waving his free hand around. "You are going to be my next movie's antagonist again."

"What?" Four asks, trying to register Mr. Puzzles' words.

"Indeed! Your performance last March was breathtaking. So breathtaking, in fact, that the fans would surely adore it if you regressed."

"Hell no! I have friends that love me and count on me. Not to mention all the trauma we have experienced because of you." Four says, pointing a finger in his TV face angrily.

The man just stares at Four for a while, making the tension very uncomfortable. It was so unsettling to Four that he began to nervously sweat. Maybe standing up to that villain was a bad idea. He wasn't exactly sure what Mr. Puzzles was capable of without all five of his stars, and he didn't really want to find out.

"You disappoint me, Four. Maybe this will make you change your mind." He says as the lights flicker back off.

Four gasps audibly. While the walking television wasn't able to brainwash anybody again, he was still capable of doing harm. Four was certain of that. Why else would he even dare to come to the castle unarmed? Four didn't want to see what kind of torture the cyborg had in store for him, because both men knew that the content creator wasn't going to be persuaded easily.

After a few moments of silence, the lights come back on again. Four squints at the sudden brightness as Mr. Puzzles comes into view, along with someone new. Four tries to get a better look at the person. They're wearing white pajamas, and they have shoulder length hair. This person's beard and seemingly permanent scowl are unmistakable. Once the man successfully realizes who this person is, his blood runs cold.

In front of him was one of his best friends, SMG3. He was chained to the wall by his hands and neck, with a cloth tied around his mouth to prevent him from speaking. His eyes have bags under them, and his hair is very messy. Four recognized his PJ's because he had seen them hanging up in his lair once, white decorated with purple skulls. He might've called them cute if the two of them were currently in a different situation.

After noticing the state that his poor friend was in, he realized that Mr. Puzzles must've taken him out of his own bedroom! The two friends' eyes make contact and Three glares at Four. Did he think that Four was responsible for this?

"Hey. Don't drag Three into this. He has no business-" Four pauses as Mr. Puzzles holds a knife to Three's neck.

"Be my villain and I see no reason to kill him. Refuse? Your dear friend leaves this earth." The TV man says threateningly.

"What? No!" Four says, walking towards the cyborg and preparing for a fight.

"Come any closer and this knife goes in his throat." He warns Four as he pauses. There had to be another way to get Three back without anyone getting hurt... he just had to figure out what that was.

Mr. Puzzles then tosses the object he had been holding to Four, who catches it out of reflex. Taking a better look at it, Four realizes what it is. The USB for the video he went crazy over last year. This caused so much pain for the whole kingdom when both their princess and their castle descended into the fleshy pit. Once Four gave this video up, he thought he would never see it again, yet here it was staring him in the eyes.

He throws it to the ground, looking at the villain with a look of pure disgust.

"How did you find this?"

"Enough questions! My patience has been worn thin." Mr. Puzzles snaps, pressing the knife point lightly against Three's skin.

Four looks between Three and Mr. Puzzles, conflicted on what to decide. Does he take the deal and save Three's life? Or does he refuse, save the new castle, but lose him forever? The choice should be easy, but Four still finds himself faltering. Now, why does this seem so familiar?

Of course, the answer lies within the monster pit. He had a choice to either save Three or the USB, and he chose one of his closest friends over anything else. Four looks over at his friend who is uncharacteristically shaking, almost like he feared his fate. This time, when the two make eye contact, the only thing present in Three's face is horror.

"Okay! I will, just please don't hurt my friends!" Four cries out as the knife gets dropped by the villain.

"Excellent choice." Mr. Puzzles says, snapping his fingers as the USB appears in Four's computer. The Perfect Video begins to play and the editing adware that Four prayed he would never have to see again returns.

"It is time to update your video, it is not quite as PERFECT as it once was. Let's get started!" It orders.

As the keyboard reappears on Four's desk, it beckons for him to type on it. This is exactly what happened the first time, when he was possessed, and he destroyed the entire castle. Did he really want to relapse? After everything that they all went through? After all that Three did for him?

Sorry, Three. Four thinks, feeling guilty, but still knowing that he had no choice. He had to do this to save him, to save everyone.

He looks back at where his friend was, surprised to see that both him and Mr. Puzzles were in the same spot. Puzzles evilly smiles at Three before plunging the knife straight into his throat.

Three's eyes widen once he realizes what is happening.

He lets out a blood curdling scream as the knife is ripped out just as quickly as it was stabbed in. Four places both hands over his mouth as tears threaten to fall.

"N-no! Three!" Four screams, trying to get out of the chair to help the dying man, but he found himself stopping in his tracks.

He felt sick to his stomach and unable to move, instead just watching with horror. Three chokes on his blood, unable to say anything more as it poured out of the wound. Being unable to breathe now, and with an unattended open cut in his neck, his body quickly became limp. SMG3 was gone, the life taken from his beautiful eyes forever.

Four's heart begins to beat quickly, and he feels his breathing begin to speed up as well.

"I was going to kill him either way. There was no way you could've saved him." Mr. Puzzles shrugs before tossing his knife at one of Four's bedroom walls. "It's best you get to work before I find the others."

Four falters, basically falling back in his chair as the reality finally sinks in. Three, one of his best friends was just killed, right before his eyes. He was still watching the blood go everywhere, and he didn't do anything. He could have stopped this, and he will make sure that nothing like this ever happens again. Mr. Puzzles wouldn't lay another finger on any of his friends, no matter how much he threatened him.

Four takes another glance at the dead man who was still chained to the wall with a pool of his own blood below him. Then, all his misery just turned into a full-fledged anger towards the TV headed man. He had the nerve to say he was going to kill another person, after everything he just put Four through!

"You bastard!" Four screams, trying to jump up from his chair and attack the horrible villain.

Instead, he finds himself being restrained by the same tentacles as the first keyboard incident. They wrap around his body, feeling almost suffocating. His chair is forced to spin back around and face his screen. He trembles, realizing that he has no control over this situation. The more he struggles, the more he'll have to face the consequences. Who knows the lengths that Mr. Puzzles would be willing to go to?

"Don't push my buttons, SMG4. I think you should know better than that by now." He smirks, walking up to the dead Three and placing a hand to his throat.

Once he fully covers his glove in blood, he walks over to Four, whose eyes widen once he realizes what Mr. Puzzles is doing. He shudders as the bloody handprint marks his pristine white overalls.

This is Three's blood, he reminded himself. Three's blood is now on MY hands because I was too scared to help him.

"Y-yes, of course." He quietly says. "I'll work on it; I'll make it better."

"Just better? You know what the world expects of you, SMG4." He says in an icy tone, causing Four to gulp and obediently respond.

"I'll make it perfect." He says, staring at the blank editing screen that was basically begging him to begin. "It should be perfect..." He whispers to himself, disgusted at the words that were coming out of his mouth.

But what was he supposed to say? Mr. Puzzles had backed him into a corner, and he couldn't help but feel like it was all his fault.

His thoughts swirl as he continues to edit his video. Unlike last time, he had control, but he knew what would happen if he tried to get up. Because Three was dead and it was all his fault. He could hear Three's scream in the back of his mind, playing repeatedly, but this time as Mario, Meggy, and Tari. He just wished... that he wasn't so pathetic. That he was a little bit better, more brave, more considerate. That he was... more perfect.

Because, sometimes, it's just gotta be perfect.

~~~

"No!" Four yells, jolting out of bed.

The poor Meme Guardian's face was caked with sweat, tears streaming down his face as he hyperventilated. Attempting to calm himself down, he begins to take deep breaths, but the breathing just turns into broken sobs. All he could bring himself to think about was his horrible nightmare. Every night for the past week has been torturous, each with a new nightmare worming its way into his mind. They all had the same theme: Mr. Puzzles coming back and that stupid keyboard taking him over again. Those two recent and traumatic events with Mr. Puzzles were enough to make Four extremely scared of what may be coming next, to the point where he could barely sleep at night.

It was horrible.

This was the first day that one of his friends was in his dream as well, adding a whole new layer of stress. Ever since Axol's death, Four has been very insistent on keeping everyone as safe as possible. Whenever he thinks about how Melony's spirit was broken when Axol died, it pushes him even more. He had never seen such a shattering look on anyone's face before, and he hopes to never see it again.

"Augh." Four hears a noise from his pet, Beeg SMG4, who must've been woken up by Four's incessant panicking.

"Sorry, Beeg. I just had a nightmare." He consoles the pet.

"Augh." The thing suggested, huddling back under his covers.

"That's a good idea, actually. Making memes does help me calm down!" He says thankfully to Beeg.

"AUGH." He screeches at his father.

"Jeez, fine." Four chuckles softly, putting the covers over the meme's head and turning on the lights to his bedroom.

The man gets to work making his newest video. It was a parody of Bob's Burgers, and he was about halfway done. Editing almost felt like second nature to him, and he felt like he could be on his computer for hours without even noticing. Today was Wednesday; or, technically, Thursday, if it was late enough into the night, and he needed to be finished with his video by tomorrow night. To find out the correct day, he checks the time as he clicks on the editing application, hoping that he wasn't up too late.

The time reads 12:34 A.M, just like in his dream.

He gasps, backing away from his computer in fear. His hand trembles over the Shut Down button, terrified of his greatest fear becoming reality. Crossing his fingers in his left hand, he clicks the button with his right. Four eagerly waits for the computer to have problems like it did in his nightmare, his body in a fighting position.

Anticlimactically, the computer screen turns black and stays that way. Four sighs in relief as he sits back in his computer chair. How could he be so stupid? It was just a dream, there was no way it could actually come true. All these fights that he's been having with the recent villains and everything that he's been through has finally taken a toll on his brain, causing him to see and believe things that weren't true.

Maybe he really did need to just rest, after all.

He'd try his best to just push everything out of his mind.

Right as he's done calming down, there's an aggressive knock at his door. He yelps, jumping into the corner and curling into a ball. Of course, he had to go and jinx his luck!

No, there's no way that Mr. Puzzles is at my door right now... is there?

He begins quietly panicking as the door is banged on yet again. When he refuses to answer, there's an annoyed huff from the other side of the door. Now, that was either Four's wild imagination or the villain was really on the other side of his door. His unlocked door, which the person was now trying to open. As the person in the hallway lets themselves in, Four tries to make himself invisible.

"Yo, SMG4. I saw that the light was on and assumed you were up. Can I borrow some sugar?"

Instead of a creepy TV man, Four is met with a familiar face and a heavy Australian accent. SMG3 is wearing purple pajamas, thankfully different from the white ones with skulls in Four's dream. They still looked just as cute on Three as the other ones did, however. Now Four knew that he didn't just have a glorified image of Three in his head, the real person was just as handsome. Now that he thought about it, had his friend always looked this handsome, or was it just the pajamas? Four shakes his head at himself, the gay thoughts disappearing just as quickly as they came about.

The friend who he was just fantasizing about stares at him as he sits on the floor. A quiet chuckle escaped his lips as he gave Four a slightly patronizing look. He would usually take this opportunity to say that he's pathetic, because he clearly looked like it, but he just uncharacteristically kept his mouth shut as he looked at the jarred man in confusion. He looked funny, just sitting there and looking up at him with his usual big eyes.

"Um, sugar?" Four asks, his voice sounding dry and crackly because of the few times he's cried and panicked tonight.

"Dude. Did you swallow a cactus or something? Your throat is really hoarse." He laughs at his counterpart, yet you could still tell that he cared for him just as much as he wanted to make fun of him.

Instead of showing his weaknesses, Four tries to rebuild the walls that he usually has around his emotional stability. With a quick move of his hand, he wipes his tears away. Afterwards, he clears his throat, putting on his usual facade and beaming at his guardian partner. No one, especially not Three, needs to know of his struggles. He has been perfectly fine dealing with them alone, and there was no reason to turn to anyone now.

"Sorry about that. Do I sound better now?" He asks, his voice still softened as he gets up from the ground.

"Well, I can't just stay here all night. Do you have sugar or not?" Three raises an eyebrow, not answering Four's previous question.

"Yeah." Four says, switching off the light and getting up off of the ground. "Just follow me and try to not wake Beeg up."

"Whatever." He rolls his eyes.

Four closes the door lightly and tiptoes through the main room, his quiet steps followed by Three's thundering ones. He looks down and notices that Three isn't just wearing his footies, he's also wearing his boots. He sighs in defeat. If that meme wakes up again, he had better yell at Three and not at his father this time. As the two continue their walk into the kitchen, something catches Four's eye.

He turns around to face it, and he is met with the frame of Mr. Puzzles, holding a glimmering knife up at the both of them. His eyes widen, his breath hitched in his throat as he begins to panic once more.

"Three, get behind me!" He screams, basically throwing himself in front of the other perplexed guardian.

"What-" Three jumps back and follows Four's gaze, confusion clearly present on his face. "Coat rack getting on your nerves, scrub?" He asks, pointing to Meggy's new sparkly silver hat, hanging on a hook.

"I..." The Youtuber's whole body freezes in place. "I don't..."

Four stays in the same position, tears beginning to stream down his face for the third time that night. His vision gets blurry as he falls to his knees, hyperventilating. There was no stopping the oncoming panic attack as Four's body began to feel numb. He begins to sob uncontrollably, fear consuming his thoughts in a whirlwind of pain, trauma, guilt, and shame. All the emotions he has been bottling up for the last year overflow, causing the floodgates to open. His blue meme energy zapped around him, slowly becoming unstable the longer that the attack went on. Slowly, he curled up into a position where he was grabbing his knees, curled up once more.

"Whoa! Whoa... SMG4, what's wrong?" Three asks before tentatively placing the measuring cup on the counter and leaning down next to Four. The crying man looks up at his friend, eyes glowing blue with the overload of Meme Energy that his emotions created. As their gazes found each other's, Three looked away with shame. He wasn't sure how to handle Four's emotions, especially when he was so inexperienced with these kinds of situations. Nevertheless, he would try his hardest, for his best friend. "Let's get this figured out, all right?"

Reluctantly, Three grabs Four's hand, trying to mellow out Four's negativity with some calmer Meme Energy. He uncurls himself, sitting crisscrossed on the floor and mimicking Three's position. A warm purple glow surrounds both men, slowly snuffing out the blue crackles of light. The more Three's stability got rid of Four's panic, the more chill the other man seemed to get.

Once all the energy was done calming Four down, Three began to let go of Four's hand. Before he could do that completely, Four squeezed his hand tightly, indicating that he didn't want to let the other go just yet. The man in blue was still violently shaking and crying, but his breathing had seemed to return to normal. His mouth opened as he slowly leaned in closer to his friend, about ready to explain what had happened.

"I-I had a bad dream about Mr. Puzzles. And he told me that I had to go- I had to go back to my perfect video or else he'd kill you with a knife." Four sobs. "And I had to choose, and I chose what he wanted, but then the tentacles surrounded me, and he still killed you anyway and I can't help but feel like... It's all my fault." He speaks in one long sentence, trying his absolute best not to break down again.

He looks up at Three, who is listening intently. Feeling a sense of comfort wash over him, Four turns his body around and hugs the man sitting next to him with sincerity that neither have ever shown to each other. Yet here Four was, doing this now. Three couldn't be more flustered with his actions, but he decides to enjoy this rare moment of affection between them and hugs back with the same emotion. If there was any way to tell Four that he was there for him without saying anything, it would be exactly like this.

Luckily, no words needed to be spoken. Four got the message clearly.

When the two stop hugging, Three decides that it was finally time to talk about what had just happened.

"Look, SMG4. You don't have to feel that way. Just know that you can talk to any of your friends about this. I- we would gladly take time out of our lives to help you. You're like the kind of glue that holds us all together. The annoying, idiotic, unfunny, yet warm, sweet, and lovable glue. I mean it when I say this, we'd all be lost if it weren't for you." He blushes softly, trying not to make eye contact with him again.

"Aw, Three..." Four smiles.

"Let me finish, scrub." He scoffs, giving him a small look before continuing. "You do so much for everyone, and you always have an amazing attitude about it. No one could have guessed that you were struggling with your emotions. So next time, talk to someone, okay? Because if you keep suppressing everything, and for lack of a better word, 'pulling an SMG4', your mental health is only going to decline. So, just talk to someone, damn it." He says, the last words lacking the bite that they were supposed to have.

"That's what we're calling it?" Four quietly giggles, the life in his eyes returning. "Pulling an SMG4?"

"Yep, it can be a little inside joke." Three smiles along with Four, standing up before lending a hand to help him.

"Three?" Four says softly as he accepts his friend's help. "Thank you, seriously."

"No problem. Just don't expect me to do this when people are around." He gives Four a sideways glance, causing him to guffaw even louder than before.

"Oh, no. We wouldn't want anyone to know that the great SMG3 has a sensitive side." He mocks, pouring sugar into the measuring cup and handing it to Three.

"Shut up!" Three blushes in embarrassment. As happy as he was that Four was returning to his normal self, he still hated how flustered the man made him. "You baka." With that, he aggressively grabs the container and storms out of the kitchen. Four follows him, knowing that it was all in good fun, watching him as he swings open the front doors to the castle. The chilly breeze hits them both and Three checks his watch. "It's 12:45 now. I'll see myself out, then. I'm sure that Eggdog misses me."

"Okay. See you tomorrow, Three." Four says longingly as his friend walks away from the castle and across the lawn to his café.

"Bye, idiot." Three waves before turning around.

Was it selfish of him to want Three by his side for even longer? Was it weird for him to silently wish that they never let go of each other? He may never get around to admitting this aloud, but his friend's touch was surprisingly comforting and warm. And he could listen to Three's voice all day long, especially if he were in the rare mood to give him compliments like he was tonight.

The next thing he knew, Four was bolting after Three, his footsteps making marks on the moonlit grass. He had no shoes on, no gloves on, and no hat on. He was just running, exposing himself to the elements, not having an apparent reason to do so. If Four did have something compelling in the back of his mind, it was unbeknownst even to him.

"Wait!" He calls after the man, grabbing Three's silky purple sleeve.

Three turns around, his face illuminated by the moon in the night sky. He gives Four a weird look, yet it still had some of that softness from earlier. Some of that same vulnerability that he never showed. Four looks at the other guardian, completely unsure of what to do next. He certainly got the other's attention! Whether that was a good idea or not, he would have to see where this took him. Four's beautiful blue eyes stare into Three's mesmerizing red eyes. Both wait for the other to say or do something, creating tension so thick that you could cut it.

Four slowly leans into Three, his eyes on the other's lips. He wasn't sure what he was implying with this romantic gesture, and he just hoped that the other wouldn't reject it. Three looks at Four weirdly until it clicks. Once he catches onto what Four is doing, he also leans in. Four is surprised, but also very excited and intrigued.

Their lips meet each other's in the middle for a passionate kiss. Now this was unexplored territory. Hugging didn't even come close to the love that these two were exchanging. The two have shared some... intimate moments, to say the least, but they have never just kissed. Not even during the TikTok challenges video. They managed to stop right before they locked lips. But now that they don't hate each other anymore, this act was less awkward and more loving. If Mario were here, you know he would be screaming the "Praise Jesus" meme, on account of him trying to get the two together for the better part of ten years.

They kiss each other slowly, wanting to savor the moment as long as possible. Three's free hand moves so that it is positioned on Four's waist, and the other puts his hands in Three's hair as they begin to go a little deeper. This was heavenly for both of them, as it was everything they've ever wanted. The two pull apart to catch their breath, staring at each other lovingly and passionately.

Then they snap out of it.

"Shit, I'm sorry!" I don't know what came over me!" Four yells, quickly apologizing for his reckless actions.

Three stares at the ground, trying to process what just happened. Then, he drops his measuring cup in shock, the container shattering into thousands of tiny fragments. He still stands there, unresponsive, for a few more seconds, before he looks up at his friend with a face as red as a beet.

"YOU'RE SUCH A FUCKING BAKA, SMG4!" He screams, running into his café and slamming the doors shut behind him.

Four is left to pick up the pieces, literally, as he glances at the broken glass on the ground. Then, he does something completely unexpected as he squeals with joy.

"You did it, Four!" He smiles, giving himself a high five. "I kissed him, hell yeah!" He pumps his fist in the air as he walks back inside, knowing for sure that he wouldn't be having any more bad dreams.

As for Three, he stayed up the rest of the night with a dark blush on his face, unable to close his eyes without seeing Four's eyes and hearing his laugh. But that was what every night was like for the man in purple. He'd been in love with Four for as long as he could remember and couldn't stop thinking about him.

And now that he knew what Four tasted like? He may never be able to sleep again.

~~~

5031 Words

Chapter 3: A Spare Umbrella ☁️ {Marware}

Summary:

TW: Swearing

Mr. Puzzles forgets to bring an umbrella, and can't risk getting rained on... too bad that the only one who can help him is his sworn enemy, Mario.

This oneshot takes place three days after "Mr. Puzzles' Lowest Point".

Chapter Text

Damnit.

The rain began unexpectedly, the thunder rumbling while Mr. Puzzles was walking home from the store. He barely had enough time to duck under a bus stop before the water poured all over his head. Of course, his foolish self totally spaced and forgot to bring an umbrella, making it impossible for the TV man to move from his spot. He was now stuck, left to wait out the rain or wait for a bus.

He checks the time on his old-fashioned watch, groaning in annoyance. It's 10 pm... the store he was at had just closed. There was no way any buses would still be running at this hour. Sometimes, having a television set for a head was a terrible thing, but the magic that it gave him was worth it. Or at least it was until Mario screwed it all up.

That ruffian was his largest opponent when it came to his major goal: achieving five stars and getting to feel the rush of his invulnerability. He ruined all of Mr. Puzzles' plans in April, humiliated him in front of his only friend in July, and... he didn't like to talk about the Pedro incident last month. He was at a complete loss for ideas, barely being able to pay his mortgage for his studio. Every day, he sat in the basement, murdering cardboard cutouts of Mario.

His largest mistake was just a few days ago, when he subjected himself to brainrot. He tried to please the masses, which in this case was children. He was frowned upon by adults and praised by little ones that sat on their iPads all day. He shuddered at the thought that he could ever stoop that low.

Ever since he lost Leggy, it has been a struggle trying to convert her other form, Meggy, to rejoin him. She screamed at him last week, covering him with paint from her splat gun. She looked conflicted, however, which means that he would get her back one day. Whether that was sooner or later, he couldn't tell, but for now he was stuck under this godforsaken bus stop.

He probably looked like a dweeb, just sitting there in the cold. He watches the people go by, each of them giving him an odd look from the cover of their umbrellas. Most of them had small ones, but one woman came by with a humongous one. She was walking quickly while still trying to hold the exceptionally large umbrella daintily.

There was certainly room for one more under that umbrella, and he decided to take the opportunity to speak up and ask. It was certainly better than sitting out in this poor weather for an unknown amount of time.

"Miss, would you happen to have any spare room under your umbrella? My electronics cannot get wet." He politely addresses her.

"Just take off that TV head, you freaky cosplayer." She scoffs.

"Miss, this is a real television." Mr. Puzzles says, knocking on his metal head.

"Uh huh, great. I'm late for a party, so I can't talk. Just use your head as an umbrella or something." She says, speed walking away and burying her face in her phone.

"Imbeciles!" The man sighs, banging his gloved hand against the plastic wall of the bus stop and drawing even more concerned looks from the civilians around the enclosure. "I concisely explain why I need the umbrella, and she just calls me a cosplayer? I'm surprised more people didn't like Puzzlebox. She seems like the epitome of an idiotic, childlike moron."

Now the TV headed man looked even more weird, talking to himself like he was mentally unstable. People walked by with umbrellas that were larger than most, but they thought he was some scary person whose life consisted of living in a bus stop and pleading for money on the streets. These types of people were not the best to be around at night, therefore making him a person that was severely avoided.

He slumps down on the bench in defeat as the lamppost light dims. No one was coming his way, and the rain was still pouring just as hard as it had been twenty minutes ago. Mr. Puzzles loses hope, deciding to just screw it and try to get some sleep in this limited space. Unfortunately, he can't lay down because his slender body is too long for the bench. He gets back up, continuing to watch the foot traffic as less people walk by.

All of a sudden, he hears someone humming a very familiar tune.

"La, la, la! Hmm, hmm, hmm, hmm!" Mario walks down the street with a bounce in his step and a large umbrella.

Oh, great! The one person that Mr. Puzzles despises the most, here at this exact time! How convenient! Was this the universe's form of karma for enslaving Mario and his friends? Or was it just really, really bad luck? Mario was on the same side of the street as the bus stop that held Mr. Puzzles, and he was approaching fast. What was he supposed to do? Hide? Panic? This didn't happen often, but he was at a total loss of what to do.

The fat Italian strolls past Mr. Puzzles, not paying any attention to him. Of course, he should have expected the man to do something like that. Mario was easily one of the stupidest people he knew, yet he was so hard to manipulate and bend to his will. The tall man found it very infuriating, but also fascinating. He always wondered how Mario was able to do so much while doing so little.

Then, he freezes when he realizes that Mario had turned back around. The man in red's eyes were glued to the other's screen with an expression of confusion.

"Tee vee man?" He questions, his voice slightly faltering in surprise. "Why are you out here in the rain?"

"Go away, you disgusting brute!" Mr. Puzzles says angrily, pointing his long pointer finger to a building far down the street.

"Mario wants to know. Is Tee vee man homeless?" He asks, inquisitively putting a hand on his hip.

"What... no...?" The glare on his screen twists into an amused eyebrow raise. "I'm plotting your demise, of course."

"You're plotting Mario's dee-mize." He echoes. "In a bus stop?"

"This may not get through your idiotic brain, but bus stops, especially ones constructed in this particular way, are very important sources of information. In fact, without the structure shielding those who pay for public transportation, our society would be a lot worse off due to the- Hey! Are you even listening?" Mr. Puzzles yells when he realizes that Mario was snoring while standing up.

"Mario's bored. Too many words. If you want to get famous, you've got to have this many words." He says, moving his pointer finger and his thumb very close together to portray a small amount.

"I don't know who you think you are. I take advice from no one, especially not from the likes of you." Mr. Puzzles rolls his eyes, motioning for the fat Italian to move along.

"Why not take advice from Mario? It's not like you're a very good Tee vee man, anyway." Mario remarks, causing the TV headed man to look up at him with surprise.

"Excuse me?!" He scoffs.

"You can't get real actors without brainwashing them, you tried to-a steal Mario's mustache, you took Meggy and tried to mind control her-"

Mr. Puzzles sees red, his scary face with the realistic eyeballs and lips appearing. He grabs the short Italian by the collar of his shirt and growls into his ear. His umbrella falls to the ground and his face is laced with fear.

"Leggy was not mind controlled, you dimwit! She was my only friend!" His voice glitches out with rage.

"Oh, Mario forgot that Tee vee man doesn't have his magic."

"So? I can still pulverize you!" He hisses through his digital equivalent of teeth.

Mario kicks him in the nuts, causing him to fall to the ground, writhing in pain. The Italian laughs as he sits there with a very deep glare.

"Mario doesn't think you're so scary." He giggles, booping Mr. Puzzles' screen where he expected his nose to be.

A blush like a heartbeat monitor appears on the tall man's screen as he violently pushes Mario out into the cold rain. Mr. Puzzles watches, looking satisfied as Mario begins to slightly shiver, even if the smile never erases from his face.

"Heh." He snickers, pressing the record button on his face.

He'd be sure to put this in his new movie.

"If you are trying to torture Mario, then you're failing badly." He snickers, crossing his arms as he shakes out his umbrella.

A single drop lands on Mr. Puzzles' antenna, and it fizzles. It may not have looked like much, but it was excruciatingly painful to the man who felt it.

"Fucking hell!" He shrieks, his entire body tensing up.

Mario looks up at him and notices the singular drop of water rolling down his screen. The TV man wipes it off as quickly as he can, but not before Mario is able to put two and two together. He may be stupid, but there was a fine line between stupid and blind.

"You lie! Naughty, naughty!" He says, scowling at the villain.

"What are you talking about? Can't you just leave me alone to study my bus stop?"

"Mario knows why you're here. You can't get wet! And you wanted to steal Mario's umbrella!" He says, wrapping his arms around it tightly.

"I wasn't going to steal your umbrella. I'd rather disintegrate than have to touch anything your filthy fingers touched." Mr. Puzzles sighs, his face slightly wrinkling up.

"Mario just went to the laundry Matt."

"The laundromat." He corrects, giving him an angry look.

"Nope! The laundry Matt! The guy named Matt who does my laundry! My gloves are squeaky clean!" He says, waving them in Mr. Puzzles' face. "Tee vee man isn't very bright."

"That's it! Leave!" He yells.

"Okay. Mario was going to offer you a place under his umbrella, but if you want to look like the guy that lives in the Skibidi toilet, stay here." He giggles, motioning to Mr. Puzzles' frazzled state.

As Mario walks away, the television considers his offer. All it took was ten minutes to get to his studio. Ten minutes, and then he would never have to talk about this with anyone ever again. He groans, frustrated that he was even considering this, but what other options did he even have at this point? He certainly didn't want to look like a brainrot meme like Mario said. He was scarred enough by his mistakes regarding those horrible things that children call "entertainment".

"Wait." He calls out pathetically, making Mario turn around.

"Change your mind, Tee vee man?" He smiles slyly.

"I need to go to my studio. If you are willing to help me, then you will need some directions. It's five minutes southeast down the path, then you turn so you're headed north for another five." He says, pointing in different directions.

"Mario is not Albert Einstein." He says simply. "Lead the way, Tee vee man!"

"My name is Mr. Puzzles, you idiot. Would you stop calling me that?" He sighs, taking the umbrella in his own hands.

"Tee vee man, Puzzles, that's basically the same thing." Mario says, passing his large umbrella to him as their hands touch briefly.

"Don't touch me with your grimy hands!" He shrieks, rolling his eyes dramatically.

He had a feeling that this was going to be the longest ten minutes of his life.

Mr. Puzzles begins to walk, taking large strides as he holds the umbrella. He isn't very careful as to whether it covers both of them, in fact he couldn't care less if it covered Mario. The rain was still pouring, and if it got on his TV head, oh boy! It would be game over, that much he knew for sure! He also didn't care if it shielded them both because it was Mario. His nemesis offered him cover, but he was still going to be an asshole. It was kind of what he did. Mario, on the other hand, was getting rain all over himself. He had to jog just to keep up with the tall man's pace, and the rain was constantly pelting his back. He wasn't the most athletic, considering he sat on his ass and ate spaghetti all day, so running really took a toll on him.

Finally, Mario was fed up and he yanked Mr. Puzzles' leg, hard. The man slips and drops the umbrella, panicking as he braces for impact with the water. It was a lucky thing that Mario had good reflexes and caught it, covering Mr. Puzzles fully. Holding the umbrella in his right hand, he supports the lanky cyborg with his left hand. The two of them stare at each other for a second before Mr. Puzzles shoots up, taking the umbrella up with him. Mario sighs in defeat and crosses his arms.

"Tee vee man. Hold the umbrella where Mario can stay dry too, it's big enough." He whines, grabbing a hold of Mr. Puzzles' leg again.

This time, he doesn't fall. Instead, he just glares down at the Italian man, who was about two feet shorter than the seven foot nine-inch TV headed man. Mario was 5'8 and barely got past Puzzles' legs.

"Stop being an idiot. I'm too tall to worry about you." He sighs.

"Then shrink. Mario's seen you do it before." Mario shrugs.

"If you must know, when I shrink, it's all or nothing. I either turn into a TV or I'm in this tall body." Mr. Puzzles hastily explains. "Now if you could hurry, I really must be getting back to my studio-"

"Shrink into a TV then. Mario can hold you in his left hand and the umbrella in his right hand."

"No! And risk you dropping my beautiful face and it getting wet?" He scoffs. "You're out of your mind."

"Maybe Mario's crazy, but at least he has an idea. Tee vee man is just sitting there like a whiny baby."

"You will not compare me to a child, you brat!" He yells, fed up with the Italian.

"Or, Mario could just take the umbrella away and leave Tee vee man here to die." He shrugs.

"No!" Mr. Puzzles yells before groaning with defeat. "Ugh, fine, I guess you can carry me. Gently."

"Hooray! See, Mario can be smart." He grins, wrapping his arm around the TV man as he collapses into his head.

They walk in silence for a little bit, with Mr. Puzzles clearly upset and uncomfortable. He did not like the situation that they were in, nor did he appreciate being manhandled by a grubby Italian. He squirms all over the place, making it difficult for Mario to hold onto him. Somehow, the man is able to keep a steady grip on him.

"Turn left here." He says, his voice muffled.

His speaker was covered by Mario's palm. Despite being a cyborg with a TV head, he could still smell just fine. He was disgusted by the way that Mario's gloves smelled, attempting to hold his breath but failing miserably. There was no way that Mario did his laundry. Mario looks down at him weirdly, his hold on the umbrella faltering, but Mr. Puzzles glares back, causing his hand to tighten around it.

Mr. Puzzles listens to the sounds around him, trying to appreciate the nighttime and nature. They had turned away from the city, and it was somehow raining harder than before. He listened to it like a sound machine, pleased with the inconsistency of the raindrops on the sidewalk.

His peace is cut short as Mario begins to walk through a wetter area. His brown plumbing boots (which he never actually used for plumbing) sloshed through the puddles. He quickly became annoyed before he realized that he had a bigger problem. If Mario was too ignorant and walked too fast, the water would splash on him, and he would short circuit painfully.

He tries to keep quiet, trusting the fat Italian to the best of his abilities, before a particularly large puddle comes into view. Mario steps in it with his left foot before sliding across the slippery sidewalk clumsily. He had taken a wrong step and was about to fall to the ground! Acting quickly, Mr. Puzzles extends his body to its full height, grabbing Mario by the collar and lifting him up. Mario still holds on tightly to the umbrella.

Mario yelps in surprise, the other man's dry boots stopping their forward movement. He was many feet shorter than the cyborg, who was looking at him with a sharp glare. He bites his lip, staring at the other with a sort of intense curiosity. They continue to stay in that position for a minute or so, both admiring each other's faces. If Mr. Puzzles wasn't so pissed, he might've kissed Mario. TVs weren't able to kiss like a normal person, instead giving zaps of electricity or kissing through their vents.

He contemplated pressing his vent to Mario's mouth, tasting him like he would food. He expected him to taste like spaghetti, but what would he give to try... instead of thinking, he slowly brought his vent at the bottom of his screen closer to Mario's face. Mario looked confused at first but quickly realized that the man was going in for a kiss. Or, at least, the television equivalent.

Mario wasn't opposed to the idea at all, he just didn't expect Mr. Puzzles to be the one to initiate it. They hated each other's guts. Then again, that's how Three and Four were in the past. They were always trying to kill each other, and now they were close friends and neighbors. He didn't know what changed, but he wondered if maybe Mr. Puzzles and him could be like that too? It'd be the perfect enemies to lovers story.

Mario also leans in, the two being inches away from each other. Just as he was about to close the gap, Mr. Puzzles snaps out of his funk, takes the umbrella, and drops Mario to the sidewalk. He gasps in shock, shaming himself in his head for even thinking about kissing that thing. What was he doing with his life? He had way better things to do than think about romance with the man who took Leggy away from him!

"Tee vee man, I..." Mario pauses, bringing his free hand to his lips as he tries to collect himself.

Then both of them realize at the same time that the rain has finally stopped. There was no more thunder, lightning, and most importantly, raindrops. Mr. Puzzles could now make it safely to his studio. Speaking of his studio, it was within maybe thirty feet. If he made a dash, he could make it there before any rain began again.

"I appreciate your help, Mario." He says through his teeth, trying to sound grumpy per usual. "I believe I can make it home now."

He walks to his door, screaming when Mario tugs on his overall strap and pulls him backwards.

"Were you trying to... kiss Mario?" He asks in innocent confusion.

A blush similar to a red heartbeat monitor appears on the TV man's face as his eyes widen. How was he going to explain this without looking like a fool? That he wanted to kiss him senseless for no reason?

"Goodnight." He says, tipping his hat and slamming the door.

He locks it before Mario can come back in, breathing heavily and sinking to the cold cement floor. What was wrong with him? They were enemies and there never could be anything between them. Rephrased, there never will be anything between them. He will not care for people in that way. He was a villain, not some sappy person.

...Or did he want to be more than just the guy who tried to kill Mario and his group of friends? Did he want a life with Mario? He knew he was gay, but it was almost embarrassing to be gay for Mario, out of all people. Did he want a relationship with the fat Italian after all?

He walks over to his TV stand, folding himself back in and going into "sleep" mode. The rain starts up again, hitting against the windows of the studio with quiet pitter-patters. Romantic shit is too much to think about, especially on a dark, stormy night like this.

~~~

3454 Words

Chapter 4: The New Café 🥝☁️❓{SMG34}

Summary:

TW: Making Out, Swearing

Welcome to Three's Coffee N' Bombs, now open for business! Let's hope that Four and his friends don't fuck up the opening day...

This oneshot is a rewrite of the episode "SMG3'S BOMB CAFE".

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Three stands outside of his new home, grinning proudly. This café marks the official end of his banishment, although he first came back a few years ago. He was happy to have a fresh start, but also sad to leave his old place. His neighborhood if you will. He thinks back to the times he had and the memories he made back in the Internet Graveyard.

He was banished by his rival, SMG4, who was way up his own ass in Three's opinion. Three lived there for a while, the dead memes naming him the lord of the entire realm. He remembers being immensely proud of himself, as fame and power were everything to him at the time. Then, he learned about his origins from the very old memes taking residence in the Graveyard. He was a Meme Guardian whose destiny was to save the world. He laughed it off, thinking that the memes were just going crazy because of their age.

Then Four and his group of idiots returned to his life. They had to save the world after all, finding out many things about their lives, including why their names were so similar. SMG stood for Super Meme Guardian. The two were cosmically linked guardian partners, destined to always be in each other's lives. Thank memes they weren't brothers, or Three may have puked on the spot.

He went back to his normal life for a while, then some shit happened with an angry monkey. Three barely had anything to do with it, yet he still got redesigned and forced to sing in a courthouse, of all places. Thinking back, it was very unprofessional to call a witness a Minion in front of a judge. At least he got a cool beard...

After the redesign, he began to hang out with their friend group, deciding to be more of an inconvenience than an evil villain out for blood. Four seemed to be satisfied with Three's change of heart, but Three refused to be friends. Even if he was growing to like the idiot, he would still rather die than be the man's friend.

And then, he really changed.

When Four went crazy and locked himself in his room, Three found himself showing a softer side that he didn't even know he had. He checked up on his counterpart hourly, dropping off food, water, and coffee. He finally just let himself in, with the inkling turned human Meggy, who was just trying to leave Four be. When Three ignored Meggy's pleas to give the man some space, the two of them saw that Four's mental state had gone off the rails. He had corrupted the castle and needed to be saved.

Three, Meggy, and Mario went in and got to Four, but were pulled into the eldritch sludge by some creepy-ass tentacles. Three decided to open himself up to Four, getting all his feelings off his chest. It somehow got through to the man and they ended up saving him. SMG4 finished his video, jumped out with SMG3, and... Three slipped down the wall, just barely being caught by Four. He had to either choose Three or the USB, and he chose Three after he reminded him that they were friends. After that whole fiasco, the two hung out together a lot and their connection grew stronger.

Then, out of impulse, Three bought a diary. He began to write down all his secrets and feelings in it. He didn't really guard it that heavily until he began to write about some suspicious things. Some extremely suspicious things.

Dear Diary,

YOU HEARD NOTHING BUT I THINK I LIKE SMG4. He's so funny and charming, and his laugh is fucking cute. I guess I didn't really notice how mesmerizing his eyes were until I stared into them more often. I don't wanna be a tsundere or anything, but I still have to act tough, right? Because I don't think he likes men.

After he wrote that, the pages were filled with crazy thoughts and fantasies that he knew would never come true. He might've even mentioned the igloo incident, in great detail. His writing got so descriptive that he blushed at the thought of it. He explained, and remembered, just how Four smelled, tasted, and... Memes, Three, that's enough!

He smelled like cheap cologne, if anyone was wondering. (Even if they weren't, now they have that info.)

The more he wrote about the intimate moment that those two shared, he began to realize just how deep those feelings for Four were. He didn't just like him, he loved him. He could never tell, though! Imagine how much that would destroy him!

Afterwards, he guarded the notebook with his life, naturally making people wonder what was inside of it, especially Four and Mario. They were constantly trying to steal it and exploit Three's secrets. They were far from succeeding until October, when Mario stole it, took it to a casino, and made Three panic. Four agreed to help him retrieve it after he mentioned the igloo, and they barely won. They shared a nice moment after that, watching the sunset, when Three thought about something. If I really enjoy the time I spend with Four, why don't I just move in? Then, we'd see each other daily.

So, move in he did! The place was well constructed and beautifully decorated, if he did say so himself. It had everything that an SMG3 styled café would need in it, including an unsettling number of bombs. A few minutes before it opened, he brought his crush in to see what he thought. As Four admires it, he has a weird look on his face, almost like he couldn't decide if he liked it or not.

"Eh." Four shrugs.

"The fuck you mean, eh? I worked hard on this, scrub!"

"Well, making coffee requires you to have a very beeg brain, which obviously-" Three throws a lit bomb at his head, immediately silencing him. That idiot was a real handful sometimes.

Then, the bell on the door dings as Boopkins walks in, admiring the café with stars in his eyes.

"This is so pretty!" He exclaims as Eggdog seats him at a table.

"What would you like?" Eggdog speaks in wobbly English, wearing an apron.

"Erm, I'll have a cappuccino?" He says in his annoying voice.

"CAP-A-CHI-NO." The meme calls out to his father.

"Coming right up!" Three says.

As he stares at the coffee machine, the buttons slowly begin to change into a foreign language. It was obviously a figment of his imagination, but it was still very confusing. Four, noticing Three's struggles, leans over the counter and smirks.

"Need my help?"

"No." Three says, blushing furiously.

"Bork!" As they continue to struggle, Eggdog watches the customer grow impatient. "Bork!" His barks increase in loudness and frequency. Hurry the hell up!

Three gasps and scolds Eggdog, while Four just stands there, confused. After all, he was the only one who seemed to understand what the pup was saying.

"We don't use that language!"

No promises.

"Eggdog..."

"Okay. Only because I am a good little eggy and I love you." He says this in English, seemingly satisfying his father.

"Erm, can I get my coffee now?" The aquatic piece of shit, Boopkins, interrupts their conversation with a shaky raised hand.

"Entertain our guest." Three tells Eggdog, the meme complying and dancing cutely.

He presses random buttons on the machine, only for it to malfunction. Then, it began to pour out something black and sludgy. Four cringes at the sight of the "coffee", praying that Boopkins had the smarts to not drink that. Three, on the other hand, looked proud, grabbing the cup and happily walking over.

"Wait." Four says, grabbing Three's sleeve. "Are you sure that's even edible?"

"It's not edible, it's drinkable. Idiot." He sighs, taking a sip to prove his point. "Oh shit, that's melted gunpowder-" His head falls off and Four laughs at Three's misfortune.

"You really do need help."

"You'd be willing to help me?" Three asks, his head reattached.

"No."

"Screw you-"

"JUST MAKE SOME COF-EE!" Eggdog screams, his request going ignored as the two men continue to argue.

Eggdog walks over to the coffee brewer and clicks a few buttons. Steaming hot coffee began to pour out into a cute cappuccino cup. The puppy grins happily and barks at his father, trying to get his attention. Three looks up as he sees the coffee cup resting neatly on the counter.

"Yes!" He yells, running over to Boopkins' table and slamming the tiny mug down.

Everyone in the café, AKA the three of them, stares at Boopkins as he takes a sip. Three's business kind of depended on this, and Four was just waiting for something to go wrong. Instead, Boopkins looks up at them with a pleased look on his face.

"Hey, that's pretty good!" He gives Three a thumbs up, causing Three to smirk at Four as he grins back.

"Looks like you're a success! Why don't I just invite the whole gang over here?"

"Wait, maybe not that many people just yet!" Three shouts.

"Too late."

"La Cucaracha" plays on a car horn as the purple Meme Guardian sighs. Why does everything have to be so difficult with Four and his friends? He would pay money to just have one peaceful day at the Showgrounds. One! Maybe it wouldn't be as bad as he was expecting. He did have a reputation for being a pessimist, after all.

Mario comes up to the counter, ordering spaghetti. Obviously, Three didn't carry that, so he writes in his notes to give Mario a bomb painted like spaghetti. As Tari orders, Meggy and Bob start chaotically playing with the bombs and rocket launchers. Three looks at them out of the corner of his eye yet still paying attention to Tari and her order.

"I would like the Unicorn Frappuccino, please!" She says in her usual tone.

"What the hell is that." Three asks, giving Tari a weird look.

"Oh? Everyone knows what a Unicorn Frappuccino is. You mean to tell me that you don't carry the most popular drink in the world?" Four smirks.

"We... have those!" Three hesitates, walking over to the coffee machine.

As he tries to make the order, he hears a large explosion. Luigi is sent flying straight towards Eggdog, who is just dancing with Boopkins peacefully. Three jumps up and shoves Eggdog out of the way before Luigi's fat ass could squish him.

"Ahahahah." Bob laughs in his AI voice as Luigi groans in pain.

"Eggdog! Did that mean man hurt you?" Three yells, glaring daggers at Bob and Meggy. "You two- no more touching the merchandise, or else." He says.

Then, he walks back to the counter to find Mario crawling around on the coffee machine. He shoos the fat Italian away and then realizes that there is a rainbow liquid inside the mug that was intended for Tari's coffee. He stares weirdly at the drink before shrugging and giving it to Tari. It couldn't be that bad, right?

"Thank you!" She says, smiling at Three.

Then, just as Three relaxes, Saiko reaches her hand all the way over the counter and taps on his shoulder aggressively. Three looks back at Saiko evilly, but still somehow keeps his composure.

"Please don't touch me... thank you. Now, what can I get started for you?" He asks.

"Um, I would like-"

Boom!

Saiko is completely demolished by a rocket launcher shot by none other than Bob. After being cut in line twice and just disregarded by everyone that day, she was done.

Like, very done.

She turns around, her face full of fury, and asks Meggy and Bob very calmly, "Who shot that."

When she gets an answer of pointed fingers, she loses it. She begins throwing bombs at them, causing Meggy to hide in a barrel and Bob to launch rockets right back. It was a full-on gang war!

"You have got to be kidding me right now." Three sighs defeatedly.

Meanwhile, Tari sits peacefully at a table, ready to try her coffee. She has never had coffee before and she was so excited to finally try it! She takes a small sip, then another, really trying to savor it, and then her eyes widen. All the caffeine and sugar rush up to her brain, making her, well, crazy.

"Oh my gosh this is so good how have I never tried coffee before I have so much energy I could just- AAAAAA!" She screams, running in circles around the entire café.

Boopkins and Luigi hide under a table, trying to avoid getting hit by bombs, as Four quickly grabs Eggdog. Three, on the other hand, was angry and done with the SMG4 crew. He leaned against the counter, eyes shut tight. If one more person walked up to him before he calmed down, he swore to every single meme that-

"Can Mario have spaghetti?" Mario yells in his ear, making him jump.

"Mario..." Three says through gritted teeth, "We've talked about this."

"I want spaghetti! I want spaghetti! I want spaghetti!" He chants, pushing the Meme Guardian past his limits.

"We don't serve spaghetti. Get over it and buy a drink like everybody else for once."

"No spaghetti?" Mario asks, tears welling up in his large eyes.

"No spaghetti." Three clarifies as Mario drops to the floor, crying loudly as the chaos continues behind him.

Three internally freaks out as he watches his café get destroyed. Everything that he had taken weeks to build was getting torn apart by Four's sorry excuse for a friend group. The worst part of it was that Four seemed to be enjoying himself!

The meme man takes this moment as a chance to take one final crack at Three, smirking.

"So, you admit you can't run a café yet?"

Three's eye twitches, quickly reminding him of why he hates Four's friends. Why did he even become a part of this crew anyway?! He storms off, running down to his secret elevator.

He needed some time.

Four stares at the ground guiltily as he watches Three leave. He wants to stop him, to make him turn around, but that will only make Three more mad. Instead, he follows him, trying but failing to not lose his guardian partner. Three used the elevator, so Four decides to run down the staircase to Three's evil lair. The two meet up in a large, well-decorated bedroom with black things all around. Three is laying on the bed, crying, while Four revels in the beauty of the room.

"Oi! What are you doing here! This is private property! My own personal sanctuary! Get out of here, damn it!" Three exclaims when he realizes that he has company.

Three throws his plushie at Four, who catches it and smiles sadly.

"Calm down, please? I'm here to help." Four asks, in the softest tone Three has heard him use in a very long time. He found it almost impossible to push the other away, instead being reminded of how much he loved Four. That man was so irresistible, it was quite sad. "I know I'm the last person you want to see right now, but-" Four begins.

"Damn right! This is my space. So, you better get out before I make you get out." Three snaps out of his lovestruck funk, holding a gun menacingly.

Four sighs, walking over to the bed and joining Three, slinging an arm around him in the process.

"I guess I was just being shitty because that's what we do to each other. You really do have something great here, though." He smiles warmly.

Three looks away, refusing to get lost in Four's eyes for the millionth time. He was, of course, still angry from the stress Four inflicted. SMG4 frowns and then does something that Three was definitely not expecting. He takes Three's hand in his own and gives it a delicate squeeze.

"H-HEY." Three yells in embarrassment.

"What can I do to get you to trust me?" He whispers in his doppelgänger's ear, tracing his fingers along the other's beard. "I'm sorry, I really am."

Three's eyes widened as he realized just exactly what his friend was doing. Four's actions were certainly not helping Three's gay panic. Instead of answering, Three just looked away, his face clearly beet red. The two sit there for a while in an awkward silence until Three finally breaks the ice.

"Why are we like this?" He asks, mostly to himself.

"Like what?" Four replies casually.

"You know. We argue half the time and then we act like best friends the other half of the time. Is that just what frenemies do?"

"In all honesty, I don't think frenemies hold each other's hands." Four giggles sweetly as Three rips his hand away like Four's was diseased.

For such a long time, Three has wanted answers, and he was so close to getting them! All he had to do was casually bring it up. All he had to do was ask Four if he liked men- or better yet, if he liked him.

"Then what are we?" Three whispers very quietly, the comment meant to only be heard by himself.

"I don't know..." Four says, earning a disappointed look from Three. Four then puts both of his hands on Three's shoulders, the other man slightly leaning into his touch. This makes Three mentally scold himself. This is not the time to be seduced! "What do you want us to be?" Four's voice goes a whole octave deeper as he stares at Three's lips expectantly.

Three leans back a little bit and answers.

"You're such a baka, you know that?"

"Hey, that wasn't an answer." Four playfully whines at the other.

Blue eyes meet red as they stare at each other lovingly. This was Three's one chance to see if Four liked him back, so he had to try.

"Then, maybe this is." Three says, leaning completely forward and connecting their lips lovingly.

Four makes a noise of surprise but quickly reciprocates the kiss. Three slings his arms around Four's waist as he puts his hands in Three's hair. The kiss slowly becomes more passionate, Four pinning Three to the back of the bed as they begin to make out. This continues for a minute or so until they pull apart for air. The two Meme Guardians stay in the same position before Four dives for Three's lips again.

Four's hands trail down the other man's neck, their lips quickly parting as he decides to kiss that instead. Four peppers kisses down Three's neck, leaving small marks all over his exposed skin. Three sighs in pleasure as he lies his head on Four's shoulder, relaxing into his seductive touch. When the man's lips part from Three's neck, they kiss again, although this time it was much more sweet and loving than heated. When they finally pull away, they both lay on the bed, breathing heavily.

After the two of them catch their breath, Four grins mischievously at Three. As the Meme Guardian raises an eyebrow, Four jumps off the bed, picks him up, and begins spinning him around in the air.

"Wha- hey!" Three smiles giddily, clearly very flustered.

"You don't know how long I've been waiting to just kiss you senseless like this, Three. Memes, it's probably been since last year. I thought your redesign was so hot, and I just started thinking of how cute you were, and... eee!" Four squeals, giving Three one more peck on the lips for emphasis and then setting him down.

"Four, I feel the same way. I've seriously been head over heels forever! Your dumb ass just never took the hint."

"Dude. We just made out! You can't call me a dumbass now." Four snorts.

"Sure, I can."

"Well, you better not forget who's in charge now, mister~"

"Oh, please. I'm still just as much in charge as you are." Three scoffs.

"Prove it." Four says, kissing Three and sticking his tongue in his mouth almost at once.

The two fight for dominance, Four easily winning in a matter of twenty seconds by pinning Three down, maximizing the friction between their chests and hips. Three lets out a small groan as he feels gloved hands tangle their way back into his hair, with Four continuing to invasively explore every cavern of his mouth. Maybe he was the one in charge... Three would be lying if he said he didn't find that fucking hot.

"Damn." Three exclaims in a mixture of defeat and awe as Four finally pulls away from him, a string of saliva still connecting their mouths.

"I win! Told you!" Four leans back slightly with a smirk.

"Yeah, yeah, you can shut your mouth now."

"So, we're boyfriends?" He asks suddenly.

"Of course? Unless you don't want to be?" Three says.

"I totally do, one hundred percent. I love you, Three. I'm sorry we fought over stupid shit again."

"That means a lot. I love you too, Four." Three blushes.

Three never thought that he'd be telling the real Four this. He always thought that it was the stuff of his imagination, but to think: Four liked him the whole time! He couldn't be happier right now. Before they could kiss again, a scream in heard from upstairs. The culprit is none other than Mario, who is crazily shrieking as usual. Three and Four simultaneously look at the elevator, snapping out of their daze.

"THE CAFÉ!"

~~~

3592 Words

Notes:

These next few one shots that I am going to publish are going to be about SMG34. If you would like to see other ships, please leave your requests on the introduction page. If you don't mind, then get ready for a lot of stories revolving around the gay Meme Guardians!

Chapter 5: Everlasting Enemies 💔 {SMG34}

Summary:

TW: Swearing, Blood/Injury

After getting injured by a rogue trend at the grocery store, SMG3 has a chat with his best friend that may just reveal something shocking about himself.

This oneshot takes place about a month before the episode "Perfectly Balanced".

Chapter Text

SMG3 runs towards the Internet Graveyard’s Starbucks at full speed, not daring to look back. Something huge and undoubtedly dangerous was after him, and it was looking to kill. He holds his right arm, careful to not let any more blood spill from the huge gash in his shoulder that the monster had previously dug. He wanted to get away from it as quickly as possible, but it was extremely difficult to outrun.  

“Oh shit, shit, shit!” He curses as he stumbles, trying his best not to trip over something sticking up from the ground and faceplant. 

What started out as a normal day for Three turned so wrong, so fast.  

He was at the grocery store, paying for his food, when the cashier began foaming at the mouth and making garbling noises at him. He began to laugh, looking up at them to see what kind of weird dead meme they were, but his face turned to one of fear when he realized that this seemingly innocent Harambe meme was slowly becoming transformed by a dead trend. The inhabitants of this dimension not only included memes, they also unfortunately included trends, some of the things that he hated dealing with more than anything else. About once a month, a trend would wash over many memes across the dimension, and he had to go around and help them.  

This specific trend seemed to be very new to its afterlife, as Three had never seen anything quite like it before.  

“Hey, are you okay?” He had asked, leaning in and touching Harambe’s shoulder like a caring father. 

The two of them locked eyes and a troll meme appeared on its usual gorilla-like face. Then, it took out a knife from its back pocket and declared: “I am the impostor.”  

Fuck, Three had thought. Among Us must’ve died 

Harambe then decided that the Lord of the Internet Graveyard was the crewmate he wanted to target. Shakily, it rose up from its slouched position behind the counter and pulled the weapon on SMG3. The knife tears a large wound in his shoulder, causing him to scream with pain before dropping his groceries and running for dear life.  

Now, Three was just trying his best to navigate this forest in the dark while trying to not be murdered. He sees the cover of the trees begin to thin, grinning to himself when green light from an all too familiar logo illuminates his path. The temple for the old dead memes comes into view first, with the Starbucks right next to it. The gorilla impostor growls with frustration and Three can feel its breath on his neck. It was much closer than he thought, but he didn’t feel like dying tonight! 

With a sudden burst of speed, he safely gets inside of the shop and slams the door shut. The trend-infected meme smacks against the bulletproof glass (Three knew better than to put regular glass where feral memes and trends like this live), dropping to the floor. It stabs its weapon at the glass, then the door as well, staring Three down while it does so, before giving one last roar and running off into the distance. 

“Yes!” He says, pumping his fist and giving himself a high five before wincing, realizing that he still has an injured shoulder to take care of.  

He walks through the empty store, reaching onto a shelf and taking the first aid kit out. He slowly trudges to the bedroom part of the Starbucks, flopping onto his bed as he assesses the damage on his arm. Blood is pouring out of the gash in fairly large amounts, and it is covered in dirt and leaves.  

That can’t be healthy. He thinks, trying to brush out a little bit of the muck. 

Three braces himself as he opens an alcohol wipe. This was going to hurt bad, but it was the only way to ensure that it didn’t get infected. This dimension didn’t have a hospital, unless you counted the one that was run by all those Ugandan Knuckles and Crash Bandicoots. He runs the wipe all over his skin, hissing through his teeth as excruciating pain ripples through his entire left arm. Just as quickly as the pain appeared, it disappears, leaving a very bloody wipe. He repeats this a few times, making sure that the cut is entirely clean before taking a bandage out of the kit.  

He makes sure that he takes the largest, peeling off the paper and placing it on his ripped skin. Then, he takes an ace bandage and wraps it around the entire wound. This was to ensure that the original bandage had extra support in case it fell off. With all the activity he did during the day, it likely would have been littered in the forest tomorrow. Especially now that he had a new trend to deal with...  

Sometimes, he just wants to blame SMG4 for all his problems here in this dimension. After all, he was the only one who controlled what memes were forgotten and what memes thrived in the living realm. Every single trend that came here was one that Four just got tired of making content about, so technically, it was also his fault that Three was injured by Harambe in the first place. But if Three was being honest, this just seemed like another way that the universe was trying to flip him the bird. 

As Three relaxes into the covers of his bed, not bothering to change into his pajamas, he begins to think back to a few months ago and how he was banished. Everything happened so quickly, it honestly felt like a fever dream, but Three knew that every time he pinched himself, it was just a reminder of the harsh reality he had been thrown into. 

It had all started when he decided to open his own production studio.  

Inspired by his rival yet again, he pushed himself to do what the other man did, but better. He had saved up all his money from his Dr. Phil parody and used it to buy a huge warehouse and create something special. There were many different areas to create beautiful and creative YouTube videos, and all of the topics were able to spiral into their own channels. He even invited Mario, who helped create more popular content, and the fat Italian really enjoyed his time there. 

Then Four found out that Three was using Mario as an actor and decided that it would be a good idea to wreck the entire studio. SMG4 destroyed everything he had spent months building and his whole life dreaming about. He had spent two hundred fifty thousand dollars on that place, and it was gone in about five minutes, leaving him broken and alone. Upon witnessing the crumbled building, Three opened up his heart to Four, explaining how he felt during Meme School. Four expressed genuine sympathy and concern for him before his apology was brutally rejected and Three kicked him in the no-no square. Three warned him, saying that he’d see him around some other time. 

As Three plotted his revenge, weeks passed. He got a crew together and called them the Anti-Cast, now fully embracing the idea of being the evil equivalent of Four. He felt like that would make him sound more powerful by comparison, and he was still determined to be seen as “better” in the public eye. With the help of Mario, he and his new group distract the CEO of YouTube and steal the powerful YouTube remote, ultimately deciding to get rid of Four and all his friends.  

They went to an area that had all of the cast’s origin videos, which were the videos on SMG4’s channel when each specific character met Mario. Three had no replacement for Mario, considering that he had an unexplainable “wow” factor that just made the videos funny. Three’s thought process was that if Mario met the Anti-Cast instead, he would be able to remove the others that the fat Italian didn’t end up meeting. 

His plan worked absolute wonders and he began making videos with the Anti-Cast. That is, until a heartbroken and lonely Mario screwed up his plans by stealing his phone and getting everyone out of the Internet Graveyard. In his desperation, Three made the remote malfunction and go into a factory reset. This caused the spirit of the remote to be sucked into the Boopkins replacement of the Anti-Cast, his brother JubJub, and he told Three and Four that he would give the remote to the more worthy person. An entire thing happened with challenges and competitions, resulting in Three being fed up. 

He dangled Boopkins over the side of the skyscraper they were all standing on. He threatened to drop him from the ledge if JubJub didn’t hand over the remote. The remote’s subconscious, which was inside of the small boy, tried to resist, but he ended up giving it to Three anyway. Once he got what he wanted, Three threw Boopkins at the feet of everybody else, grinning wickedly. Neither man would forget how Three looked at Four that night. He growled maliciously, pointing the remote at Four and all his friends as he said the unforgettable phrase: 

Checkmate.” 

After that, a whole battle ensued. Three ingested the power of the remote to fight against Four, with both of their crews helping them. Finally, Three held a ball of magic to his enemy’s face, ready to delete him from existence permanently. Then, Three makes his fatal mistake and hesitates, for a reason that he can’t even explain to this day. Out of the corner of his eye, he saw JubJub flying towards him as Mario yelled, “Kick the baby!”  

The Anti-Cast had betrayed him, and the remote had been knocked out of his stomach and into the hands of the one who he just tried to delete. His rival began to go on about how Three was a “manipulative, lying, piece of trash”, kicking him into the ground and punishing him by living out the rest of his days in exile here.  

Yay, this is just how he wanted to spend the rest of his life. In this fucking hell, picking up after all the messes SMG4 has left for him. 

Suddenly, the doorbell rings, causing him to slightly perk up. He can hear the familiar clicking coming from the mouth of his most loyal companion, a Ugandan Knuckles he named Terrence. He learned to pick up the Meme Language quickly, considering that he couldn’t understand anyone for the first month of his banishment. He listens closely, realizing that Terrence is requesting to be let inside. 

“Hold up, man. I’m coming.” Three says tiredly, groaning as his sore body protests his decision to get out of bed. 

He walks back out to the main part of the store, opening the door where his best friend waits. The small red meme is standing next to a few large grocery bags. They are filled with everything that SMG3 was about to pay for at the grocery store, and they even looked a little bit torn. Were those the exact bags that I dropped once the cashier started chasing me? Three gets over his initial shock and his surprised expression turns to one laced with gratitude. 

Hey mon. I got your things. Terrence clicks again, but Three understands every word he says as he leans down to the dead meme’s level.  

“Terrence...” Three chokes up a little bit before scooping his best friend into a hug. “You’re literally the only good thing in this fucked up dimension.” 

Oh, it’s no big deal, mon.  The small red guy chokes a little bit before trying to hug back with his stubby little arms.  But I saw you get chased by that big thing. New trend, eh? 

“Yeah. It kind of killed my shoulder, though. And I’m hella sore from all that running.” Three shrugs with only one of his shoulders to avoid more pain. Then, he looks back at the groceries that were sitting in a puddle. He still lets another large smile creep onto his face as he brings them in, with Terrence still cuddled in one arm. “Honestly, I’m grateful for you, dude. You’re the best.” 

You said that already, SMG3. What’s up with you? Terrence raises an eyebrow, clicking with suspicion.  

“What do you mean?” Three tries to be inconspicuous, hoping that he can avoid having a conversation with Terrence about his annoying rival. 

Don’t be like that, mon. He clicks, obviously able to tell that Three is not being his usual self. I’ve known you for months, and you’re not nice like this. And ya don’t hug, haha. He jabs his finger into Three’s left arm playfully, causing him to lightly blush and set him down on the floor. So, tell me. What’s wrong? 

“Goddamnit. You won’t leave me alone if I don’t tell you... will you?” He scowls at the dead meme who just smirks. 

See, you know me well too. We don’t get away with anything around each other. He clicks, almost sounding like laughter. 

“Fine.” He sighs, walking back to his bedroom and flopping down on his bed.  

Terrence clears his throat, and Three pats the covers to allow the Ugandan Knuckles to hop up. He was grateful for their unspoken bond, even if the little guy was only a meme. He was still the only living thing Three had allowed himself to get close to and love almost like a brother. Not that he would ever admit that out loud, of course. He still liked to keep his emotions private. 

Ready now, mon? He asks, nuzzling his nose into Three’s chest as he tries his best to make his friend feel comfortable. 

“After I fixed up my injury, I kind of just let my mind wander, which made me think of some bad things from my past…” Three says, running his hands through his hair and taking off his navy-blue hat. 

What things? You know you can be transparent with me.  He clicks, closing his eyes.  I’ll always listen to you. 

“It’s just- ugh. I know I’m not supposed to, but I’m thinking about the people in the land of the living. I’m reminiscing, reminding myself of how much I hate them, what got me here, you know. Stupid crap like that.” Three sighs, looking out the window as it begins to lightly rain again. 

This is about that SMG4 guy again, isn’t it?  Terrence clicks, making it sound almost like an annoyed sigh.  Ya always have something new to say about him. If he’s your rival, then why are you thinking about him? 

“He- uh… I don’t know!” Three responds, getting a little bit flustered and puffing his cheeks out. “I think about him because I hate him.” 

Mon, there’s no reason to act like an anime girl.  He clicks, only causing Three to blush even more and for his scowl to deepen.  All I’m saying is that when I had a rival back when I was younger, I didn’t think about her. 

Three looks at the ground, lost in thought. Why was he thinking about Four? Was it really because he ruined his life? 

The only people I think about are you and my wifeTerrence clicks, only now it was his turn to smile and blush. Don’t laugh at me, but that rival I mentioned? She and I ended up getting married three years ago. I guess we put our differences aside... 

“Enemies to lovers?” Three asks, mostly to himself. 

I guess you can say that. He clicks before his smirk from earlier returns. He looks up at the Lord of the Internet Graveyard smugly, causing Three to return a confused glance. Maybe you’re thinking about SMG4 because you two... He makes a kissing noise and Three’s expression turns aghast. 

“What?!” Three yells, jumping up with a start. “I don’t like him!”  

Sure, mon. Denial is a river in Egypt, ya know. He chuckles again before placing a comforting hand on his friend’s arm. I won’t push, obviously. You can come to whatever conclusion ya want on your own. 

“Terrence! I’m not gay, and I-” 

Suddenly, something buzzes in Terrence’s pocket, and he takes out his phone. He looks over the screen before turning back to Three, an apologetic expression on his face. 

My wife wants me back for dinner, mon. It’s best not to keep her waiting, but we can continue this later if you want. He clicks as he gets up from the bed.  

“Maybe not. I need some time to think, so just go enjoy your dinner.”  

Don’t think too hard about this, about him. I was obviously just teasing ya. He clicks, walking towards the door. He’s not worth your time if you hate him. 

“I appreciate it, Terrence. I’ll see you later.” Three thanks him as the small man scurries away into the distance of the Internet Graveyard. 

The second that the door closes, he groans and buries his burning face in his pillow. Why did his friend have to tease him so bad? And why could Three not stop thinking that Terrence may have had a point? 

Now that he is alone, Three takes this time to process his thoughts and try to get them in order. Why was he thinking about his arch nemesis so much? Why, when he sat down, was that the first thing he thought about? Yes, he regretted treating the Anti-Cast badly, and now he knows how it could have gone better and what he could have fixed, but there was no point in thinking about it anymore. Until someone could figure out a way to go back into the past, nothing could be changed. 

He couldn’t think of a logical reason why he constantly had the thought of his rival in the back of his mind. Nor could he find any explanation as to why he was considering that his feelings towards SMG4 may have changed. The only time that they acted like they didn’t hate each other was when they were forced to work together, which was still rare in and of itself. The only time something like that happened, a time Three could remember, was when the two of them got stuck in an igloo.  

He liked to tell himself that the igloo was an exception. Even if they worked together to kill the penguin, that was just to get food, to survive. Sometimes, people who hate each other need to put aside their differences. Yeah! That was a normal thing to do, especially because they went back to hating each other at once-  

Yeah, I’m sure we REALLY needed to put aside our differences to fuck each other 

The second that this thought pops into his head, he gasps as the memories flood back. He remembers how they had begun to lose their minds, and Four had scooted close to him and intertwined their hands. He asked if they could just forgive each other and make love, and Three believed that it was the insanity and hunger talking when he agreed. They were supposed to hate each other, and he purposefully tried to forget that situation altogether. If you asked him, he would just say that absolutely nothing happened on March 21, 2016. And, even if something did happen, he didn’t like it, and he certainly didn’t crave Four’s body for the next few weeks afterwards. 

But now here he was, questioning his stance and his view on the whole situation. He thought he had a concrete answer, but now his gay thoughts seemed to be coming alive. As much as he continually refuses to admit it, he will say this: he used to have a degree of admiration for SMG4. That’s what made him copy the YouTuber’s videos in the first place. He had remembered him from Meme School, and he thought that doing things Four’s way was the ticket to instant popularity. It was one of those “Notice me senpai” type things. 

Then, he got pissed off, basically made a policeman gang up on him, and that was the spark that started a rivalry that gave Three something to wake up for every morning. He arose from sleep knowing that he would come up with some kind of silly plan to explode Four’s car or put silly string in his closet. It gave him certain values to life that he wouldn’t get if he just accepted his crush.  

Oh, not crush, sorry... admiration. He is still somehow convinced that he doesn’t like Four anymore, though it’s almost painfully obvious at this point.  

Even if he was willing to accept it, why the hell was he in love with his RIVAL?! Out of all people to be in love with, he had to pick the person that wanted him dead. Yes, he will say it now. SMG3 loves the person who left him to rot in a realm with wild, untamed memes like the trend-infected Harambe earlier that night.  

The fact that he was willing to look past all that was even more terrifying.  

Love has a way of doing things to you that others can't even imagine without experiencing it for themselves. And now that Three is finally beginning to come to terms with all these new feelings, he can feel the panic settle in. Four left him, and hates him, and craves his demise like any sane enemy. While Three over here was just falling for him! Love, no, life was so complicated! 

The world blurs around him as he tries not to have an attack. This was not the time for that, and Four wasn’t anything to panic over.  

Unable to stop himself, he turns around and begins to quietly sob into his pillow. What did he do to deserve this? It wasn’t his fault that SMG4 was so amazingly beautiful and lovable! He just wanted to have a normal enemy relationship with Four, like they’ve had forever. Why did he love Four like that? There was no explanation. 

His crying slows, his eyeliner smudged all over his red face. He takes his phone out and goes to the camera app, assessing how bad the crying fit affected his look. When Three sees just how bad he looks, he cringes. He really needed to stop being so much of a girl... Men don’t cry over people who they love, they don’t mess up their makeup over- Hey. Wait a minute. Men don’t wear makeup! Memes, maybe I’m gayer than I thought. 

What was the point of even denying it? He liked the way Four’s lips felt on his all those years ago, and he wants him more than anything else in the world. Yes, it was nice having power over him, but not in the way that he thought before. Now, he has realized that he would much rather create a portal to the living realm, steal Four, tie him up, and get up on top of him. He would show SMG4 just exactly who was the insignificant recolor, leave him speechless while he- whoa. What was he fantasizing about right now?! 

He tries his best to knock those thoughts out of his head before finally succumbing. The more he thought about it, the more addicting it began to sound. 

No. I’m done pretending that I want some feel-good, lovey-dovey bullshit. I’m the villain, and I want to make Four a crying, begging mess on his knees. It’s hot. 

He wanted Four like that, and he found it very hard to suppress it. He wanted Four to just listen to Three ramble about how sexy he was while being tied up. He would be unable to do anything, not even work on his videos. The only thing that Three would allow Four to do would be to love on him, give him compliments. Yes, eventually Three would untie him, but only when he learned to be a good, obedient boyfriend. 

He had to find a way back to the living realm so he could love Four.  

Either the emotions were too much for him or he just lost all his sanity. It was time for him to take what was his, and this time it would be different. He would live out his fantasy if it was the last thing he did. 

Three springs up from under his covers, messing them up in the process. He walks towards the front door at such a frantic pace, it can almost be considered running. Then, he pulls it open and slams it shut, allowing the pouring rain to completely soak through his hair and his clothes. Frantically, he opens the portal app on his phone, tapping a button and coming face to face with a choice. 

Option A, he comes to his senses and closes the portal, not wanting to risk getting in a horrible amount of trouble by the hands of SMG4 and Susan. 

Option B, he breaks the rules of his exile, crosses through to the living realm without an invitation, and goes through with his fantasies. 

It’s up to you what he decides to do on this dark, stormy night. 

~~~

4217 Words

Chapter 6: Real Love ☁️💔 {SMG34}

Summary:

TW: Swearing, Death, Blood, Injury, Trauma

Three accidentally loses possession of his notebook via Eggdog and Beeg, only this time Four finds it... and reads it! Enjoy as chaos ensues that makes Three question everything he's ever felt towards the other Meme Guardian.

This oneshot takes place in the canon spring of 2025.

Chapter Text

SMG3 walks out of his café as the sun rises, the sky appearing as if it had been painted with many beautiful colors. Everything at the Showgrounds is illuminated with the light of the new day, and it made everything more peaceful than it usually is. The morning is Three's favorite time of day, a period of peace where he can just sit with his pet and his coffee in his hand. Eggdog happily trots behind him with a purple book held in his mouth, also temporarily stopping to bask in the sun.

"Time for my lesson in English?" Eggdog asks his father happily, his words slightly muffled by the notebook.

"Soon, kid. I just woke up." Three says, not noticing that the book in the white dog's mouth was forbidden for him to be playing with.

"Okay. I go hang with Beeg now. Maybe practice English!" He brightens up at his spontaneous idea, trotting away with a pep in his step.

Oh, that kid, always so positive. It was funny how different he could be from his dad at times, yet how close they still were. They had been close ever since they met, because once Three lost Terrance, it was hard for him to move on.

At least, it was, until he found Eggdog. That ray of sunshine brightened his mood every time he saw him. He was willing to help in any situation that the two found themselves in, and the least Three could do was help him become fluent in English instead of just his meme language. He was glad that Eggdog had found a friend in SMG4's home, too. Beeg, despite his rebellious attitude, was a good friend to Three's dog.

SMG3 watched as the sun continued rising and took deliberate sips of his coffee, never wanting this moment to end. Mornings were the best... and the scene was even cuter when Eggdog was skipping towards the castle with his little purple English vocab notebook. Three wouldn't trade this for anything.

But even the most perfect angels can make mistakes... ones that could define their dad's entire future.

Most of the times that Eggdog accidentally breaks Three's rules, he is softly reprimanded and told to promise that he will never do it again. Accidents are not harshly punished in their small household, but only if Eggdog takes responsibility and apologizes. Though, he knows that if he gets caught stealing his father's possessions, he would be in deep shit. Especially because he knows that he had taken the wrong notebook. In fact, he has been trying to find an opportunity to do this for weeks. Instead of his English words, he had all of Three's secrets in his "Sussy Notebook", and the little pup was running for his life. After all, this was just part one to his and Beeg's elaborate plan.

Eggdog ran into Four's castle, quickly noticing his best friend Beeg asleep on the floor. He began aggressively barking at the stubby child, though barely getting him to stir. His barking increased in volume, almost as if he was trying to say, Wake up, Beeg! I have something cool to show you! Beeg makes a pufferfish noise, showing how little he cares. As Eggdog continues to nudge him, he grows a large hand and slaps the poor dog with it.

He makes one final noise, as if to say, Fuck off, all right? I'll get up when I want, and I'm not on your schedule. After that, he rolls over, leaving Eggdog in a state of confusion and annoyance. Then, he decides to spit the book out of his mouth and bark again, this time with a clearer voice. Beeg still shows zero emotion and pretends to snore. That's when Eggdog sees red. What would it take for his stubborn friend to listen to him, without waking SMG4 in the other room or alerting his dad?

I got the book. For Operation Purple Berry. Eggdog barks, hoping that Beeg will finally perk up at the mention of SMG3's Sussy Notebook. The round kid does just that, his face turning into a smirk as he sits up fully and rolls towards his friend. Eggdog lets out a quiet huff, as if to say, That got your attention, huh?

Beeg almost laughs at Eggdog, a hand growing out of his body as it comes to rest on Eggdog's back. A few pufferfish noises are made by Four's kid, like he was saying, You didn't chicken out, Eggdog. I'd lie if I said I wasn't impressed. Then, he waddles back over to his bed and takes a picture out from underneath the pile of cloth and blankets. Now, I hope you're ready for what we're going to do next.

Eggdog lets out a small whimper, showing his underlying concern about this plan. So, we're just going to drop the notebook at his feet? Unlocked? Papa would be so upset with me... Both pets had their concerns about this, but it was the only way to achieve their two greatest shared goals: to get SMG3 to confess his feelings, and to hopefully become brothers afterwards. That's what they've wanted ever since they went on that ice cream heist adventure together.

Beeg sighs, more undiscernible meme noises escaping his mouth. We have to. You wanna be brothers, right? With a shrug, he begins to walk into his father's bedroom. Eggdog takes the notebook back in his mouth, still hesitating to follow his best friend's footsteps. With that, Beeg groans with annoyance, signaling with his body for Eggdog to get a move on. Come on, Eggdog. Why are you second guessing this? You liked it when we agreed on it, and you know it's a solid plan. You trust me, right man?

Eggdog nods vigorously, barking at Beeg. Of course, I know. It's just that.... If this goes wrong, I don't think I'll be able to forgive myself. Papa loves me and trusts me. Probably more than anyone else in the world. Beeg, it's such a stressful thing having to always keep up with. He says, looking down at the ground. I'm a good son... right? Beeg notices his distress, leaning into Eggdog as his way of giving him a hug. Eggdog also leans into the hug, the two of them sharing a quick act of friendship that is shown with a heart appearing above their heads. He smiles, looking at Beeg with a gaze of gratefulness. Thank you, Beeg. I just want him to be happy, but you understand that, right? Doesn't it give you joy to see Mr. SMG4 giggling like he always does?

Beeg shrugs, having a bit of a bored expression on his face. He's always smiling. I think I would like it if my dad made your dad smile... that would be really cute. But anyway! They're just good together. So, trust me like you did when we made this plan and let's go! He says, pushing Eggdog over to Four's bedroom, where the man's soft snores escape the closed door.

Eggdog barks, a sound laced with adoration. I trust you one hundred percent, Beeg. I guess you've just earned it after all these months of being best friends. He says, nuzzling into his friend one more time before walking up to Four's door. The friends nod, pushing on it together until it slowly begins to creak open. Luckily, Four hadn't completely closed his door, meaning that all they had to do was just open it. If the knob was closed, their problems would be increased.

The two children mischievously tiptoe into the room, which Eggdog remembered his dad describing as an "office cubicle with a bed". He quietly huffs out a giggle, but Beeg shoots him a glare as if to say, Shut up! Or we're going to get caught! Eggdog silently apologizes as they continue creeping their way over to Four's bed. The man doesn't even stir as their footsteps thud against the ground, or when Eggdog places the notebook down. He must be tired. That, or he's just a pretty heavy sleeper.

Beeg makes a quiet pufferfish noise. Your dad's in the best mood in the mornings, right? So, he'll probably be more receptive to this if I were to wake up my dad, and not do anything to fuck with his mood. Which means... He grins evilly, hopping on top of Four's bed and pulling out an AK-47. Eggdog's eyes widen, and he shakes his head, but Beeg shoots the gun at the ceiling, generating a loud noise. Four begins to move around, and Beeg begins to scream. GO, EGGDOG, GO! He yells one last time before running out of the room and then the castle with his friend as they both pant heavily.

They lay on the ground, catching their breath, as SMG3 curiously looks over. Once he realizes that Eggdog is on the ground, he worriedly calls out to his pet.

"Eggdog! Are you okay? Did that mean kid shoot you?" He says, scooping the puppy up and immediately checking for injuries.

"I good. Beeg good too. We play with big BOOM!" He grins innocently, causing an expression of anger and disbelief to wash over Three's face.

"I think we will be going home now." He says, glaring down at Beeg who just shrugs.

As he turns around to walk back to the café, Eggdog winks at Beeg. Despite being a little uncertain about all of this, he still is thankful that Beeg didn't mind taking the fall. The stubby child laughs and returns his gesture with a thumbs up, making a pufferfish noise and going inside. Don't worry, I don't mind if Mr. Three gets mad at me. See you soon, bud. He smiles, trotting back into the castle to see what was happening with his father, who was now definitely awake.

Beeg goes back into his dad's room, seeing Four sitting up against the headboard of his bed. The light was on, and his eyes were open, but there was only one issue. The man in question was lazily swiping through Twitter on his phone and is paying no attention to anything else around him. That would never do!

At that rate, Four would never find Three's unlocked notebook!

Suddenly, Beeg hatches a quick and simple plan, realizing how he could instantly bring attention to the notebook. He clears his throat before running towards Four at full speed, making many pufferfish noises that he knew his dad wouldn't be able to understand. Fuck, fuck bitch shit hell damn FUCK! He screams a string of all the curse words he wants, and Four just looks up at him in confusion and a little bit of concern. He continues running, appearing like he's about to jump on top of his father, when he trips right before he gets to Four's bed. Purposefully.

Four, like Beeg planned, gets curious. To see what his child tripped over, he peers down and sees the child writhing on the floor. Apparently, he stubbed his toe on the notebook when he was pretending to trip. Usually, the child would refrain from doing things like this, especially when he was aware that Four had Twitter open. There was nothing stopping him at that moment from making his child into a funny meme, with a simple caption that read something like "fuck them kids lmao". But the risk Beeg took turned out to be a reward, because Four's eyes did indeed trail down to the floor. More specifically, what his kid tripped over. A dark purple notebook was lying face down on the floor, causing Four to reach down and grab it very carefully. Then, he makes eye contact with his kid, who just looks up at him with anticipation.

"My forklift logbook!" He yells, causing Beeg's hopeful expression to go flat. "Wow, I've been looking for this everywhere!"

Beeg begins making screaming noises, frantically waving his whole body around. Turn it over, you goddamn idiot! He continues to freak out as Four just rolls his eyes. Picking him up, the older man assessed his injuries. Once he realizes that the child was indeed fine, he shrugs and places him back on the floor. But he couldn't do this without his pet turning over the notebook to reveal that the front didn't say "Logbook".

"Three's notebook?" Four questions aloud. "Why would I have..." He pauses, realizing that it was unlocked.

Beeg jumps up on the bed, nudging him. Come on, Dad. Just open it! He makes a loud pufferfish noise which makes Four raise an eyebrow. He is almost sure that he knows what the pet wants, he's just conflicted about whether he should do it or not. This was something that could destroy his and Three's relationship, especially if the contents were as "Sussy" as Three has led everyone to believe.

"Oh, I shouldn't open this." Four says, staring down at the notebook while biting his lip. "But I really want to... But I can't! No, Four." He is having a verbal argument with himself as his pet looks at him in confusion and annoyance. "AGH, I HAVE TO!" He screams, fumbling with the latch and flipping open to a random page. "Just one. That's all I'll read, then I'll return it."

As he begins to read, Beeg settles in next to him. The stubby little boy had never actually seen this either, or he was almost as curious as his dad. He just hoped there was nothing too dirty in there to damage his innocence beyond the point of no return. From what he heard from Eggdog, it wasn't exactly PG.

Dear Diary,

Lately, I've been having trouble thinking straight. And no, that's not only because I'm a raging homosexual. There's a good reason. A beautiful, blue reason. You probably know who I'm talking about, because we've discussed the man I love many times before. And, yes, you're the only one I can talk to about this (besides Eggdog) because you're the only one who won't say anything to him.

But, anyway, it's time to tell you what happened today. SMG4 and I just walked past each other once and I couldn't stop myself from blushing. I just wish he could see me the same way I see him. I hope that one day I'll be able to muster up enough courage to ask him out, because I don't know how much longer I can go without him knowing the truth.

I've practiced confessing my love to him in front of the mirror, but at this point, I call it a lost cause. Maybe, one day, I'll stop being a chicken, stop fantasizing about him without him knowing, and ask him out. Maybe, one day, I'll be able to say, "I love you, SMG4."

Signed, SMG3

Beeg smiles after he finishes reading Three's heartfelt entry. He was glad that his father had picked a very sweet one that really portrayed Three's feelings and not his unchecked animosity. Now, they were one step closer to their dads getting married and becoming brothers! The thought made Beeg very excited, and he looked up at Four in anticipation for his reaction.

What he sees is not what he expects, however. Four is shaking slightly, clutching the book so tightly that the paper begins to crumple at the edges that he grips it. He is quietly growling, getting increasingly angrier the more he reads. Once he gets sight of the last line, he is shocked and upset, like every fear he's ever felt is coming true.

"SMG3... loves me." He quietly says, as if speaking the truth will make it easier for him to accept.

"Yes!" Beeg squeals, unable to contain himself as he speaks in English.

A shadow crosses over Four's face as he takes the AK-47 off the bed. He gets up, and without another word, he begins to walk away. Beeg lets out a small noise of concern, trotting after him. Why does he have a gun? And why does he not look happy? He gasps once he realizes that Four doesn't love Three back. He's pissed that Three likes him.

Four breaks into a run, dashing across the lawn before Beeg can try to stop him or get another word of broken English out to try. He barges through the doors of Three's café, only to find the man sitting at a table having tea with his pet. He is giggling quietly as Eggdog struggles over a few words in English. Unlike Beeg, the dog was eager to communicate with people.

"I love having tea with you, Papa. You are the goodest papa ever!" He exclaims, very proud of himself.

"You would say 'goodest' as best. That would be the correct word in that- SMG4!" He stops, mid-sentence, noticing his crush. "Here for your daily latte, or what?" He asks.

Four walks up to him, shoving the notebook into his lap. He loads the gun, holding it up like he was ready to shoot it at the table where Three was sitting. Once he gets a good look at what he was given, Three just stays there in shock, disbelief, and embarrassment.

"So, you're in love with me." Four says, angling the gun downwards to the floor and leaning down to Three's level.

Beeg is taken aback once he figures out that Four wasn't going to shoot Three like he originally thought. Eggdog jumps out of his chair, walking over to his best friend. He barks once, congratulating Beeg. You got him to read it, lucky! Although, why does he have a gun? He asks, which causes Four's child to just shrug at him as he watches the scene unfold between the two adults.

"No, I- I..." Three pauses, trying to find warmth in Four's eyes before he drops the harsh truth. "I am. I'm sorry if that's not what you necessarily want to hear." Three says, taking on his usual role of assuming the worst. "Just say the words and I don't ever have to be near you again."

"Three, why would I ask you to do that when I have something so much better for you in store?" Four seductively grins, leaning closer to Three and having his breath ghost over the man in purple's lips.

"O-oh, Four~" Three whispers.

Four touches their noses together, causing stars to appear in the children's eyes. This was it, everything they had been working towards. All Three would have to do is close the gap, and their relationship would be cemented. They would finally be-

Bang.

Three's eyes widen as the bullet goes straight through his stomach. Four evilly smirks, pulling away from Three almost instantly. Three begins to quiver, pain shooting through his entire body as he looks up at the man he so desperately wants to be with. The man who he's loved for so long.

"Oh, you're so naïve." Four says, pulling his blood-stained gloves off his fingers. "Did you ever really think that I would love you? I'm not gay. I saw you as more of my brother, SMG3." He glares down at him, the gloves landing on the ground with a splat.

"Why did you shoot me?" The Meme Guardian begins to cough, desperately trying to find something to stop the blood flowing out of his open wound.

Eggdog, who was sitting right across from Three, now had splatters of his own father's blood on his perfect white fur. The sight of this made Beeg sick and horrified, making him cry and begin to lash out at his father. He began to scream out profanities that no one could understand other than himself and Eggdog. Every word that he was saying was directed at Four, and he could tell that it was directly mean.

"Beeg, you too? I'm disappointed." Four says, pointing the gun at his child. "But some things just have to be done."

As the second bullet is fired, Eggdog jumps up from his seat, diving in front of Beeg and pushing him out of the way. Three begins to cough up blood as he watches his poor child take a bullet to the head. 

As Eggdog falls, he smiles at Beeg for the last time. I love you, best friend.

Once the pup hits the ground, he's dead in a pool of his own blood.

Beeg can't bear to look at the dead body of his best friend and the dying man in front of him as he runs out of the café sobbing. Three lets out a broken wail, still holding his red stained hands in the place where the bullet was lodged in his stomach. With all the strength he had left, he yelled at Four as loud as he could.

"WHY DID YOU SHOOT US?!" It comes out weaker than he wished, and Four just simply laughs at him.

SMG4's eyes go red as he stares at Eggdog's corpse. An uncharacteristic excitement rushes through his whole body as he turns back to Three. The smile that he gives the dying man makes his blood (or, whatever's left) go cold. It was bloodlust. Four walks up to Three and aggressively grabs his chin, forcing him to look up at the killer.

"Because you're a dirty little fag, that's why. People like you and the ones who support you don't deserve to live."

"And you're a murderer." He growls back, spitting blood in Four's face.

"You know what, I accept that if it means that I get to kill people like you. You're a disgrace to society, you're disgusting, and I hate you." He smiles that toothy grin once more as he reloads his gun. "I can't believe I didn't kill you a long time ago. And loving me? What a mistake that was."

He presses the barrel to Three's forehead, and the last thing that the man hears is a gunshot, delivering the killing blow.

"Goodnight, you filthy bastard."

~~~

Three's eyes open as he clutches at his head and stomach frantically. No blood, no wounds. He was safe. Wait, what about- he sighs audibly in relief once he realizes that a bloodless Eggdog is peacefully sleeping beside him. The pain, the horror, the tears, none of it was real. It was all just a horribly vivid dream. He glances outside, realizing that it was pitch black. It wasn't morning time yet, and he needed more sleep.

Three takes a shaky breath in, rolling over in his bed to cuddle his dog. Eggdog has never failed to make him feel better in the past, and he was sure that he would be able to go back to sleep in no time. He nuzzles in with the meme, peacefully closing his eyes. The second that they shut, however, flashes of his traumatizing nightmare stick in his mind. Four leans in for a kiss, only to shoot him instead. Eggdog sacrifices himself for his best friend, and Three watches his son bleed out. Four's eyes turn red as he falls in love... Not with Three, but with the feeling of... murder.

And that treacherous smile. Three couldn't stop thinking about that. No matter how much he tried, he saw Four's face in his head, blood splattered everywhere. He couldn't stop, he couldn't sleep, he couldn't survive! He was used to Four keeping him up all night, but not like this. Never once has it been like this. Yes, in his nightmares, Four had rejected him in every way, shape, and form, but he had never killed anyone.

That's not Four. Never, never in a million years, would that lovable man hurt a hair on Three's head. The thing is, Three could tell himself that all he wanted, but that didn't erase the fact that it happened in his head. If it happened in a dream, it could happen in real life. There was no saying for sure that Four wouldn't go crazy, call him a fag, kill him.

He shudders at the thought. He wouldn't, he must keep reminding himself. Four would never do that.

But he wasn't sure. And the uncertainty of the situation was the one thing keeping him up. Not even Eggdog could help erase the image from his mind. SMG4, having pleasure in taking lives. Getting happy at the sight of blood and justifying it because Three was gay. It's terrifying, and there's nothing he can do! Nothing!

He sits up in bed, staring at one of the walls in his room. He can't sleep; he can't even blink without his mind being filled with violence and fear. What was he going to do? As he checks the clock, he realizes that it's only 1:43 AM. It wasn't even close to the morning, and he didn't want to fall back asleep. Four would kill him again, his heart would break all over again. He couldn't take it! He had to leave, to get out of the Showgrounds, he had to...Calm down. That was the first step. 

Before he does anything else, he takes five deep breaths to steady the pace of his heart. Then, he reaches over and takes three sips of water from the cup sitting next to his phone. Now, the last step was to give Eggdog one pet. He smiles, affectionately ruffling the dog's hair, before setting the water down and breathing out one last time.

Now, he was calmer, but there was no way he would be able to go back to sleep. He had to go somewhere, even if just for a few minutes, to clear his head. Just to be alone with nature, admiring everything without any thoughts of SMG4, or love, or murder. He was just going to take a walk around the abandoned carnival that was his home. He's never properly strolled around the property, so this was the perfect time. It was 2 AM, and no one was up. It was just Three and his swirling thoughts. A walk wouldn't hurt...

He decides to grab his AirPods and his phone to listen to some calming music as he walks up the side stairs to get to his café. It was very dark once he got upstairs, with the only light coming in through the window. The moon shone on the grass as it rippled in the wind, Three stepping out just in his socks and pajamas. He connects the Bluetooth of his earphones and plays soft, sad music while he begins to trudge through the Showgrounds.

"THE GREATEST" by Billie Eilish begins as he walks towards the old abandoned carnival rides, trying to keep his thoughts from spiraling. The song that was playing wasn't really helping with that, though, as the young woman's voice whispers sadly through the melody of the track. He doesn't like to share what he listens to, but he feels like he can really connect with Eilish in a certain way. Sometimes, he is sad, and he needs something to help comfort him.

I'm trying my best

To keep you satisfied

Let you get your rest

While I stay up all night

He glances over at SMG4's castle, his gaze landing on his crush's bedroom window. Those lyrics were more relatable than he would like to admit. He doesn't want to bother Four, at 2 AM nonetheless, over something as dumb as a dream. Even if it wasn't stupid to Three, Four would probably just think that it was a silly fear. He would assure Three that he would never shoot him, that is if Three even had the balls to tell Four about his dream.

Three wouldn't be bothering his friend, though, because he wasn't in the correct mental state to confront him. Flashbacks of the nightmare played over and over in his head now, and those would only be escalated if he were to actually see Four. He'd be up all night, that much was a given at this point. Closing his eyes was painful enough at the time, and sleeping would be... if he was being honest, it would feel like fucking torture.

He looks down at his feet, watching as the weight of his footsteps leaves a small imprint in the grass behind him before fading away. The blades of grass aren't able to hold grudges or keep anything in their memory for that long, he concurs. They were very unlike Three, as he just couldn't seem to shake the impact of the dream. The blood spilling out of his body, staining his gloves, and pooling out of his own son and onto the floor made him feel devastated, and also a little bit sick. Swallowing down the bile that threatens to emerge from his stomach to his mouth, he continues to watch the shuffling of his feet with an odd interest.

Why couldn't he be more like the ground? These thoughts should be nothing but a fleeting shadow, but here they were, stuck in his head. It felt so real when he dreamt it, but it wasn't. This, right now, was reality. He was SMG3, walking through the forest to get to an old Ferris wheel and some run-down rides from Puzzle Park. He wasn't SMG3, dead on the floor with SMG4, who had shot him and was drunk with bloodlust. He was here. It was a dream, filled with insane things that would never happen. Four had probably never held a gun in his whole life! Well, except for all those times that he was fighting villains... Three was a villain... No! I refuse to think that way! Three continues to remind himself that Four is sweet and wonderful. He fell in love with this man for a reason, and that reason is that he is the best thing that has ever happened to him.

With a deep sigh, he continues walking as the chorus to the song begins to play. He quietly hums along to it, clearing his mind. Well, he makes it as clear as it can be, given the current circumstances and the feelings that he couldn't bury away. He was scared, though he wasn't able to admit that to himself. He needed someone to prove to him that Four wouldn't shoot him. To prove that if he confessed, Four wouldn't kill him. But, the only one who could say that was Four himself. And he wasn't planning on confessing any time soon...

He ducks underneath a low hanging tree, and the dense forest opens up to an overgrown pathway. There are old wooden game booths sitting there, long forgotten by the public. Walking along the line of buildings, he stops at an old ring toss. 

It is called Henrietta's Healthy Ring Toss Game, and there are bottles and rings scattered all over the floor on the inside. He chuckles at the silly name, looking around and seeing that all of the worn-down prizes were broccoli shaped. He wasn't really sure what part of the Showgrounds he was even in anymore, but he liked it. There was much to explore.

He walks inside the "healthy ring toss" and begins to inspect the old fashioned area. There is an inscription on the sign that says that the game was created in 1987, and this makes his eyes widen. That was long before any of his friends were even born! Well, he wasn't quite sure about Mario. That guy has literally been around since the beginning of time itself. As he is chuckling quietly about Mario, he sees something out of the corner of his eye, causing him to freeze, pause his music, and dart his gaze to the shadow that moved outside of the game booth.

He peers over the edge, expecting to see something horrible, but a little rabbit twitches its nose at him cutely instead. He smiles at the adorable animal and exhales in relief. It looks up at him with its big eyes before getting spooked and running the other way. Three walks back over and continues inspecting the booth, the clear night sky proving as his light source and guide. He picks up a bottle from the ring toss, and most of the words on the logo had long faded. He holds it up to the sky, trying to get a better look, and a chill washes through him when he reads the few letters that haven't been faded yet.

They say... He's here.

That's totally normal! Not ominous at all! Three tries to gently place the bottle down and walk away from the ring toss but finds himself unable to continue his walk feeling like the scene had as much ambience as before. He takes his earbuds off for good, placing them in his pocket along with his phone. Listening to a dumb bottle with an old logo was literally as stupid as anything he had ever done, but Three couldn't help but allow his mind to wander and think of what if scenarios. But he was a good half mile away from his shop and the castle, so how could anyone be here? The only other person who lived here was... 

No. It was just a stupid ass old thing, making Three paranoid for no reason. If a fucking rabbit was enough to make the ex-villain freak out, then he couldn't take anything he was thinking as sensible or even believable.

He turns a corner, getting closer to the Ferris wheel now. Three decides to not get too close to this run-down attraction, in case it fell apart or caused him any more fright. Walking past this, he clears this part of the rides and walks back into the forest area. Something dashes about five feet in front of him, causing him to let out a very manly shriek as he jumps back. Then, something whizzes behind him, making his eyes widen and spark a fear in himself that he didn't know was there. Suddenly, there he was, running through the slowly thinning trees as he tries to cut through them and stray from the path.

He had to get back to the open meadow, where he could see the castle. It was time to get back to his shop, the night was freaking him out too much at this point to continue on. He would just cuddle with his baby boy Eggdog and have calm thoughts, unlike the ones that were racing through his head right now at a hundred miles per hour. Since this is happening, he barely notices as the trees thin out again and he emerges from the greenery. He also does not realize that he was about to run into someone... a person who had been plaguing his thoughts for years and had been doing that especially well tonight.

There is a quiet thud as he runs into this man. Three falls over on his backside, and the other person stumbles backwards but doesn't fall down. Rubbing his head, Three groans in annoyance. Who the hell would be out here this late besides him? As he racks his brain for answers, a recent memory flash bangs in his head. He's here. The bottle was a warning, for who else could this be other than...

"SMG3? Are you all right?" SMG4 asks, leaning over Three and holding his hand out to help his friend up.

Three doesn't respond as he looks up at Four's face. It was as beautiful as ever, with his chubby cheeks, never fading smile, and bright, blue eyes. They twinkled even more in the night sky, and the best part was that there wasn't even a hint of malice in his smooth voice. He was mostly concerned, and he certainly wasn't out for Three's blood. It was obviously expected for him to be like this, as he had no clue that Three loved him. On the other hand, if he were to find out, what's to stop him from pulling out a gun?

"H-hey." He waves his hand gently in front of Three's face, snapping him out of his self-destructive thoughts. "It's me, SMG4."

"No need to state the obvious." Three says back, his words having their usual angry tone. He helps himself up, looking his frenemy up and down with a feigned disgust. "It's not forbidden to take a walk on the land surrounding my house, is it?" He asks, his voice almost literally dripping with sarcasm.

"There you are. Thought I lost you for a second there." Four chuckles quietly, looking at Three and then back down at the ground.

"I'm not looking to make small talk right now. I have shit to do and places to be." Three scoffs, trying to hide his internal fear by masking it with anger.

"Well, if you don't mind me asking-" Four begins before he is cut off.

"I probably will." He responds gruffly.

"Why are you out here so late? It's, like, two o clock right now." He asks.

"Oh, is it?" Three looks surprised. "Damn, how did the time slip away from me? I thought it was noon."

"I'm serious, SMG3. You don't just come out here on a regular basis. Something must be bothering you." He says, walking up and placing a hand on Three's shoulder tenderly. "You know you can tell me anything."

Once Four touches Three, the nightmare becomes vivid once more. Suddenly, Three is sitting in a chair, actively dying while Four just laughs and his gloves hit the floor. Splat, splat. Blood, murder, death. This is what love gives you. He's not gay, he hates you. He's only ever nice to you because you haven't actively tried to kill him in the last four years.

"Don't touch me!" Three yells, immediately shrinking away from the friendly touch of Four. This also causes the YouTuber to jump in surprise at his unexpected act. "Never touch me without my permission!"

"Whoa, man. Are you sure you're okay?" Four knits his eyebrows together in deep concern. "I don't mean to offend you, but you sound sort of- how do I phrase this- emotionally unstable?"

"I'm fine." Three insists, although it was a little bit less convincing than before.

"Man." Four sighs, pulling his hood off of his head and ruffling his fingers through his jet black hair. It ripples in the light, a sight that almost makes Three weak in the knees. He pinches himself in an attempt to stop the mixture of gay thoughts mixed with bloody ones. "If you don't want to talk about it, that's fine. But I bet you're tired as shit right now, and I'm telling you I want to help."

"I don't even know why you care so much, SMG4. They're my feelings, and I don't have to tell you shit. It doesn't matter if I'm having fucking nightmares about getting shot! Or that Eggdog is twitching in a puddle of his own blood in my mind, and I can't get the images out of my head! Why would you care about that?" He begins to shake. "About me?" He whispers this last part, and Four doesn't catch it very well.

But he hears every other part and can only watch as Three begins to lose his grip on reality. He wanted to desperately to just reach out for him, to comfort him, but could he really go against Three's wishes? That may only cause more problems and drive an even bigger wedge between them. But it's worth a shot, he decides. Three was his friend, and he needed comforting.

"SMG3. Of course I care. I care so deeply about all of my friends, and I can't bear to see any of you in pain." He says, debating in his head whether to reach out or not. Four decides against the idea, instead flashing Three one of his signature smiles as an idea pops into his head. "Would you mind if I showed you something? It's where I always go to clear my head after a nightmare."

Three blinks back the tears that were threatening to fall, desperately trying to keep up his usual act of being the unwavering tough guy. He doesn't want to look like he's considering Four's offer, and he knows what he should say. No, of course he doesn't want to go to this random place with his friend. But he couldn't help himself from searching in Four's big eyes for comfort, for reassurance. A soft gaze meets his broken one as he sighs once more, finding himself physically unable to say no to the charming Meme Guardian.

"Fine. Let's go." He whispers, the sound just barely reaching Four's ears as he beams in excitement and happiness.

"I promise you won't be disappointed, SMG3!" Four giddily laughs, beginning to walk to the other side of the castle. "Just follow me, it really is just a short little walk."

"Moron." Three sighs, relaxing just a little bit more as he follows his friend. He's cute, there's no denying that, but he's also still just a scrub.

He couldn't say that his nightmare wasn't still plaguing him. It was still there in his mind, but he's surprised with himself. Three thought that if he saw Four, it would make matters worse, but seeing the life and reassurance in his blue eyes made him realize just why he fell in love with this boy in the first place. And it only made him realize that Four wasn't likely to ever hurt him. Yes, there was a chance, but that probability seemed to be getting slimmer with every passing second.

The two walk through the trees, this time exploring the other side of the Showgrounds. Although, it was less like exploring and more like retracing a path that has been carved out of the woods. Every branch that may have been in their way has already been cut off, and every hazardous obstacle on the ground has been pushed aside. The large stones and logs were all just out of their way, and the dirt looked like it had been trodden by many people over the course of time.

There is an opening in the dense forest that comes into view. Four's eyes lighten up at the sight, and Three just raises an eyebrow. Where was Four taking him? Of course, he trusted the man in the blue hoodie, but the underlying question of whether he was really trustworthy was still buried deep in his mind.

Shaking his head at himself, Three continues on, knowing that Four had been nothing but good to him. There was no reason to doubt him.

Four ducks under a branch, with Three following suit. The sight that beheld the two men after that was absolutely breathtaking, and it made Three's heart skip a beat as he just stared. In front of them was a steep hill with a cherry blossom tree nearly hanging off the edge. At the bottom of that grassy hill lies a meadow filled with a diverse variety of flowers. There was a small pond in the middle of all the flowers, and there was a crane that was delicately perched there, fast asleep. You could see what appeared to be every color of the rainbow down there, and there was a perfect grassy area underneath the pink tree at the top of the hill to view all of it.

It takes all of Three's strength not to just gasp in wonder and run down the hill at full speed to lay in the flowers and bond with the wildlife. He always had a weird fascination with nature, and this was an absolutely incredible and unique sight. Four, noticing the state of awe that Three's in, simply chuckles.

"I told you I come here when I'm having nightmares. It takes my mind off of them like that." He says, snapping his fingers to further emphasize his point.

He has nightmares, too? How could anything be going wrong in that bubbly subconscious of his?

"Shut up and don't ruin this for me, scrub." Three sits down at the edge of the hill, lovingly looking down at the scene below him.

Four quietly complies, sitting down next to Three. He doesn't go too close, hoping that he won't make the man upset. This proves to be a good idea, but it still doesn't stop the man from breaking the silence. He was just too curious about Three and what brought him out of his café in the first place. So, after about a minute of staring at Three intently, Four clears his throat and asks him a question.

"So-" He begins, only to be cut off by Three asking another question at the exact same time as him.

"Why are you out here, anyway?" Three asks, not averting his gaze from the meadow below him. "It's weird enough that I'm up, so why were you conveniently also awake?"

"O-oh." Four stutters, staring at the floor with an embarrassed blush on his face. He stares at the ground for a moment, almost like he has to think of what to answer next. Three narrows his gaze, the slightest suspicion falling over him. But he knows that he can trust SMG4. Right...? "I never actually went to sleep?" He confesses as it sounds like more of a question.

"Dude, you have to take care of yourself." Three mumbles.

"Oh yeah, like you have any room to talk about that right now. We're both awake, aren't we?" Four gives Three a patronizing look, which the latter refuses to meet.

"I couldn't go back to sleep. It's different." Three frowns, fixating his gaze on a patch of yellow flowers.

"How so? Because, no offense, you're being so cryptic about this that I can't even help you. If you would just tell me what your goddamn dream was about, then I could try and make you feel better." Four begs. "Please. We're friends, SMG3."

He just shakes his head in response, hearing Four's last line play over and over in his head. See? I was right. He's never going to love me or see me the way that I've been seeing him since 2021. He tries to not let his thoughts spiral out of control, with Four right there nonetheless, but he finds it nearly impossible. Placing his hands in his hair, he takes shallow breaths but doesn't dare to look away from the meadow. He's scared that if he does, he might never see it again.

"You can trust me." Four, almost immediately noticing Three's behavior, goes against his better judgment and places a gentle hand on his shoulder.

This causes Three to slowly tear his gaze away from the flowery meadow and land it on Four's beautiful face. He tries his best to not allow the flashbacks to get to him, but he can't help but see the blood in his mind. Four can see that Three is still troubled, causing him to grab him and force the man in purple to face him completely. Three isn't sure whether to blush or be scared, so he does both. But, when Four cups his face gently, Three sees the color red flick through his eyes.

"NO!" He yells, scrambling away from Four as quickly as he can.

The momentum that he has while pulling away launches him off the side of the hill. Since Four was still gripping him tightly, he also flies off the grass and begins to roll down into the flowers at the bottom. As they are falling, they both let out their signature screams. Four pulls Three closer to him, hugging his friend tightly as if to brace him for the fall. Three knew that this wasn't a romantic gesture, more like something friendly, but he couldn't stop his face from turning as red as a tomato.

Once they hit the bottom, they are kicked away from each other due to the impact. The bird that was sitting in the pond, who was now very much awake, shrieks and flies away quickly. A few flowers are flattened by the weight of the two men, as well. Both of them simultaneously grown in pain before Four gets up. As he holds out his hand for Three to take, the man just turns away and stays on the ground by himself. Four looks crestfallen, to say the least, but he tries to reach out to his friend one last time.

"You know you can trust me, right?" He asks, his voice wavering like a toddler's does right before it is about to cry.

At this moment, Three realizes that he was being very harsh to Four. All the man wanted to do was provide help, and Three was unable to push past his deepest and darkest fears to allow it. But he still found himself faltering when he tried to tell Four what was really the matter. He couldn't say anything without completely exposing his crush on Four, but it was also rude of him at this point to say nothing at all.

"I just had a bad dream. Eggdog died, he was killed right in front of me. Then I was also killed shortly after." He spits out a half-truth, not bothering to mention the rest of his nightmare and just how closely his Guardian partner was involved. "I looked to the forest for comfort, that's why I'm out here."

"Who would...?" Four begins.

"No. I can't say." Three cuts him off with a serious look on his face, silently telling him not to press on. "Sorry."

"That's okay. But now I understand why you keep pushing me away. I would have an issue with trusting the person who killed my son and I, even if it was only in a dream." He says, sharing a sympathetic look with Three.

"Thanks for understanding." SMG3 says, not allowing Four's words to really sink in. By the time they do, his eyes widen and Four is trying his hardest not to playfully smile. "Wait a second! How?!"

"I had a hunch. I literally fucked up your life for ten years straight." Four says, his emotions on that subject nearly unreadable. "Besides, who else would've done it, Mario?" He quips as Three chuckles quietly. "But I hope you know that you can trust me, we can trust each other."

They sit in the flowers, a comfortable silence falling over both men. Three is already feeling exponentially better after talking about his mental experiences, even if the chat was only brief. He felt like he could share more with Four, but he was still scared. What if something were to happen to actually make SMG4 pissed enough to act spontaneously on his emotions? It's time to stop thinking like this. This is finally your chance to show Four that you trust him. Make him stay a little longer.

Taking a quiet breath, Three tries his hardest to make a discreet move towards Four's hand that was laying in the grass next to his. He inches his right hand closer to Four's left pinky, and a small zap shocks him once their fingers touch. He flinched away, realizing what a mistake he had made. He didn't need to make a move, it was clear that Four wasn't interested in that way!

But, the second he lays his hand back down in the grass, Four full-on grabs it. He traces his fingers along the Roman numerals on Three's glove as heat rises up in the purple Guardian's collar. Almost reading each other's minds, they interlock their fingers completely and lean back all the way into the grass. Three smiles bitterly, stiffening up as Four relaxes in contrast. This felt too good to be true. Four has never, and likely will never, do anything remotely like this. But, if he was, then maybe this was Three's chance.

"SMG4. Would you ever hate me again?" Three asks, looking into the taller man's eyes as they both sit back up, their hands still holding each other's.

"Pardon? Hate you?" He asks, almost like he can't believe that question would even be asked by Three.

"Yeah. It's just a thought, sorry if I made you mad or anything."

"You better listen to me right now. You may slightly piss me off and make me pretty upset at times, but I will never hate you again like I used to. I was an arrogant kid, and I've grown up now. This dream is fucking with your head if you think that I'd ever willingly hurt any one of my friends. Not Meggy, Mario, Luigi, any of them, and especially not you." He says, grabbing Three's chin with his free hand.

A grateful wash of relief goes through Three's mind again, and this time he really believes that his negative thoughts are silenced. Four truly was an amazing person, and Three was getting reminded of all the ways he fell for him in the first place. The adorable, sweet SMG4 who would never harm a hair on his head. And that happened to be the same man who was also grabbing his face and leaning closer to his lips by the second.

Just as he is about to close the gap, Four pulls away and takes a beautiful red flower out from the ground. He leans in again, tucking the flower behind Three's ear. Then, he leans into Three's other ear and his lips lightly brush against it.

"The flower really sets off your eyes, huh?" He closes his eyes as he lays down, pulling Three with him as they sit close to each other.

Three doesn't respond, and instead he closes his eyes and savors the moment that they were sharing. Every bit of fear has disappeared from his mind, and all his dark thoughts have been replaced with love, lust, and desire. The urge to kiss Four was almost suffocating, but he decided that it wasn't worth it to risk everything. The hand holding and flower giving would have to suffice for tonight, as much as he'd like to go to the next level with SMG4.

They sit there together for what seems like hours, even if it is really only five minutes. Four begins to drift off, before inhaling sharply and sitting up. He sadly sighs once he realizes that he won't be able to stay awake for much longer. That meant less time with Three, which was sounding more depressing to him by the second. Three notices his behavior, mimicking his movements and also sitting upright.

"Are you good?" Three asks, gently retracting his hand from Four's.

"Oh yeah, I'm all good. I think I'm just starting to get a little bit tired." He apologetically smiles at his friend. "I wish I could stay longer, though." He whispers that last part to himself, just quiet enough that Three couldn't fully hear what he was saying.

"Well, it is two in the morning, scrub." Three calls Four one of the affectionate nicknames that he uses for him and him only.

Once he says that, he brings himself to a standing position and offers Four his hand stylishly. The man chuckles softly, though Four couldn't deny that he was mildly charmed by the gesture. He holds out his hand and Three takes it gently. 

Suddenly, Four feels like he's in a romantic novel and he has to stop himself from blushing. He wasn't entirely sure why he was feeling this way, but he just shrugged it off and continued to smile at his companion.

"So." They both stand awkwardly next to each other for a moment before Four adjusts the hat on his head. "It's been great, Three, but it's probably best if we head on home. Just follow me."

The two cosmically linked men smile warmly at each other before walking back on the path they traversed only a few minutes prior. As they continue on in silence, Three accidentally brushes against a tree, causing one of his AirPods to fall out of his pocket. He instantly halts in his tracks, leaning down to pick up the expensive piece of technology. This quick action doesn't go unnoticed by Four, who looks up at him as curious as a mischievous child.

"What?" Three inquires curiously as he placed the lone headphone back in the pocket of his pajama pants.

"Can I listen to music with you?" Four requests, causing Three to become more confused with the other man.

"W-well. I don't know about that. You see, my taste in music is very... um..." Three fishes with embarrassment.

"It can't be worse than Beeg's. He listens to the Skibidi toilet song Rizzler remix on an hour long loop." Four's mouth turns into a line. "Daily." He deadpans as Three lets out a nearly silent chuckle.

"All right." Three agrees to let Four hear his favorite song, handing him the left ear pod. "J-just don't laugh."

"Wouldn't dream, of it, SMG3."

He presses play on his phone once both of them are situated, once again having Billie Eilish sing a quiet song. The lyrics were meaningful and hit Three deeply, and he just hoped that Four would appreciate this somewhat and not just call him crazy for listening to girly music. Because, if he was being honest, Three couldn't think of a single other artist who was as girly as Billie Eilish. Yes, there were others, but he was mostly embarrassed by liking Eilish's sad music.

Man, am I the greatest

My congratulations

All my love and patience

All my admiration

Once Three looks over, though, Four actually appears to be enjoying the song. He was quietly humming along to the identifiable chorus, smiling to himself. Then, his expression softened even more when the music began to pick up. Three raises an eyebrow with a friendly laugh at Four's cute behavior. Not that he'd ever admit that out loud... his nightmare would not be fully exiting his mind anytime soon.

"SM- Three." Four pauses, deciding to call his friend by his nickname as they brush shoulders with each other. "This isn't bad music at all. It's very nice to listen to."

"You sure?" Three insecurely looks towards the ground. "It's pretty girly."

"No, it's not. Anyone can listen to any music. And this has a deeper meaning than most of the songs I listen to. That just helps me get to know you better, anyway. We have been friends for like two years now." Four smiles. "And- I'll let you in on a little secret- I like some of Taylor Swift's music. So, you're not alone." He leans into Three's ear and whispers to him again, being more careful to avoid his lips from touching this friend's earlobe again.

"Thanks, I..." Three trails off once he realizes that the next song in the album has begun to play. "Thanks." He settles on just a simple expression of gratitude.

Their hands brush against each other's once again, Three's bare fingers feeling the satin of Four's gloves. Their contact was brief, but when their arms swung together in sync again, the man in blue gives his friend's hand a small squeeze, causing butterflies to flutter through his whole body. This time, he doesn't have enough time to return the gesture as the forest ends, revealing his café with the neon sign lit up. Four's castle is only across the street, but they have run out of reasons to be close to each other. They were home.

"Well, we're back." Four says, and Three was almost sure that he sounded disappointed that this was true.

"Yeah, but tomorrow's Saturday." Three says, brightening both of their expressions. "I'll have to put up with another one of your wacky adventures." He rolls his eyes.

"Oh, don't be silly. You love hanging out with your best friends." Four smirks teasingly, flicking Three's arm.

"Says who?" Three smiles ever so slightly and blushes, looking to the side.

"You, that's who~" He continues to giggle.

"You don't have to be such a baka about it..." Three stutters, the temperature of his face getting even warmer.

"Oh, all right. I'll get out of your hair. I should probably finish my video of our adventure from last weekend, anyway." Four shrugs and is about to leave before Three pulls on his sleeve, causing him to halt.

"Hell no. You're going to bed, you dumbass." Three looks unamused. "You can always do a few last-minute edits in the morning before you post it."

"At 9:00? That's literally seven hours from now." Four frowns at him. "Kinda pointless to wake up then instead of sleeping in and putting it on auto-post."

"No." Three pauses. "Maybe." He puffs his cheeks out before sighing. "Fine, have it your way, scrub. Just go to bed soon, kay?"

"Promise." Four smiles once more before waving and walking away from his friend.

"See you soon, Four." He finally takes it upon himself to use the nickname that SMG4 uses for him, and it makes the other man noticeably happier. "Moron." He affectionately chuckles, touching the beautiful flower that was tucked in his hair and turning around.

"See you tomorrow! ... I love you." Four whispers the last few words to himself quietly, allowing himself to giggle with affection and sneak one more glance at his crush.

We're getting somewhere. If he told me about his dream, it means he trusts me. Even if it wasn't one hundred percent true. He huffs quietly, interrupting his own thought process. If only he remembered that Meme Guardians are cosmically liked. And that we SHARE dreams. Did he really think that I was just awake, last-minute editing my video? That's amusing. I am way too much of a perfectionist for that. Four glances at Three as he walks back into his café and his shoulders relax.

"I think I'll ask him out soon." They both say simultaneously behind the doors of their respective homes. "One day very soon." 

~~~

10331 Words

Chapter 7: Goodbye… 💔🗑️ {Mar4}

Summary:

TW: Death, Swearing

Miyamoto has signed Lawyer Kong's DMCA, nearly everyone Mario loves is dead, and the spaghetti loving Italian knows that this could very well be his last encounter with his best friend.

This oneshot takes place at the beginning of the episode "Goodbye, SMG4".

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

"I'm... I'm going to miss this place." SMG4 sighs, looking off into the distance.

He and his best friend, Mario, sit on the roof of Princess Peach's castle, the sun setting in front of them. This was a somber moment for both men, but what were they to do? Lawyer Kong had backed them into a corner. With the Super DMCA signed and their friends gone, there was nothing that Four could use to defend himself. It was clear that he wasn't wanted in this world anymore, and if he didn't leave, there would be horrible legal repercussions for Mario and his Nintendo licensed friends. Four cared too much about Mario to put him through that, especially when it was inevitable that they had lost.

Mario's expression drops as he stares at the ground below him. He didn't want SMG4 to leave, to go who knows where. They had been best friends for eleven years, and to think it was all thrown away by a stupid ass monkey? But, Mario tried his best to push his anger aside and enjoy his final moments with the man who's always been there for him.

"Heh... Remember the time we had that chain chomp chase after us?" Four smiles, leaning back on his hands.

"Oh..." Mario quietly whimpers in sadness at the time he remembered very clearly.

"Or that time you got your pingas stuck in a door?" SMG4's nostalgic grin quickly switched into a frown as he also turned his gaze to the tiles on the roof.

At the mention of yet another fond memory, Mario's frown turns deeper. His lips begin to quiver as he bites back the tears that were threatening to fall from his eyes. He was desperate to not let Four see this vulnerable side of him right before he dies, or goes off into the abyss, so he just stays as still as he can as he continues to listen.

"Or the time we had to fight a cosmic eldritch monster." Four says, this time as more of a statement than a question.

Both of them look away from each other, with SMG4 looking to his right and Mario looking to his left. For a moment, everything was silent as they tried to decide what to do, what to say next. Then, Mario finally snapped, throwing his arms around his best friend as tight as he could. He was afraid that, if he ever let go, the man next to him would never return.

"SMG4! Don't leave me!" He chokes out a broken sob, trying to wrap himself tighter around the other.

Four looks crestfallen as Mario's tears stain his overalls. His eyes close as he hugs the man in red just as tight as he does. Despite trying to have a good attitude about all this, in reality Four was terrified. He knew that he was about to die, and the truth of it all just made him feel sick to the stomach. He found himself, in that moment, never wanting to let Mario leave his embrace.

Lawyer Kong clears his throat and holds up a clock, but it goes completely unnoticed by the Meme Guardian and his Avatar. They just keep holding each other and crying, all of their emotional distress flooding out of them. They mourned the loss of their friends and feared the loss of Four. Speaking of the man in blue, he knew that his time was running out, and it was best not to keep Lawyer Kong waiting a whole lot longer. At the realization, he reluctantly pulls away from the hug and finally accepts his fate.

Mario realizes that Four is leaving, but he is determined to keep him by his side, even if it was only for a moment longer. He repositions his hands so that he is grabbing Four's overalls while Four's hands are awkwardly at his side from when he pulled away from the hug. He raises an eyebrow at Mario quietly, motioning to Lawyer Kong who is getting more and more pissed by the minute. When he notices that Mario isn't showing any signs of letting go, Four decides to whisper in his ear.

"Mario, what are you doing? You're making him-" He is cut off with a finger to his lips.

"Hey, you big-a monkey. Give Mario one more minute with his best friend!" He shouts at the lawyer, who looks like he has just been stabbed once he hears Mario directly defy his orders.

He is about to respond, but he's given no time to do so. Mario positions himself nearly in Four's lap, wraps his hands around his waist, and plants a kiss right on his lips.

SMG4 lets out a mixture of a surprised squeak and a sigh before ultimately deciding to kiss his best friend back. He curls his fingers in Mario's hair, closing his eyes as he savors the touch of his lips. Mario leaves small love bites on Four's bottom lip before pulling away almost as quickly as he started the kiss.

They both sit there with flushed faces, and SMG4 with a swollen lower lip. Then, they simultaneously gasp and look up at Lawyer Kong, expecting him to be scarred and even more upset. In reality, he's just mildly annoyed and confused. The big monkey still knows that he's gotten his way, after all, so there was no reason to overreact about a little goodbye kiss.

"Get that out of your system, Mario?" He asks, though he doesn't bother to wait for an answer. "Good. Now, come on, SMG4."

"R-right." Four gulps, standing up as his gaze lingers on Mario for a second longer than it should have. "Can I say one more goodbye?"

"Very well." He sighs, gesturing for the man to get a move on.

"Guys, thank you all so much for watching SMG4. Goodbye." He addresses his fans, which are always hiding somewhere behind that fourth wall.

"Es Em Gee Four!" Mario begins to cry yet again, reaching out for his hand.

"Mario." He says, giving it a little squeeze before letting go. "I love you, man."

He then watches with horror as Four's body goes stiff. His eyes roll to the back of his head as he drops to the ground, dead. His corpse sits there like a cold reminder of all that Lawyer Kong has done, all that he has taken away from Mario. It completely broke his spirit to see the man he was kissing not only a minute earlier now dead, a product of Mario's own incompetence. He could've stalled Miyamoto for longer, he could've convinced him to not sign the DMCA in the first place, he could've-

"Come on, Mario. Miyamoto-San is waiting for you at Nintendo HQ." Lawyer Kong reminds him, placing a cold hand on his shoulder.

"O-okay." The Italian takes one more look at SMG4, at everything that could have been, before turning around.

He would find a way to save them all, he had to. Even if he was on his own, he was Mario. He would find a way, no matter what it took him. But for now, he couldn't help but cry and drag his feet. Because SMG4 was gone, and he watched him die. Just like everyone else whose lives were sucked away yesterday.

Everyone was gone, and Mario's life couldn't be more miserable.

~~~

1233 Words

Notes:

I wrote this in twenty minutes without editing it because I wanted to get it out of my system and also because I've written a lot of SMG34 lately.

Chapter 8: L.O.V.E. ☁️🥝 {Mar4, Mar3, SMG34}

Summary:

TW: Swearing, Sexual Fantasies, Making Out, Mentions of Sex

The day that SMG4 finally decides to confess to his crush, Mario comes into the picture and makes feelings inside him erupt that he never thought he had. Now Four faces a difficult choice, and he has no clue what to do... or who to choose.

This oneshot takes place one week after the episode "TRASH FRIENDS".

Chapter Text

“I’m gonna do it. Today has to be the day.” A distorted voice says from the shadows of their darkened bedroom. They pull out a picture of somebody, but it’s also in the darkness, making it impossible to see who they were talking about. “Oh, you’re so sexy, I love you so much.” They continue to swoon before bringing the frame up to their lips, giving it a tender kiss. 

Then, the light switches on, revealing that the mysterious person is SMG4, who is currently leaning back on the palms of his hands with hearts in his eyes. He is now tracing the outline of the picture as he giggles uncontrollably, his eyes only set on the portrait of the one inside. After a little while longer, he sets the picture next to him and sighs lovingly as he lays down. 

Now, anyone looking in from the outside could obviously tell that Four was in love… but with who?  

“You think today is finally a good day to ask, Beeg?” He talks to his pet meme as the stubby meme is engrossed in his iPad game. He snorts quietly in response, clearly seeming to care more about his technology than whatever his father was saying. “Hello?” Four waves his hand in front of Beeg’s face, which just earns another glare and then an eventual response from him. 

To an outsider, Beeg just responded with a bunch of random sound effects, but Four could understand what he was saying to an extent. After a few months of being left in the dark when his pet and Eggdog chatted, he finally got lessons and was pretty much fluent in their Meme Language by now. Well, why are you gay? Don’t know. Is the SWEET RAVE PARTY gay? After Beeg is done speaking, Four cringes. Maybe he wasn’t fluent after all. 

“Um... English?” He offers up, causing the deeply troubled kid to roll his eyes. 

“Is big purple man...” He pauses, trying to find the word in English before ultimately giving up and speaking in Meme Language again. Gay

“Oh yeah. Have you seen the shit he does? Literal definition of le gay man.” He says the last bit in a terrible French accent, a beret and mustache spawning on his head. 

Why is my dad such a LEROY JENKINS? Beeg facepalms, uninterested once more, and looks at his iPad game. When he sees that he is losing due to SMG4 and his idiocy, he shrieks and begins to go crazy, pulling out his gun and shooting the poor tablet. 

“Are you freaking kidding me!” He screams out a meme in his language, obviously meaning something else that Four didn’t have the energy to decipher. 

“Beeg, stop it!” Four yells, tearing the iPad away from his pet’s grasp. He sees red when he notices that it is demolished. “I paid $1,200 for that, you little-” 

“SMG4! Mario got his head stuck in the microwave, please help!” Meggy’s voice calls out from the kitchen, causing both to look up. 

As his dad is distracted, Beeg sees this as an opportunity to run away before Four can beat him for shooting his tablet.  

Four sighs, looking back at the picture on his bed. Of course, Mario’s antics and Beeg’s... teenagerness (is that even a word?) were getting in the way of his confession. Sure, he needed time to prepare, but that would be hard with a crazy fat Italian wreaking havoc 24/7. He was Mario’s best friend, but it seemed like he could never get a break! Couldn’t Mario just go nap for an entire day? 

He walks out of his room, adjusting his blue cap on his head. He waves to Meggy, who is trying to pull Mario out of the tiny microwave by his legs. How he was even able to fit his large head in that appliance, Four may never know. 

“Hey, Meggy. Need some help?” He chuckles, gesturing to Mario’s flailing legs and the woman who was already breaking a sweat trying to aid her best friend. 

“Sup, Four.” She smiles. “Thanks for helping. Apparently, he’s been here since five in the morning, but I just found him.” 

“Es Em Gee Four! Help Mario!” Mario’s voice is muffled as he speaks from inside the microwave. 

“But how did you get in there in the first place?” Four asks, still very curious. 

“Spaghet.” He simply says before crying and kicking his legs aggressively. 

“Calm down, bud. I’m here to get you out.” He says, causing the Italian to settle down. “Meggy, let’s pull on three.” He says, grabbing Mario’s left leg as Meggy grabs his right. “One, two, three…”  

The two friends struggle to pull the fat man out of the microwave. They move it around, shaking him, but to no avail. The microwave slightly jostles his head around, causing Mario’s hand to fly up to his neck and grab it. Then, Mario suddenly screams in pain, making both friends stop moving it quickly. 

“Red! Are you okay?” Meggy yells. 

“I can’t feel my pingas!” Mario groans woozily. “Stop pulling the microwave!” 

“Can you go quickly get some more help? I’ll make sure he doesn’t die in here.” Meggy says as Four nods, running out of the castle and down the street to Three’s Coffee and Bombs. 

Why Three? Well, it was Sunday, everyone’s day off, meaning that none of them were near the castle. Except for that guy, he was always looking for an opportunity to make more money. He basically jumped for joy when he realized that coffee shops weren’t traditionally open past noon and closed even earlier on Sundays.  

SMG3, was peacefully serving a customer when he heard the door ding, his Meme Guardian partner rushing in with an upset expression. Having Four in his store daily was something he did not look forward to, especially when business was finally starting. And what the hell was up with him? He usually came super early in the morning or late at night, not at 12 PM. 

“SMG3!” Four yells, hopping over the counter and grabbing his shoulders. 

This successfully scares away the customer, making her squeak quietly and run away from the restaurant. At least she hadn’t paid yet, or Three would likely have been sued for “stealing her money” or some shit. The last thing he needed was for his café to shut down and for him to be left with nothing. Speaking of the owner of the restaurant, he is shocked when Four jumps the counter. So shocked, in fact, that he blushes and drops the coffee mug on the ground, the hot liquid scalding him. 

“Son of a bitch- Eek! get away, you baka!” He shoves Four out of his way as he cleans up the mess. 

Four’s blue eyes meet his beautiful ruby eyes, and the YouTuber lovingly sighs. Oh, how he wanted to grab fistfuls of his hair and kiss him deeply… just like when he was looking at his picture earlier. There was no more denying it, as almost everyone could clearly see. Four loved Three so much. 

When Four first realized that he was in love with Three, he went through each stage of grief at least five times before finally realizing that it was true. He wasn’t disgusted by the idea of liking a man, because he had always liked both girls and boys, he was just shocked that his heart chose his Guardian partner. They were just supposed to be frenemies, and now they were friends and Four couldn’t stop himself from selfishly wanting them to be more. And now, it was even to the point where he would kiss a picture of Three? Goddamn, he was down bad. Ever since they were redesigned, he thought that the man had changed so much… both physically and emotionally. He loved it. 

Caught up in his love-struck stupor, Four doesn’t realize Three has been trying to get his attention for the past thirty seconds. 

“I love you; will you be mine?” Three says, looking up at Four seductively. 

“What?!” Four shrieks, his face turning a deep red at once. 

“Of course I’m not going to commit a crime, dumbass. Unless I need to.” He says the last bit darkly, walking past him with a brush if their shoulders. 

“Wait. Huh?” Was Four’s mind playing tricks on him? 

“What do you want? Why did you come in?” Three demands, not caring enough to repeat his earlier sentence. 

“I…” Four forgets why he came in the café for a quick minute, as he was too focused on staring into Three’s eyes. 

“Unless you just want to see me so bad that you go out of your way to do so on your day off.” He lets a smile creep onto his face when Four’s face goes pale. 

“I wish I had an actual free day. But I need to help Mario get his head out of a microwave.” Four says, silently craving a time when the two of them hang out alone. “Could you help me, pretty please?”  

“I swear, you and your friends are insane sometimes.” Three sighs, pinching the bridge of his nose. 

“Was that a yes?” Four asks him optimistically. 

“Well, it wasn’t a no, was it? Let’s go, scrub.” He says, trying his best not to smile at the man who he totally doesn’t consider a friend. 

The two walk out of the café and back into the castle. They push open the wide doors and walk into the kitchen. Mario’s legs were drooping and Meggy was sitting crisscrossed on the floor, watching memes. When she notices the two, her face lights up and she makes a mischievous expression, wiggling her eyebrows flirtatiously. Oh no, Four didn’t like when she made that face… 

“I had a thought.” Meggy says, setting her phone on the counter. “What if you two use your meme powers and make his head bigger? That way he can break the microwave.” 

“Like hold hands?” Four asks, tensing up as his cheeks turn pink. Damn it, Meggy. 

He regrets telling Meggy about his feelings for the purple man. Ever since, she has been secretly plotting for them to have romantic moments. Four knew that she was trying her best to make them canon, but it wasn’t working. The only possible choice was a straight up confession, because Three was pretty much oblivious to his feelings, and he didn’t know if he was quite ready for that yet. Despite telling himself that he was going to do it time and time again, even planning on doing it for real just a few minutes ago, he couldn’t help but feel unprepared. These forced romantic moments were not helping his self-esteem. 

“Come on, scrub, I don’t have all day.” Three holds his hand out expectantly. 

“Right. Of course.” Four says, grabbing his palm and intertwining their fingers. 

As their meme powers begin to convert memes around the Showgrounds into energy, Four can’t help but look at Three’s face. He stares at Three’s beautiful beard and his shining eyes. Four even goes so far as to wish that he could grab Three’s face and kiss him, right here and now. He wonders what Three would feel like pressed up against him, how Three would feel below him while they explored each other’s mouths, how good he would feel when Four was inside him, penetrating every inch of- Holy shit. I need to stop, like, RIGHT NOW. He pauses for a second, trying to stop thinking about fucking his frenemy. But to have that hot body below me, MOANING for me would be so sexy... He ends up having to restrain himself, which weakens the connection between them. 

“Oi, what the fuck? Focus!” Three hisses, grabbing Four’s hand even tighter. “That’s the only way we’ll be able to save this fatass. 

Right. They had to get Mario out of this microwave. He concentrates on making Mario larger and the microwave promptly breaks, with Mario’s head expanding enough for him to break free. Mario jumps for joy, running around the kitchen like a dog who just was let out to the yard to play. He was running so fast, he couldn’t see anything other than a blurry blue room. 

As the two let go of each other's hands, SMG4 expected Three to make a snarky comment about them holding hands, or about Four’s initial lack of focus. Instead, he just tipped his hat and began to walk outside. 

“Hold on, where are you going?” Four asks, running his hand down Three’s sleeve as he walks away and grabbing his hand. 

Three freezes up, face flushed, and turns his head back towards his friend.  

“Look, I can’t hang out today, all right? I need to get back to my customers.” He hastily explains, trying to pull his hand from Four’s tight grasp. 

“But Three! You only had one customer!” Three scowls at Four, beginning to walk away. Four follows him, allowing the castle doors to swing shut and for Mario to look up in confusion. 

“Where the Es Em Gee Four going?” He asks Meggy, holding his still pained neck as he closes his eyes. 

“Leave those gays- I MEAN GUYS- alone.” Meggy says. “They need some time.” 

“Some time to-a make out?” Mario giggles to himself as he turns towards them. 

“Maybe, Mario, maybe…” Meggy says. 

Four continues to follow Three, the latter getting more and more annoyed. 

“Look! I just need some alone time. Ever since my coupons have been thrown away, I haven’t been getting a lot of customers. Now that I’ve gotten a few, I’m not about to look bad by not being at my open café!” He says in his typical angry tone. 

Four full on grabs him and pulls him close, creating a dark red blush on both men’s faces. Four really holds himself back as he holds Three in a slow dance pose, desperately trying his best to focus on the moment and not sexually fantasize about the man pressed up to his chest. 

“Three, please. I know this whole store thing has been super difficult, especially with that snail infestation.” Four rubs Three’s back, trying to make it feel more soothing and friendly than romantically charged. 

Mikel Jorden. I’m still pissed at you for that.” Three turns away. 

“But,” Four sighs, taking a deep breath as he grabs Three’s face, “I’ll be there for you if you ever need to tell me anything. In fact, I’ll tell you something right now, SMG3. I really love-” 

“Oh shit, do I have a customer?! My café!” Three yells, pushing Four out of the way and running towards his shop. 

Four feels himself trip over something, and as he looks down, he sees a deep and wide hole. A fall from that height would seriously injure him, and he could do nothing to stop his descent. He screams as loud as he can when he falls face first into what will end up as an injury… 

“ES EM GEE FOUR!!!” Mario’s iconic scream rings out as Four falls, a gloved hand grabbing his before he drops. 

His breathing quickens as he looks up at Mario, who pulls him up and holds him by the back of the head. Four stands there awkwardly as his best friend’s expression softens. The taller man strokes his hair before pulling him into a hug. Mario’s arms wrap around him tightly as Four just stands there, lightly rubbing the man’s back. 

“Mario.” He breathes out, his adrenaline too high for him to really say much else. 

“Four?” Three gasps, turning around and realizing his mistake. 

“Es Em Gee Four.” Mario says, pulling away from the hug and staring him in the eyes. “Are you okay?” His piercing gaze was more serious and intense than Four has seen from him since WOTFI 2021. 

Four just stood there woozily, looking at Mario. This was probably the closest the two had ever been, and he was enjoying the view. Mario, despite his chubbiness, had surprisingly toned muscles and his mustache was way cleaner than SMG4 ever remembered. His deep hazel-colored eyes shone through Four’s blue ones and made him blush. Wait, blush? Four just realized. Since when did his best friend get so beautiful? 

“Yeah. Uh, thanks man.” He smiles sincerely before walking away, touching his warm face with a horrified look. 

“SMG4.” Three whispers under his breath, frowning and deciding to apologize for his mistake. So, what, I’ll lose one customer. It’s better than losing an ene- a friend. 

“Okie dokie.” Mario shrugs and begins chomping down on spaghetti.  

Then, he jolts up quickly and takes another look at Four and Three. What-? Why did they both look so magnetic?! And freakishly hot? 

L.O.V.E. Found. 

Before Four can disappear in his room to think about what that just meant, Three taps him on his shoulder. Four turns around and realizes that Three was looking even more beautiful with the expression currently plastered on his face. Why was I even thinking about Mario when a perfect flawless man is right in front of me? ...Is it possible to love two people at once? No. Four didn’t even want to think about that. 

“SMG4, I’m sorry. I didn’t mean to try to kill you. I just let my emotions get the best of me sometimes.” He flashes him a grin, showing that he really was feeling apologetic. 

“Lucky Mario saved me, huh?” Four smiles back. “But honestly, it’s hard to stay mad at you, even if I wanted to.” He truthfully says. 

“So, um, what did you want to tell me earlier? Because I realized maybe the customer can wait a couple seconds.” He admits. 

“Oh! I just wanted to tell you that I really love…” Four pauses, wondering if the best time was now. With all the emotions and conflicting thoughts in his head, he might end up saying something wrong and making the situation ten times more awkward. Three looks up at him with a hopeful expression and a hint of a blush, and Four wanted nothing more than to just tell him. “Muffins. I was going to ask you if you sold them at your café.” But he couldn’t say something he’d regret. 

“Oh. Uh, I guess I could consider selling them. S-see you later, I guess.” He says, desperately trying to hide his disappointment behind the emotional mask he always wears but finding it even more hard to do than usual. I really thought that was it. Maybe I’ve been misreading him all this time. 

Four slowly walks back to his castle, repeating the events of the last few minutes in his mind. Can you really like two people? Or does he not like Three anymore? Did he even like Mario? If not, then why did he look so hot, and why did the thought of him just make SMG4’s stomach flip? 

“What the fuck just happened?” He whispers to himself. 

 

~~~ 

 

Four’s eyes flutter open as light pours in from the windows. He turns around to look at his phone groggily, his hand freezing in place when he can’t find it. This wakes him up completely, causing him to realize that he wasn’t in his room at all. He was in some other weird room that smelled faintly of cologne and alcohol.  

Taking in his surroundings, he begins to realize where he is. He was laying on a large, black bed under the covers. The walls were also a pitch black, with the entire room being sort of emo themed. There was also giant golden statue in the corner of Three. This made him assume that he was in his friend’s room. He couldn’t remember this exact place clearly from Three’s café, however. He may have been in it once when the store first opened, but the territory was still unfamiliar.  

He lifts the covers to stand up and blushes a dark red when he realizes that he was only wearing his boxers. He takes a small purple blanket from what he assumed was Three’s bed and wraps himself in it. Then, he gets off the bed and looks around for some clothes. He begins to raid Three’s closet, desperately trying to find some clothing that wouldn’t make him look like a shaved clone of Three.  

Finally, he settles on a purple hoodie and some sweatpants, still with no hat as he couldn’t find that anywhere. He admires himself, wondering what it would be like if Three let him do this all the time. Oh crap, I almost completely forgot about Three! I really hope that he doesn’t find me. He thinks as he pulls the hoodie over his chest. He knew that SMG3 would have some words to say if he found Four sneaking around in his bedroom. Four still wasn’t sure how or why he was in there, and how it was possible for him to be in the other’s bed… with only underwear. 

He finishes getting the clothes on and is about to leave when the elevator dings, making his hair stand on end. Four freezes and ducks behind the golden statue as Three enters his room. Three walks to the bed and begins to look around when the scent of fresh pancakes fills Four’s nose, making his mouth water at once. Damn, he loved pancakes. Too bad he had to stay hidden, or he would totally steal some of SMG3’s food. 

“Babe, I made some blueberry pancakes for you! I know they’re your favorite!” Three calls out into the open air, a puzzled expression appearing on his face when he realizes that there is no one else in the room. “Huh. Are you in the bathroom?” The man in purple pajamas walks over to the restroom and knocks on the door.  

Is he looking for his girlfriend? Was he straight all along?! Four softly gasps at the thought, the sound of his voice catching Three’s attention.  

“Damnit!” Four hisses as the purple Meme Guardian walks over to him. 

Four braces himself to get yelled at, but instead he is laughed at by his friend, who was not mad for some unexplainable reason. He just found his neighbor sneaking around in his bedroom, and he just has some smirk on his face? Four studies his face for a moment to figure out what game he was trying to play, but it is frustratingly unreadable like usual.  

“What the hell are you doing?” Three snorts, taking Four’s hand and pulling him out from his hiding place. 

“Me? I totally wasn’t sneaking around in your room- I mean, I’m lost! Y-yeah.” He cringes at his blatant lie. 

“You know, purple looks good on you.” Three grins, lightly tugging on the sweater and making the other man blush. 

“I lost my clothes.” Four makes an excuse, because he knew that otherwise he wouldn’t be caught dead in Three’s clothing. 

“You stuffed ‘em under here last night.” Three shrugs, pulling Four’s crumpled up clothes from under the bed. 

“Last… night?” Four wonders aloud. 

“Dude.” Three laughs, ruffling Four’s hair. “You either have a really bad memory or you’re just fucking wasted.” Three sits down on the bed, motioning for Four to sit as well. 

“What exactly did happen last night?” Four asks as he rests down on the bed. 

“You really don’t remember?” Three frowns slightly, holding Four’s face in his hand for a moment before shrugging. “You hosted a party at the Showgrounds, and we got drunk out of our minds and started like, viciously making out. Then I brought you home, we sobered up a little with some bread and water, confessed, and we became boyfriends. After that, we fucked.” He curtly explains. “Consensually, of course.” His face slightly flushes as he scratches the back of his neck in slight embarrassment.  

“Wait. I said that I loved you?!” Four shoots up from his seat. “And we had sex?!” 

“Oh, shit. Don’t tell me that you were just drunkenly rambling last night. I thought you’d fully sobered up!” Three’s eyes widened. 

“No, no, that’s not it. I do like you a lot, Three. I love you. I was just so scared to admit it because I thought you’d never love me back.” Four smiles, still surprised at the situation but way more delighted. 

“Oh, Four. You’re perfect.” Three says, pulling Four into the corner of the room, pinning him to the wall, and kissing him with a fully open mouth. 

SMG4 groans into the kiss and kisses back with the same passion. It slowly becomes heated as their tongues dance with each other, until SMG3 pulls his lips away suddenly. Before Four can ask what was wrong, Three latches his lips onto his neck and begins to kiss at it harshly, biting and sucking at the sensitive skin. Four lets out another breathy moan, running his hands through Three’s hair. Then, he pulls the purple hoodie over Four’s head and throws it to the ground, slowly kissing down to his shoulders and planning to go all the way down. Four slowly pulls away, stopping Three before he can go any further. 

“Mm. Breakfast first.” He says, laying back on the bed as Three beds and brings him a plate of food. As Four takes a bite from his fork, his eyes light up with amazement. “Holy hell, these are the best pancakes ever!” 

“Glad you like them, babe.” Three smiles when Four’s face flushes at the pet name he was given. “You know, maybe they’d taste even better if we shared.” 

“You’re not seriously-” Four is cut off as Three quickly kisses him again, both men sharing the wonderful flavor of the freshly cooked pancakes.  

This was heavenly. 

As Three wraps his arms around his boyfriend and they both swallow the food, the elevator dings and someone walks into the room. Both Meme Guardians pull away quickly, whipping their heads around to have a look at the unexpected visitor. 

“Oh! I-Is Mario interrupting something?” The fat Italian man says from the other side of the bedroom, looking at the ground with one hand behind his back. 

“Mario?” Four’s eyes widen and his cheeks redden as he remembers the crush that he’s recently developed for his hot best friend. Fuck, Four, now is not the time for this! 

“Mario! Come on in!” Three says, sounding not at all annoyed at him. “What’s up?” 

“Well, Mario wanted to know if Es Em Gee Four was here because he wants to give him these.” Mario says, taking a bouquet of blue and white roses out from behind his back and putting them in the speechless Four’s lap. He smiles sweetly at the shirtless man, and you could tell that he was desperately trying not to look at his bare chest. Four notices this and his blush deepens before Mario clears his throat, turning his attention towards Three. “And he also wants to give you these, Es Em Gee Three.” He grabs skull shaped earrings from his pocket and gently hands them to Three. 

“Wow! What’s the special occasion?” Four asks, once he pulls the hoodie that he borrowed from Three back over his own head. 

“M-Mario wanted to ask if you were into polyamory.” He confesses, looking at the floor. “He really loves you both, and he thinks that we are all good for each other.” 

Three squints weirdly as Four and Mario lock eyes. Four is met with a beautiful hazel color and a soft gaze, as Mario’s eyes search his just like they did yesterday. His heart feels like it’s about to stop working, and he just wants to melt into Mario’s touch forever. 

“W-well, I...” Four hesitates, even though he just wants to jump into both of their arms. But we're best friends! It would never work out, even if Three were to be into a polyamorous relationship. Would it? 

“Yes.” Three decides. “You’re sexy, Mario, you know that?” He says, dropping his new earrings on the bed.  

“Es Em Gee Four, what about you?” Mario asks, causing both of their attention to go to the man who was trembling on the edge of the bed. 

Come on, Four, just say what’s on your mind. Only you know what you want, and they wouldn’t be mad at you for whatever you choose. 

“Mario, I love you. You and Three are, like, my everything. I think about you so much, and even if I only really developed feelings for you recently, they've been there. And they won’t leave my mind, so... I’m glad you asked for a polyamorous relationship.” His words surprise even himself, but Mario smiles and plants a small kiss on his cheek. 

“Mario loves you too, Mi Amore.” 

Then, Three runs up to the fat Italian and begins to make out with him. The two quickly begin getting rougher until they are ripping off each other’s clothes. Four turns away in embarrassment, trying his best to respect their boundaries, before being pulled in by Mario for a kiss. Mario tastes like a mixture of chapstick and spaghetti, and it makes Four just want to disintegrate into the floor. He loves it like it is his lifeline.  

He feels Mario rip off his hoodie for good this time to explore his bare chest, moaning into the kiss as the Italian bites his lower lip. As they begin to go deeper, Four feels lips on his neck. He knows it was Three, and he could tell by the way he bit his neck, just like earlier. He lets the two work their magic and undress him, and then he feels a hand brush the hem of his boxers- 

 

~~~ 

 

Four wakes up from his dream, clutching his blankets tightly with a hot red blush on his face. He breathes heavily, still almost sure that Three’s lips are still on his neck, Mario’s tongue never left his mouth, and their hands are still all over his body. 

“Damnit!” Four mentally hits himself, trying to cool himself down. “Memes, I need some fresh air.” 

As he is walking outside, he tries to keep his mind off his dream, but his brain ultimately ends up bringing every train of thought back to it. Really, it started out like most of the dreams he has, with him dating Three and kissing him, but then took an odd turn. Almost like his mind was forcing him to think of Mario as more than just a best friend. He even confessed his love, and it sounded like something genuine that he would say to Mario in real life. The most frustrating thing about this is that he didn’t even like Mario until yesterday afternoon! Why did Mario have to go and be so fucking charming? 

He walks up a few flights of stairs to the roof of the castle, letting his legs dangle from the edge as he sits down. He breathes in the cool air and looks up at the shining stars, trying to come to terms with himself. The wind blows a few leaves off the trees, Four watching them as they soar past him. The calmness of the night lets his mind wander back to the times when life was simpler, back to his first gay panic in Three’s new café. 

 

Four was wiping down tables in Three’s café as the other man was sitting in a chair. He was reading a newspaper, casually spread out with his feet on a table. Four looks up at his relaxed friend and sighs in fake annoyance. 

“I better not have to clean that one too.” Four scoffs playfully. 

“Actually, you’re my underling for the day, remember?” Three smirks, not looking up from his paper. 

“Fuck off.” Four says, throwing the dirty rag at Three. 

Three catches it, unamused, and stands up. The chair makes a terrible scraping sound as it scratches across the floor, making both Meme Guardians cringe visibly. 

“Damn, it sounds like someone has to take a shit.” Three remarks suddenly. 

Four bursts into laughter at once, the other man trying but failing to not follow suit a few seconds later. 

“You’re really funny, Three.” Four says, setting the cleaning supplies down and walking over to him. “That is, when you aren’t acting emo.” 

“Excuse you!” Three scowls, giving Four a light push. “I’m not an emo.” 

Without any further words, Four whips out his phone and types up a storm. Three looks at him weirdly but makes no comment. The latter continues to type on his phone determinedly until he finds what he was looking for. Four turns the screen around as Three is met with a blackmail picture taken a few years ago of him painting his nails black and putting on his eyeliner. 

Of course, he should have seen that one coming. Four waits for a snarky remark, but instead he is met with more warm laughter. Three really did have a certain talent; a way that he just lit up the room with his laugh. Four almost found it hot. 

“You’re too cute, you know that?” Three finally says to Four.  

A light pink blush appears on Four’s face as he processes Three’s words. His friend thought he was cute? 

“You think I’m cute?” He whispers, mostly to himself. Three hears him, though, and blushes a deep red like the color of Mario’s hat. 

“That was meant to be an insult?!” He says, clearly very flustered as he shields his face with his cap. “Baka!” His words are muffled by his hat. 

There was that name again, that silly name that Three always called Four when he was at a loss for anything else to say. Baka. It seemed more of a pet name at this point, and Four could totally see him using it if they were dating. Wait a second, why was he thinking about him and SMG3 dating? He didn’t like men in that way! Did he? 

He decided that this was not the best time for a crisis and gathered himself quickly. He would think about this later when he got home. 

Four grabs the rag and gets back to wiping down the tables, neither person saying a word to each other. He keeps getting sidetracked, however, as he cleans and the same question circulates in his mind. 

Was he straight? Or did he like Three? 

 

Four sighs sadly as he stares at the night sky. He wasn’t sure if his feelings for Three would ever go away, despite him also having strong feelings for Mario. And even if he was into polyamory, too many things could go wrong. That dream was the best-case scenario, but if he filtered another person into his confession plans, the possibility for rejection and other difficulties doubled, and even more things could go wrong. Damn these stupid feelings, ruining his whole night. 

“Four?” A familiar female voice rings out from the field below him. “Is that you?” He looks down and sees Meggy standing there in an orange sweater and jeans. She looks very confused, and a little bit odd, considering that she didn't have her beanie on. Four smiles, waves at her, and slowly floats down from the roof using a little something called Plot Convenience Magic. “What’s up?” 

“I’m just thinking.” He confesses. 

If there was anyone who he wanted to be honest with, Meggy was his girl. She has kept his secret about Three for about five months now, and he would trust her with just about everything. Yeah, polyamory was hard to talk about, but he would find a way. It was better for him to just vent to someone than keep his feelings bottled up for much longer. 

“Thinking about Three?” She teases, leaning against the exterior of the castle. 

“Kinda.” Four stares at the ground and joins her in leaning against the blue wall, blushing a little bit. “You know what, I’m curious. Why are you all the way over here?” 

Usually, Meggy was in her home in the city, but tonight she was at the Showgrounds for some reason. The sky was lightening up, making Four realize that it may be later than he originally thought, but she was usually walking around her city when the sunrise hit. 

“Oh, me? I just needed to get out of the city for a little bit. It’s hard to find peace in a place that never stops moving. I figured, since it was five in the morning, I could come over here and watch the sun rise. I didn’t expect you to be awake, Mr. ‘I wake up at noon’.” 

“Hey.” He lightly bumps her with his elbow before answering. “I had a weird dream. Not a nightmare, but just odd.” 

“Three reject you or something?” She asks, clearly curious to know more. 

“Uh… not really that, but something?” He says, his gaze focused on the ground. 

“Come on, Four, you tell me all your secrets. Why hold back? What’s the matter?” She asks, concernedly putting a hand on her friend’s shoulder. 

“Well.” Four looks up at Meggy and sighs. “I had a sex dream about Mario and SMG3.” He closes his eyes in embarrassment. 

Meggy’s face turns from one of empathy to one of shock, and then she has an expression that Four finds hard to read. Why was this affecting her so much? Well, being the group’s secret keeper has its problems occasionally, especially in the rare case of a love triangle occurring.  

Earlier that day, Mario told her of his love for both Meme Guardians. She found it odd, considering he usually didn’t like to get involved in romantic relationships, but supported him either way. 

“Fucking hell.” Meggy mutters under her breath, remembering that Three had also told her about his crush on Four a few months prior. 

“Meggy, you said you could handle it. Are you weirded out?” Four frowns, his face still a burning red. 

Before she could answer, a text comes through in her phone. She looks at it with a blank face, though the text was extremely alarming. 

 

SPAGHETTIFREAK: woomy me and es em gee three kissy and he hated it please pick me up 

 

“Oh, Four, I’ve got to go. I’m sorry, Loaf had an emergency!” She says, urgently getting up and sprinting towards Three’s café. 

“Wait, Meggy!” He yells, running after his friend quickly. 

She stops in front of the building, gasping at the sight as Four skids to a halt right next to her. Mario is out in front, only wearing pajama pants, getting berated by Three who appeared to be only in his boxers. Four looks over to the ex-inkling who just gives him an apologetic look. That’s when Mario notices Meggy, making eye contact with her before turning back to the upset SMG3. She didn’t want to be caught in the middle of their extremely messy and complicated love triangle, but she didn’t want to leave, either. It was better for her to be there for her friends, even if it meant answering some questions and spilling a few secrets. 

“It’s five in the morning, Mario. I don’t even know what could’ve possibly compelled you to-” Three pauses once he sees two of his other friends, watching the interaction in front of them with unreadable expressions. “SMG4? Meggy? What are you doing here?” 

“What is Mario doing here?” Four asks weirdly, pointing to the fat Italian. 

Three doesn’t give a verbal answer, instead just walking over and squeezing Four’s hand. The Meme Energy flowed from one hand to the other, causing a vivid memory to play in Four’s mind from the perspective of Three. 

 

“There had better be a good reason for this.” Three sighed, looking Mario up and down skeptically. 

Just a minute ago, he had woken up with a jolt as Eggdog began barking at the front door. He had obviously rushed upstairs, under the impression that there was some kind of burglar outside his café. When he saw Mario, he was pissed, to say the least. 

“Heya, Es Em Gee Three.” He awkwardly waved at the café owner, who just scowled back at him. 

“The hell do you even want?” He pinched the bridge of his nose. “I don’t have all- day...” Three pauses, taking another glance at Mario. 

He looked sexy as hell! He looked as if he had lost tons of weight, and he had his hair in a nice style without the hat. He even was wearing earrings, and his clothes weren’t dirty like usual. It was weird for Three to see him like this, but he couldn’t stop himself from blushing and just staring at him with a smitten expression. 

“Like what you see, Tre, mi amore?” He smirks, allowing himself inside the main restaurant and slowly pinning Three up against a wall. “Mario got all dressed up just for his favorite uomo viola.” 

“Mario...” He hesitates for a moment before the not-so-fat Italian brings his hand up to cup his bearded chin. 

“I’ll make you feel so good, you’ll be screaming my name all night.” He whispers, sending chills down Three’s spine before connecting their lips in a heated kiss. 

Three moans quietly when Mario’s tongue enters his mouth, turning their kiss into something more. He grabs Mario by the shirt, pulling him closer, while Mario breaks the kiss for a second to take off Three’s hoodie and quickly removes his own top as well. When they dive back into each other, they hold each other close, determined to never let this moment end. Three feels the inside of his mouth being invaded by the other man’s mouth, and he falls even deeper into his lovestruck trance. 

Then, something cold brushed against his neck, making him snap out of it almost instantly, his eyes shooting open as he pushed Mario away from him like he was toxic. He touched the back of his neck where he felt the coldness and just ended up brushing a large insect away, but he still felt uneasy and sick for what he had just done. 

What the fuck just happened?

 

Four’s mouth goes agape as he tries his best to retain all that information. Yes, he was slightly concerned about Mario, but this also scared him. What if this was the next step towards his worst nightmare? What would happen if both men fell in love, and where would that leave him? Broken and alone, forced to watch as they become something more and Four is no more than just a friend in the background? 

As he is panicking, he barely notices both Mario and SMG3 walking up to him, likely in a means of comfort. Once he realizes their presence, though, he tries to make it seem like nothing is wrong. 

“SMG4, are you okay?” Three asks him, expression laced with confusion and concern for his friend. 

Instead of also asking him something similar, Mario flashes him a seductive look and he blushes deeply. Four thanks the meme gods that it’s too dark for Three to see. 

“You’re hot, you know that?” He says, getting closer to Four and pinning him to the wall of Three’s café. “So hot.” Mario’s eyes trail down lower as he grabs Four’s hips. 

There was something about Mario, something new, that SMG4 just couldn’t place. It’s like he was a magnet, pulling him closer until he could bear it no more. 

“I… Mario…” Four says quietly, before finally succumbing to everything he had been feeling for the past day and allowing his lips to touch his best friend’s. 

Mario slowly teases his mouth open and begins to make out with him, fingers brushing against his neck as a cold sensation runs through him. Four doesn’t think much of it, caught up in the bliss of Mario’s kiss and finally realizing just how much he needed this. 

“H-hey!” Three screams, running up and shoving Mario to the ground. It was hard to tell in the dark, but it looked like he was blushing a deep red. “You can’t just go around and- What the fuck is that on your neck holy shit.” His eyes widen as he gets closer to his frenemy, looking at him with concern. 

“What’s on my neck?” Four asks, bringing his fingers up and freezing when he realizes there was indeed something there. It was a relatively large lump, and from what he could see, it was glowing pink. “What is this?” Four falters, his voice shaky.  

“Look! It’s on Mario’s neck too!” Three points out, Mario standing back up as the three of them get a good look at him. 

He has pink veins climbing up to his brain, his eyes glowing the same color. Every vein stems from a lump in his neck, which is much bigger than Four’s. 

“Mario! What happened to you?” Meggy asks, walking up to her friend with a wavering voice, reaching out to help him. 

“I love you, Four. Be mine.” He hisses out, tackling Four to the ground. 

The more SMG4 resists, the more Mario’s appearance seems to change. He looked so fucking hot above him like that, sweat dripping off his face, and his abs showing because of his lack of shirt. His eyes seem to be beckoning to him. 

Kiss me now and kiss me hard. Mario’s voice echoes through his brain, making his thoughts run wild. 

All he could seem to think about was kissing the man in front of him now, all other thoughts disappear as he reaches out to touch Mario’s six pack. It was almost like he was in a trance, and it felt surreal in a way. 

Abs? Did he just lose two hundred pounds? Mario has never had abs! 

For the first time in a day, Four snaps out of it, seeing his best friend for what he is. A short, two hundred twenty-pound Italian man with dirty clothes and absolutely zero attractive features. 

“Wha…?” Four asks, jumping up quickly and staring at Mario. 

Three throws a weighted net over Mario’s body as the man struggles, his appearance flashing. He changes from a hot man back to his real self rapidly, almost reminding Four of a strobe light and giving him a massive headache.  

Four woozily walks over to Three, grabbing his shoulder and hoping that it will calm the raging pain that he’s currently in. Three holds him close before pulling him into one of the most genuine hugs he’s ever given, making Four almost instantly relax into his touch. They stay like this for a moment before Four looks into his wine-colored eyes, almost melting into the soft gaze they give him. 

Then, out of the blue, he hears a “NOW!” from Three, a battle cry from Meggy, and he is thrown to the ground once more. Meggy grabs a hold of the thing in Four’s neck and rips it out, the man yelling as his whole body aches and throbs. As he loses blood, he drops to the ground, slowly beginning to fall unconscious. 

“SMG3.” He quietly mumbles, leaning into his crush as he holds him tight. 

“Hold on, Four, I’m here.” He whispers. “I’m here for you.” 

“Three, I have to tell you... something.” His eyes slowly begin to close, but he forces them open for just a few seconds as he says the three words he has been trying to get out for the last year. “I love you.” 

And then, his world goes black. 

 

~~~ 

 

Ah jeez, my head... Four’s eyes slowly flutter open, and his body feels like he was just hit by a truck. The first thing that he notices is his Guardian partner sitting next to him, peacefully reading a book. Their hands are intertwined, the purple man having a light blush on his face. He was also wearing reading glasses, which was an unusual look on him. Four quietly smiles, taking the time to notice how cute his crush looked in the nerdy glasses before deciding to make his wakefulness known. 

“Three?” He asks, surprised at how groggy his voice sounds. 

His friend looks down with a small smile, lets go of his hand, and shuts his book. 

“You’re awake! Thank Memes!” He smiles, getting closer to him before noticing that his vision was off. “Oh, shit.” He says, quickly ripping off his glasses and tossing them across the bed. 

“You look cute with them on.” Four says, this time surprising both Three and himself. He blushes, suddenly finding the sheets very interesting. “S-sorry, that was, like, super inappropriate for me to just blurt out.” He laughs nervously, looking up to see if SMG3 was mad at him. 

“No, you’re fine. I’m not used to hearing things like that from you, though, so I got a little bit surprised.” He shrugs as Four sits up next to him. “Well, except for when you said that you...” He pauses, feeling a little too embarrassed to finish his sentence. 

They both sit there in silence for about a minute before Four gets fed up, deciding to break the ice. 

“Did you want to talk about-” 

“Three!” Meggy yells, successfully ruining the moment and barging in with a heated blanket and some food. “I figured out what was wrong with Mario!” 

“And how to cure him?” Three asks, turning his attention to Meggy. 

“You know it.” She smirks before beginning her explanation. “It was a rare virus called L.O.V.E. It infects any victim that touches it with any part of their head and makes them have feelings for the first person they see. Usually, it lives in kitchen appliances, which kinda makes it obvious where he got it.” She slightly snorts at this as Three sighs. “The virus makes the person able to change their appearance for the person that they’ve fallen for, making themselves appear more attractive. And, if everything you explained to me earlier was true, he did that to both of you.” She explains. 

“So, since he fell for both of us, he saw both of us at the same time.” Three concludes, beginning to make sense of it. “But why did he try to infect us with it?” 

“That’s the purpose of the virus. It needs to spread, and I assume he also wanted to infect you so you’d have a better chance of staying with him.” 

“You cured the idiot, right?” SMG3 looks at Meggy, who shrugs. 

“I ripped the virus out of his neck like I did to SMG4. Even though Four’s doing fine, Mario’s still a bit... crazy. I have him locked up in the castle’s storage closet, though.” 

“Do you not know how to fix him?” Four asks her. 

“Oh, I do. I just wanted to check on you and tell you about the virus.” She says, placing the food on the nightstand and draping the blanket over the still sleepy Four.  

“Well, how?” Three calls out as she goes to open the elevator. 

“Um, let’s just say that it involves a lot of vinegar and pepper spray.” She grins as she steps into the lift, waving at the boys before leaving them in the same awkward position they were left in. 

Another awkward moment of silence passes between them, the only sound being the whirring of the air conditioner, before Three decides to talk. 

“Did you want some blueberry pancakes?”  

Oh, what a beautiful coincidence. As much as Four would just love to muffle his thoughts and feelings by stuffing his favorite food in his mouth, the pancakes also reminded him of his dream. He knows how good it feels to be loved by Three, even if he’s only experienced it in his mind. All it took was a conversation to figure out if his deepest desires would ever be real, or if he was destined to be more than just frenemies with the man sitting beside him. 

“Three. I-” He is cut off by a finger to his lips. 

“Can it, scrub. Just... put your lips to good use before I change my mind.” 

Four sits there in a shocked pause before smiling at Three, praying to everything that he was reading these signs correctly. 

Then, they simultaneously dive for each other, grabbing each other’s faces and connecting their lips. This is the first time that they’ve kissed outside of a dream, and the feeling was intoxicating. Three wraps his legs around Four’s torso, groaning as Four puts his hands in his hair. The two deepen their kiss, Four wrapping his hands on Three’s hips and trying to pull him even closer. He bites Three’s lip, causing him to let out a pleasurable moan that makes Four do the same in response. Eventually, they need to breathe, however, and they slowly pull apart. A string of saliva still connects them as they stay in the same position, panting heavily and never wanting to leave each other’s embrace.  

Suddenly, a pink light shines throughout the room and envelopes them. A robotic voice speaks out and says: 

L.O.V.E. Broken. 

The sound spooked the shit out of them both, but they shared a bout of warm laughter when they realized that Meggy must’ve found a good use for that pepper spray and cured Mario. Seconds after that, there is a loud thud from upstairs and steps boom down the stairs like there was no tomorrow.  

“Es Em Gee Four! Es Em Gee Three!” Mario screams, engulfing his two friends into the tightest hug he could muster. Meggy also follows behind him, basically launching herself into their cuddle as well. They laugh happily and return the group hug, the four of them enjoying this moment. “Mario can’t believe all it took was him getting a virus to-a get you gays to confess.” He giggles. “And he’s sorry for making out with you two and trying to seduce you.” 

“You know? It’s all good, bud.” Four says, patting his friend’s back. 

“I bet that the freaky microwave virus just knew that you had no bitches, and it wanted to help you.” Three smirks as Four and Meggy laugh at him. 

“Hey!” Mario says. “At least Mario can pull the-a spaghetti!” 

“At least I have someone sentient.” Four smiles before swiftly giving Three a kiss on the cheek, making Meggy “aww” and Mario dry heave. “And sexy~” He adds, making Three’s face go fully beet red. 

“Who needs PDA when you can have a sexy night with noodles?” Mario swoons, pulling spaghetti out of his back pocket as everyone groans. 

Yep, it was certainly back to normal… and for the first time in quite a while, it felt peaceful in the Showgrounds.

~~~

9115 Words

Chapter 9: Switching it Up 😂🗑️ {None... I Suppose?}

Summary:

TW: Swearing, and a shit ton of cringe

SMG3 is tired of just doing silly gameplay for his livestreams, so he decides to do something a bit more... interesting.

This oneshot takes place in the canon timeline.

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

"Hey chat! Today we will be going onto the website Ao3 and reading the SMG4 topic's least popular fanfic ever." Three says, placing Eggdog on his puppy bed as his nightly livestream begins.

He wanted to switch it up today by doing something different than just gaming. He could tell that his fans were a little burned out from Club Penguin and Shrek Online, so reading a fanfic would be... interesting. Sure, the only unpopular fanfics were the freaky ones that had illegal ships, but his fans would be able to handle it. After all, he had to put up with all the suggestive shit that the chat says about him, his friends, even Eggdog. They ask things like, "Oh, when's Eggdog going to get a girlfriend?", and it just makes the puppy a bit uncomfortable. That's why, the second that Three turns his back, Eggdog bolts out of the room.

The comments begin pouring in from his live chat, mere seconds after he starts his stream. How the hell these people type so fast, he may never know. He braces himself, taking in one more breath as he opens it up.

HAJALKQSBKA: ooh, what ship is it?!

Literal Macaroni Noodle: what's a snow trapped?

Poopoo: um, well, you see...

696969: ...@Literal Macaroni Noodle leave while your innocence is still there

A M E R I C A: 3 and his friend had say gex in an igloo hehhehahaha

Elinor29: aah I didn't need to know that asshole!!!!!!!!

Literal Macaroni Noodle: wtf aiasshjajajjajn

Literal Macaroni Noodle left the chat

"Whoa, whoa. You really think I'd risk getting cancelled for reading porn on the internet?" He laughs incredulously as if the idea of him doing such a thing was far from the truth. Good thing he'd wiped everyone's memories of the browser history... incident. "Ahem." He clears his throat, blushing ever so slightly and pushing that day out of his head. "The ship is called Bobkins. The story is called: 'I fucking love my fishee.'

Hal the little guy: nooooo kill me now

Meatball: how is this legal

Uuuuuuu: EXCUSE ME WHAT THE HELL IS A BOBKINS? CUZ LIKE IDK BOUT U BUT THAT SOUNDS SUS

ManLover$$1: I think it's the ship between Bob and Boopkins bru

Peepeepoopoocheck: oooooooooooooo...

BubbleGumonurwalls: I wrote a fucking Bobkins book is it mine?

Scratchin_Mah_Asshole: Why the hell are you reading this bro I'm crying

"I have no clue who wrote this. The author is anonymous." Three says, reading over the tags and seeing if there's anything that he wouldn't legally be allowed to say.

BubbleGumonurwalls: thank fuck

I'm the ALPHA: let's go

Hiimdave: y e s

BEST: bro I'm scared

Depressed-Dude: y'all I have a feeling our minds boutta be blown

O shit: WhaaaaaaaaaaAaaAaaAAAaaAAAa what???

I've shitted my pants: I think I just did my username guys...

Bobross: 🙁🙁🙁

"Guys calm down. Maybe there's an explanation in the book?" He says as the chat goes silent. Which is only like 150 words? He shakes his head, remembering that this was supposedly the worst SMG4 fanfiction ever made. "Let's begin." He begins to read.

"Good morning my skibidi alpha rizzler!!" Boopkins yells, giving his body pillow a huge kiss.

The dweeb was getting ready to fuck the pillow like the illegal thing he was when Bob walks in.

"HoLy ShIt?! U aRe ChEaTiNg On mE wItH tHe PiLlow?" He sobs, falling to the ground in defeat.

"No Bobu-Desu. I wuv you!" He says, kissing the goofy ahh thing on the lips. (Question of the year: Does Bob have lips? Answer: YES.)

Bobby Flay kisses his fish in sandals back with passion, completely forgetting about the body pillow. But the body pillow was of...

Gasp!!!

SMG4? Holy shit holy shit. Boopkins was boutta fuck a pillow of his discord kitten.

Four walks in with Three and begins to make out with him. He did this because Smg34 is canon, and no one can tell me otherwise. They begin to do illegal things (oops 3 is probably pregnant now) and Boopkins notices his wife Four.

Boopkins rips them apart and kisses Four on the lips. Four kisses back, gets pregnant, and a new relationship is born.

As for Bob and Three, they went into a threesome with Mr. Puzzles (and that other weapon guy I forgot his name lol) and beat the shit out of the crew in WOTFI. Yayyyyy!!

Three stares at the screen with a surprised look on his face, reopening the chat. There were many reactions that happened in real time, while he was reading this aloud to all his fans, but he skipped to the large notification at the bottom.

David23459: discord kitten XD

I am D O U G: 3 you are paying for my therapy

12000 people left the chat

"Goddamnit! I had to live through that shit, and no one even stayed?" He checks his live viewer count and there is only one person left.

Three stares at the message before looking directly into the camera. Why did he sign up for the shitty life of a livestreamer?

"Stay right where you are, Mario." He says, his face in a dark expression.

With that, the livestream ended, the fat Italian was noncanonically murdered, and Three totally wasn't up the whole night thinking about how much therapy and eye bleach he was going to need the next day.

~~~

896 Words

Notes:

I think my brain has finally been damaged beyond repair

Chapter 10: Guilt, Sorrow, and Wine ☁️💔🥝 {SMG34, Megari}

Summary:

TW: Drinking, Making Out, Swearing, Suggestive Scenes, Trauma

After returning home from the Internet Graveyard, SMG3 is surprised to see a party being hosted at the castle. And even more surprised when SMG4, the host, is nowhere in sight.

This oneshot takes place in March of 2025, before the Karen arc.

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

“He loves me, he loves me not, he loves me, he loves me not… Goddamnit, you fucking sunflower!” A familiar man in purple screams, throwing the remaining part of the plant to the ground and crushing it under his boot. 

SMG3 hated springtime. He didn’t just dislike the season; he wished that it never came back around. Every. Single. Damn. Year. Nothing ever happened to SMG3 and his friends in the spring except for shit.  

These last few years, the spring has been exceptionally terrible. In 2023, Four went crazy over a video. That was rough on Three in particular, considering that he opened his heart like never before to save his “rival”. Last year, Mr. Puzzles tormented them, forcing them to be brainwashed actors in his twisted shows, which was equally as frightening. He even came back and almost defeated them twice more. This year, nothing has happened yet, but he wouldn’t put it past the universe to send shitty things towards some, if not all, of the SMG4 crew. 

And now, he had a new reason to hate the season. Flowers were blooming everywhere, and he was yet to find one with an odd number of petals. If he found one like that, according to every romance movie ever created, then his crush would finally open his big, stupid, beautiful blue eyes and like him back. 

SMG3 wished that SMG4 knew just how much he loved him. 

Three huffs in annoyance before turning his gaze away from the ground, looking up at the darkening sky, and deciding that it was probably time to go home. There was no need to stay in the Internet Graveyard any longer than necessary, especially because this specific place deflates his mood... Though, he needed to visit this place, for his own sake even if not for the one whose loss he was mourning.  

He picks another flower out of the grassy meadow and places it on his best friend Terrence’s gravestone. Terrence died in April 2022 to save the universe from the maniacal SMGØ, and ever since, Three’s been visiting monthly. Or whenever he just needed someone to vent to, someone to talk to, etcetera. He first opened himself up regarding his feelings for Four at this gravesite two years ago. 

Ugh, he was so done with this day, with this season. Thank Memes it was Tipsy Tuesday. He needed a drink tonight.  

To cope with the shit that has happened over the last few years, he has begun drinking one glass of wine every Tuesday. Not enough to get him drunk or hungover in the morning, but enough to get him less stressed. That was one amazing thing about alcohol, it made you feel like all your worries just melted away. 

He opens a portal with his phone, the red light swirling and the living dimension peeking through it. Times like these made him sort of miss the Internet Graveyard, the small, secluded place with the killer memes. He would have hated this dimension for sure if he hadn’t been made the Lord of the Internet Graveyard, a title that has long since been revoked. The memes still respected him as a member of society, but he wasn’t kingly to them anymore. He hadn’t been since Terrence passed away. He’d been too upset to carry on, passing the title back to the Ancient Memes and teaching them how to care for the dead memes correctly. He couldn’t bear to see a Ugandan Knuckles without thinking of Terrence, much less take care of thousands.  

Deciding to not dwell on the past any longer, he steps through to the Showgrounds. He is instantly greeted with a thudding ground and muffled music coming from inside of the large castle. The blue building towered over him like a huge circus tent, making him chuckle almost every time he saw it. The creativity of the castle and, especially the face on it, represented Four’s personality in a fun way. The place was warm, welcoming and friendly, while still playful and cute. 

He was still confused as to why there was loud music in there, though. Was there some holiday that he didn’t know about? Possibly a birthday or a surprise party? He might as well walk in and find out before heading back to his café. He really had nothing better to do, and the night was still young enough. 

SMG3 swings the doors open, being nearly blinded with rainbow-colored spotlights and a huge disco ball in the middle of the room. Okay, this was a party. Now, he was confused as to why he wasn’t invited. Did he do something wrong and make the crew hate him again? Just as he begins to stress out, he feels a hand on his shoulder. 

“Hey, Three!” Meggy giggles, trying to gain her balance. 

She was wearing a short yellow dress with flowers lining the bottom. She had a pair of matching platforms that she was clearly having trouble wearing. She also looked slightly tipsy, which made Three wonder if there were drinks at this party. Speaking of alcohol, SMG3 was about ninety-nine percent sure that Meggy was not the legal drinking age yet. 

Huh. He promptly decided that it wasn’t his problem and began a conversation with the stumbling woman. 

“Hey, squid. Did I miss something important? Why is everyone suddenly partying their asses off?” He asks curiously. 

“Oh. We don’t really know. It’s kind of just one of those ‘just because’ parties, you know? Or... maybe SMG4 said something. He called it... something. Can’t remember.”  

“Uh huh.” Three says, raising an eyebrow. “Who was invited to this ‘just because’ party, Meggy?” 

“Ask Four, I don’t know, man…” She begins slurring her words together, taking another sip of what Three assumes is her alcohol. 

“Okay then. You know where I can find him?” He asks her.  

“I don’t know man, you’ve seriously got to ask someone else-” She is stopped by Tari, in a lilac dress to match her eyes, twirling her around and kissing her on the lips. 

Meggy is surprised at first, but ends up melting into it, dropping her half-drunk red solo cup of wine on the floor.  

Three’s eyes widen in surprise before he sighs, realizing that he obviously isn’t going to get anything more out of this conversation. Why are drunk people so weird? He wonders before walking away and quietly chuckling to himself. Three was sure that that the two girls weren’t dating before this, so they’re going to have some explaining to do in the morning. He chuckles and decides that worrying about a tipsy Meggy and a probably drunk Tari was not the best idea. He sets off to find Four instead. Those girls can have a massive hangover later if they want to, he didn’t really care. 

He walks along the outside of the dance floor, keeping his eyes peeled for the man in blue. He sees Mario, Luigi, Bob, Boopkins, Saiko, hell! Even Melony was here, and she wasn’t dozing off! He caught glimpses of the Anti-Cast and some other supporting characters. Those included Bowser, Waluigi, Wario, and the other two SMGs. 

“Hey, SMG1, SMG2. Have you guys seen Four?” He asks, walking up to them. 

Two was twerking on a table and One was rolling his eyes at her. One waves at Three with a smile and Two energetically waves back. 

“Sorry about Two. She’s had a bit too much to drink.” He chuckles, motioning to his silly-acting best friend. 

“Excuse you!” She scoffs, putting her hands on her hips. “I’ve only had five glasses, you asshole!” 

“I’ve had none. My alcohol tolerance isn’t the best, and I don’t think hers is either.” He quietly snickers, his eyes darting towards Two and then back to Three. “But no, I haven’t seen SMG4 since the party started.” 

“Is SMG4 lost?” Two asks, sitting on One’s lap comfortably. SMG1 rolls his eyes again, but he doesn’t push her off. 

“I just can’t find him. I wanted to ask him something.” Three explains. 

“Well, party hosts can sometimes get overwhelmed? And knowing SMG4, he might be in one of the quieter rooms bordering this one.” One points to Four’s door, causing SMG3's expression to brighten. 

“Shit, of course! His room! Thanks, guys!” Three says, dashing away. 

He squirms his way through the crowd, almost getting knocked over by someone he barely even recognized.  Why the hell was the entire town invited to this party?! 

He barges into his friend’s room, slamming the door shut behind him. His counterpart jumps at the sound, turning his head to face him. He must’ve thought Three was a stranger or something, because he turned around with anger in his deep blue eyes and began screaming. 

You little fuckface, my door is shut for a reason- oh shit!” He throws Three to the wall before gasping and taking his hands off his friend. “I’m sorry! I thought you were a random person.” 

“Why would someone random waste their time coming into your room? Hate to break it to you, but you don’t get that many bitches.” This was usual, SMG3 cracking jokes, but today Four didn’t find them funny.  

Instead, he just looked at him with a completely unreadable expression. Three could tell that something was off with his friend, but he couldn’t quite put his finger on it. Was SMG1 right? Was the party a little too much for him or something? 

“Ha, ha. You’re so funny.” Four scoffs, getting into his bed and sitting down as he shuts off his computer. 

“You throw a huge party and then just sit here like a baby?” Three remarks, walking over to his friend and shoving him jokingly. 

Stop. Please just leave.” Four glares daggers into Three, making him jump back a little bit in shock. 

“No. Not until you tell me what’s going on. I know you better than you think I do.” Three says, crossing his arms stubbornly. 

“Why is it my job to tell you everything? Just go out and get drunk like all the other assholes out there.” 

“So, I can just forget about whatever the hell’s up with you? No. I...” He pauses for a moment. Look. I care about you, idiot.” He sits down on the bed, much to Four’s dismay. 

Why do you care about me?” Four asks suddenly. 

Why would you ask suck a stupid question?” Three slightly mocks him. “Literally everyone likes you.” 

No, they don’t.” He screams before turning around and yelling a string of unhappy curses into his pillow.  

“A bunch of strangers just came to your party. Randomly. People care about you.” Three asks, his tone slightly softening, but Four refuses to elaborate on his answer. “F-fine. Be that way, baka.” He scoffs, turning to face away from him. 

Four has a guilty look on his face, glancing over slightly at the stubborn Meme Guardian. Why was he such a burden to his friends? He should just leave. He should just get up, leave right now, and never show his face again. His castle can be called “The Mario Castle”, or something named after a person more worthy than him. Four didn’t deserve that kind of honor anymore. 

As the negative thoughts begin to creep into his mind, Four feels a singular tear run down his face. He slumps down, feeling a familiar wave of sadness fall upon him. He wasn’t worthy of anything. He felt like complete shit. And the fact that he wasn’t even telling his friend what was wrong with him? Why he threw this party? He thought that he was done isolating himself after... 

Just the thought of the It’s Gotta be Perfect incident was enough to make him break down, crying into his bedsheets as Three looks back down at him concernedly. 

“Hey, SMG4.” He says, touching the man’s shoulder. Four’s only response was broken sobs as he kept his head in the pillow. He couldn’t face Three like that. “Do you want to talk to me? You seem like you’re going through a lot.” Four looks up at him, looking a little bit confused as he sees the same sadness in Three’s eyes.  

“I almost killed you.” He stated.  

“You’ve done that on multiple accounts; we were rivals not too long ago-” 

“No. I’m talking about two years ago when I went crazy. I almost lost you because of a video, for Memes’ sake.” 

“Two years? Oh shit. That’s why you’re so upset. It’s March 18th.” Three says sympathetically. 

“I woke up this morning and I cried. The only way I could think to cope was to talk to you, because you really understand me. But you were busy in the Internet Graveyard, or so said the sign on your café. I was getting weird looks from a few of my friends when they saw that I was so down, so I just decided to throw this party. That way, I could stay in my room, and they could have something to distract themselves with.” 

“Oh, dude.” Three says softly, his heart almost breaking at the sight of the other man’s darkened eyes. “I wish I could have been here.”  

“Well, where were you?” Four asks, suddenly curious. 

Three raises an eyebrow at his friend. He was in the Internet Graveyard that much Four knew, but he didn’t feel comfortable talking about it in any further detail.  

“You can’t get that far up in my business.” 

 “Please just tell me?” Four asks, groaning in frustration when Three refuses again. “Why do you have to be so emo all the time?” 

“Me?! Emo! I was visiting Terrence’s grave. His fucking grave, Four. That’s not something I like to just openly talk about with everyone! So yeah, it’s the two-year anniversary of the time you nearly killed us all. But everyone made it out. Fine, Peach became a monster, but at least she didn’t die! It’s been almost three years since my best friend died, and you don’t give a shit! You’re just caught up in your own world, like always. Yes, it was a traumatic experience, but no one died. I lost Terrence.” He cries out, his face turning red with anger.  

“Three, I’m sorry, I-” 

“I’m out, man.” He scoffs. “Maybe you should’ve thrown me into the pit. At least I would be with Terrence, and I wouldn’t have to mourn him.”  

“You don’t mean that! Three, come back!”  

“You tried to push me away before, so fine. The great SMG4 got his wish, I’m going.” Three scoffs, continuing to march away as he swings the door open. 

“SMG3, please.” Four desperately begs. “Stay with me.” 

Three stops, but why should he? There was no point. He turns to run out, but Four grabs his hand and stops him from going any farther. “Three. I’m so sorry, I had no idea that you were going through that on your own.” 

“You shouldn’t have kept all of your shit to yourself either, you hypocrite.” SMG3 harrumphs. 

“But we both have things to build on. If I ever question anything about Terrence again, I swear you can slap my face as hard as you can.” Four smiles, before getting brutally whacked in the face. Three smirks, slightly glancing at Four to ensure that he was all right. When the meme man gets up, he snickers. “Okay. I guess I may have deserved that. But I will let you know that it’s been hard for me to move on from It’s Gotta be Perfect.” He frowns. 

“Yeah, I’m sorry.” Three mumbles an apology. 

“I’m sorry for pestering you. When I’m emotional, I’m just not myself.” Four admits as Three sits back down on the bed, the two sitting there in a comforting silence that soon becomes awkward. 

“So.” Four says, twiddling his thumbs. 

“Hmm.” Three pauses, remembering that he still had wine to drink tonight. “Want some alcohol?” He suggests. 

“Sure! That sounds great at a time like this.” Four agrees as Three temporarily leaves the room to retrieve some wine from the kitchen. 

SMG4 was lucky to have a friend like SMG3. He could be a bit sarcastic, emotional, and angry at times, but he really was nice. Sometimes he may overreact to little things, but he makes up for it with his huge heart. If there was anyone Four wouldn’t mind getting tipsy with, it would be Three. 

That’s funny to think that they were rivals five years ago. Three was trying to take over his channel and annihilate him. Now, they were sitting on a bed, and they were about to start drinking together like old buddies. Don’t you just love character development? Then, he is snapped out of his thoughts as Three returns, a large bottle of vintage wine in his hand. 

“This is from, like, 2010.” He grins, passing one to Four. “And it might be expired.” 

“You know, my friend said a wine he tried recently was bitter and not properly fermented, but it sounds like sour grapes to me.” Four cracks his first utterly terrible joke of the night, a telltale sign that his mood had improved. 

“There’s the SMG4 we know and love. Where was he this whole time?” Three smirks before handing the bottle to his friend so he can take the first sip. 

“Bottoms up!” Four takes a small drink, eyes widening when he realizes that it was indeed delicious. “Wow!” He says, eyebrows still raised as he begins to chug it. 

“SMG4! What the hell!” Three takes the bottle away from Four after a few seconds of the man’s quick drinking had drained nearly a quarter of the bottle. 

“Eek! My throat burns!” Four shrieks, grabbing it as Three snickers. 

“You just downed a ton of wine, what did you expect?” He rhetorically asks. 

Three takes a sip and raises an eyebrow at the taste. It wasn’t horrible, it would get the job done, but he didn’t understand why Four loved it so much. It was just your everyday, standard wine in a bit larger of a bottle than usual. He takes a few more drinks before passing it back to Four. After he chugs more of it, he stares up at the ceiling before realizing something interesting. 

“I can already feel the buzz. Three, what did you do?” He asks in an odd tone.  

The alcohol is already getting to him? Three wasn’t surprised. Four seemed like one of those people who had a tiny alcohol tolerance, like One said about himself earlier. 

“Bro, you did this to yourself.” Three laughs, taking another swig. 

“Maybe I did. Can I have more?” He asks Three, who shakes his head and continues to drink more of the wine. 

“No! We don’t need you getting drunk out of your mind, and I’ve barely had any.” 

“Too bad.” He says, grabbing it and downing even more until the bottle was over halfway done. He was relentless, just chugging the alcohol while Three stared, unsure if he should stop him or not. “Mm, this is so yummy, I’m seeing stars!” 

Three was beginning to see why it may have been a bad idea to give him nearly half a bottle of wine over the course of almost less than a minute.  But, oh well. There’s no way he could get too bad. 

 

Ten Minutes Later 

 

“Hey, Three.” Four mumbles, staring at the ceiling about five minutes later. 

“Four, are you good?” He asks, taking another drink, finishing the bottle, and eyeing his friend suspiciously. 

“Yeah man. Did anyone ever tell you that you’re, like, hot?” 

Three’s face turns pink. Hot? Okay, he wasn’t expecting that sentence to ever come out of Four’s mouth. 

“Okay, man. Maybe we, uh, take it easy.” He sighs. 

“I want you to talk dirty to me, not like that. I want to feel your lips on mine and your tongue in my throat~ you know what I’m saying?” Four snuggles up close to Three, who’s face is now burning a deep red. 

As much as Three wanted to just submit to his crush, as he wasn’t completely immune to the alcohol’s effects either, he decided to stay strong and resist all this. Slowly, Four began to act even stranger. He slung his arms around Three’s neck, burying his face in Three’s hair and twirling his gloved fingers in it as well. 

“Dude, stop.” Three pushes him off, sternly looking at him. 

“Are you okay~?” Four asks, pulling Three close enough so that their noses touch. 

“Yes, I’m fine. It’s just… I know you don’t usually act like this.” 

“So? Maybe you’ve been waiting for me to act like this secretly in the back of your mind forever.” That much was true, but it was too embarrassing for Three to admit. He loved Four more than he would ever say out loud. But before he could respond with anything, SMG4 began to smile and get excited. “I’m ready to party! Can we go dance?” He suddenly asks. 

“No, you scrub.” He laughs. “Besides, you’re too drunk. It’s bad enough that I need to watch you, because even now, if I take my eyes off you for a second, you’ll probably end up doing something you regret.” 

“Like kiss you?” Four smirks at Three, making him blush ever so slightly about both his comment and their closeness. “You know, I’m not completely gone. I’ll make sure to remember if I kiss someone, especially if that person happens to be the sexiest person in the entire Showgrounds.” 

“Bullshit.” Three scoffs, almost laughing.  

He didn’t even know if he would remember all this in the morning. It may look like the great SMG3 has a good alcohol tolerance, but he drank about half of a big-ass bottle in only a few minutes. With how quickly he drank that strong wine (He checked the alcohol percentage, which was at a shocking 21), he was bound to get intoxicated sooner or later. In fact, now that he had begun to think about it, he was feeling a strong wave of intoxication wash over him now. 

Four had even more to drink than him, and there’s no way he would remember if Three were to confess his feelings. And if he did, Three could just put it off as some kind of hallucination or something. With his mind made up, he quietly smiles to himself. Three would just give Four a few more moments for the wine to completely settle, then he could spill his heart out without the latter retaining any of it. 

“Okay, SMG4.” He declares after a long silence. “I love you. I’ve loved you since Meme School.” He blatantly declares his love, not wanting to be too sappy as he feels the effects of the wine even more now. 

"So, you don’t care if I French kiss you~…” Four says. 

“You damn lover boy. Just make out with me and put your mouth to good use.” He begins to feel more relaxed as he leans in close to Four, twirling his fingers in his hair after pushing the man’s hat off his head. 

“What happened to Super Tsundere Baka Desu Desu, hmm?” He smirks playfully, leaning into Three’s touch as well. 

“Shut up, baka.” Three blushes, before deciding to just fuck it, as he doesn’t think he can wait a second longer to feel Four’s mouth on his own. 

But before he could close the gap between their lips, Four reads his mind and kisses him harshly, pushing him against the headboard of the bed they were sitting on. Three let out a loud moan, his body arching into his fellow Meme Guardian as he kisses him back almost desperately. Four ends up taking complete control of the kiss, his hands roaming over the other man’s body. He traced his fingers over his friend’s hip, his waist, and his back, desperate to touch every inch of the man who he couldn’t seem to get enough of. 

Three felt like his mind was spinning out of control as Four licks his bottom lip, almost demanding an entrance. He was almost too eager to comply, opening his mouth and letting the man in blue completely break down his walls as they kissed with a ferocious animosity that couldn’t be put into words. Three’s own hands began to roam, needy and wanting to savor the touch of every inch of Four’s skin. Then, the Youtuber’s fingers dug into the skin of Three’s back as he unclips a button on his overalls with the other hand. 

The man in purple lets out a breathy gasp at the touch, desperate for more. Four smirks into the kiss, then pulls away only for a moment to begin kissing down Three’s jawline affectionately. This sends a shiver through both men, as well as the increase of both the needy grasps at each other and the volume of their breathing and gasping. As Four’s kisses to Three’s neck become harsher, he moves down to his collarbone and begins to leave love bites there as well. Wanting to get access to more of Three’s skin, he unclips both of his overall straps and allows them to pool down at his ankles before pulling down Three’s collar and biting at his shoulders. 

“SMG4...” He lets out another low moan, pleading for more of Four’s addicting touch. “Please~” 

“Don’t worry, babe. Did you really think we were done yet? Because I’m just getting started with all the things I want to do to you.” 

 

~~~ 

 

Meggy and Tari stand on the outskirts of the main room, flirtatiously exchanging cheesy pickup lines and laughing with each other. Many of the guests had departed in the past thirty minutes, leaving only the girls and a few other people from their friend group. They had just waved their goodbyes to SMG1 and 2, and the small yellow woman seemed to be drunk out of her mind, clinging to her best friend like she was seeing stars. Meggy wasn’t that intoxicated, but Tari was on her fourth plastic cup of spiked fruit punch. The orange-haired girl didn’t expect her crush to remember much the next day, but she still had a bit of hope that she would. They’d shared a pretty heated kiss in the middle of the dance floor, and she wished that her and Tari could always be lovey-dovey towards each other. 

The gamer girl smiles, her eyes unfocused, but the kindness and slight desire still lingered in the gaze she gave the shorter woman. Meggy puts her hand around Tari’s waist as they continue to quietly chat, lost in the comfort of each other as they lean against the wall behind them. Yeah, Tari probably won’t remember this, but the moment was nice, and Meggy didn’t want it to ever end. 

Then, a noise from the other room snaps her out of her thoughts. Meggy looks around to see what room it was coming from, and she raised an eyebrow when she realized that it was none other than SMG4’s own bedroom. She assumed that he had gone to sleep long ago, but it looks like she was incorrect. She presses her ear to the door, curious about just exactly what she had heard. When a muffled voice speaks from behind the locked door, she strains her ears to catch the conversation. 

“SMG4, please...” An Australian-accented male moans, the sound muffled but still desperate and needy. 

“Oh, Three, you look so hot like this...” Four’s voice growls possessively in return as they both begin to moan even louder and in sync with each other. 

A heavy blush dusts Meggy’s face, the realization of what she’s just heard hitting her like a train. She quickly turns back to Tari, who is looking at her with a drunken smile and a wobbly posture. She decides it was time to leave this party, even taking it upon herself to usher most of the other guests outside the castle and saying that it was getting late. She understands the meaning of privacy, and those two desperately needed some. 

“What were they doing -hic- in there?” Tari says, slurring her words together as Meggy leads her outside before tiptoeing back in.  

“It’s not important… but remember to check your socials tomorrow.” Meggy quickly opens SMG4’s door, taking a picture of the two men under the covers, heads barely sticking out, with their clothes thrown across the floor and an empty bottle of wine right next to the doorway. 

Four and Three may have been too drunk to remember what happened in the morning, but it’s times like this when Meggy was glad she didn’t drink too much, and glad she had her phone on her. After posting the picture all over the internet, she was insanely popular, and the news was reposted and spread fast. 

You can’t even begin to imagine how Four reacted when he saw the picture a few days later, especially when he had forgotten all about that night and the intimate moment he shared with Three. The other man saw it a few days later, but he was almost proud of himself. Even if they were both drunk, he finally had the balls to confess, and his feelings were reciprocated. 

Maybe springtime really does suck, and the pain that it will always cause the crew is inevitable, but SMG3 wouldn’t trade moments like that for anything.

~~~

4912 Words

Notes:

AN: I'm going to go disappear now to finish a request I got at the beginning of the month... see you in ten years...

Chapter 11: Morning Voice 🗑️☁️ {SMG34}

Summary:

TW: Swearing

What if SMG4 and SMG3 are Forced to Hold Hands was staged, and Mario was late to place the gum between their hands?

This oneshot takes place right before that episode.

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Beep Beep Beep - Camera On.

"Ugh." SMG3 rolls over and opens his eyes slowly.

It was morning time in the Showgrounds, the run-down carnival where his idiot friend SMG4 decided to call home.

Hold on, why the fuck was he in the Showgrounds? He distinctly remembered his stream last night, then his tea party with Eggdog, and definitely hitting the hay in his own home. Yet, somehow, here he was in his ugly ass rival's room. And in his bed, nonetheless.

Wait a minute, he was in Four's bed?!

He screams, tumbling off of the pull-out couch's mattress and onto the floor. He looks up at a shadow that was closing in on him and lets out a big "oof" when the meme man falls on top of him. Somehow, Four was sleeping through all of this, and he is just now beginning to stir as he lays on top of Three.

"Mmm... SMG3? What are you doing?" He asks in a low voice.

Three bites his lip as he looks at his Meme Guardian partner still above him. He'd be lying if he said he wasn't mesmerized by the view that he was given...and if he said that Four's morning voice wasn't hot.

"You're on top of me, idiot." He scoffs, looking away.

"And why should we get up? I'm tired." Four says, yawning as he picks Three up and places him back on the bed. "Just stay with me."

He cuddles up to the other man as Three freezes in horror. Four's grip was strong, though, and he wasn't planning on letting go. Four places his head on Three's chest and snuggles into the other man. Three lets out a sigh of defeat and slightly leans back into his friend, knowing he wouldn't be able to change his mind.

"You do realize we have a video to film today, you moron?" Three asks as Four ruffles his hair affectionately.

"Ugh, we have to wait until Mario puts the gum in between our hands. That's why I brought you here last night, remember?" He speaks, still in that hot voice.

Three's eyes widen as the memories come flooding back from about 1 AM.

~~~

"What the hell is your problem, gay lord? Just get in the damn bed." Four sighs.

"Why can't we just film a different video?" Three rebuts.

"We've talked about this. If we give the people who ship us some food, they might finally stop asking for us to become canon."

"Those people are rabid animals. The more food they get, the more they come back." Three scoffs. "Besides, being shipped with your ugly ass is punishment enough."

"Shut up." Four whines angrily.

"Oh what, are you going to make me shut up? Let's see it then."

Four wasn't willing to back down so easily, so he gives Three a peck on the cheek.

This stuns him long enough to be thrown on the bed and get hit with sleeping powder, which Four was saving for this exact reason. With any luck, Three wouldn't be as pissed off when he wakes up if he has a nice sleep.

"Damn, should have gotten that on video. The shippers would be going crazy." Four giggles, joining the latter on the bed.

~~~

"Uh..." Three is at a loss for words as he remembers last night's events before he stands up defiantly, turning away from Four with an angry expression. "You forced me to sleep, weirdo?"

"Aww, come on, baka boy. You know you love sharing a bed with me, and I have to film this video." Four grins, the sleepiness leaving his voice.

"Only if you let me give you some payback." He says, stepping close to Four.

"Payback? What do you mean-" Three gives Four a small kiss on his cheek.

The kiss was quickly followed up by a slap to SMG4's face. SMG3 chuckles heartily as Four just sits there looking butthurt. Why did Three have to be so mean, yet so intriguing at the same time?

"You know, if I were to give you payback for that, I'd totally make out with you." Four says in a teasing manner. "Only on camera for the shippers, though." He laughs, not realizing that one of his cameras was indeed on.

"You fruity little-" Three sighs in annoyance as he flops on the bed. "There. Happy?"

Four nods slightly as he relaxes into the bed next to Three. He yawns again, his head sinking into his pillow. What was taking Mario so long? The fat Italian was supposed to be there at 6 AM. Neither of them would be surprised if he slept in, or if he just forgot.

Four turns back to Three, who is scrolling on his phone, and surprises him with a hug from behind. He rests his chin on the other's shoulder and looks at the TikTok videos with his friend.

"If I ever decided to kiss you, what would I have to do to keep you from murdering me?" He says, his sleepy sounding voice returning.

He was obviously oblivious to what that voice was doing to Three, whose cheeks began to flush. Oh, how Three wanted him to talk like that all the time.

"You'd have to kill me and kiss my dead lips." Three says, keeping up his tsundere personality as usual.

"Would you ever just, I don't know, let me?" Four asks curiously.

"Never." Three laughs as if it was a joke.

"There's not one thing I could do? One thing that would make you love me?" He pauses. "For the views?" He whispers the last bit in a low voice, sending shivers down Three's spine.

"I might." He grins mischievously, wondering what the hell he was even doing. "But only if you keep talking in that beautiful low voice of yours. It's really hot." Three demands, not thinking before the words left his mouth.

"Oh. You mean like this?" Four says seductively, pulling Three closer.

Instead of calling him a baka like he usually would, Three sighs in pleasure as his eyes trail down to the other's lips. Four, reading his mind, dives for them and begins to kiss him passionately. Before the kiss deepens and Three's eyes can flutter shut, he sees something out of the corner of his eye- a flashing red light coming from Four's desk.

He pulls away from Four and the other groans in annoyance.

"What is it now? Why won't you let me finish?" He purrs, holding Three's head in place possessively.

"I have one more condition."

"And what's that, babes~?" Four says, his lips centimeters away from Three's.

"Turn off the goddamn camera and delete the footage."

"Damn it!" Four jumps off of the bed and dashes for the camera, his hand going over it quickly as the video goes black.

"Now, where were we..." Three's voice calls out as the webcam shuts down.

Beep Beep Beep - Camera Off

~~~

1159 Words

 

Notes:

My little sister helped me write this one based on a dream she had. That's why it's so shitty/j

Chapter 12: Author's Note

Chapter Text

Hi, guys!

Just wanted to say... THANK YOU SO MUCH for over 1K reads both here and on Wattpad. 

Like wow, that's such an insane achievement in a month and a half! The support is helping me continue writing these little stories, knowing people enjoy them.

Also, my next oneshot is almost done. 

It's a request I got at the beginning of June, and I'm motivated to finally finish it! Bear with me, it's been taking such a long time... but it's because I've made the story really long.

And when I say really long, I mean that I only planned to make it around 4000 words and now it's at about 11000... and it hasn't been edited. (I'm totally not crying/j)

I'm not putting a date on it, because I'm still working on Rivals' Redemption, but I will say this.

My longest oneshot yet, Do It Yourself (Requested by Wolfmage553) will be coming out in the next few days, so stay tuned! 

See you later! 

-Lyssa 💙💜

 

Chapter 13: Do It Yourself ☯️ 💔🌺 {None}

Summary:

TW: Swearing, Light Violence, Panic Attacks, Trauma, Past Death

Agent Katana, a skilled assassin from Hitman INC has broken her favorite weapon, and she must travel to Yokohama, Japan for a replacement. One misspoken phrase in Japanese has her living in an anime-infested nightmare, with no escape other than with the help of a mysterious and slightly annoying new acquaintance. Join Katana on her adventure as she realizes that life can be better if you don't always do things by yourself.

This oneshot takes place in the winter of 2013, ten months after Katana joins the company.

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Non-Japanese speakers will need to use a translator for some parts of this story, or they will suffer in confusion like Katana.

Requested by Wolfmage553 on AO3

~~~

"The hell do you mean you don't have another one?" A young assassin scoffs, picking at her claws as she holds a telephone up to her ear.

"You heard me correctly, Agent." The cold voice of the man hisses from the other end. "As I'm sure you are aware, we got that sword specially imported from the most skilled tokō in Japan."

"Yeah, I know, but you can just specially import another. Right?" She asks, trying not to sound too petty but also not too hopeful.

"Agent Katana, you somehow managed to get your very expensive sword wrecked in ten months." You could hear the frustration in his tone from the other side of the line.

"That's a long time using only one weapon while doin' high stakes jobs like I do." She argues, hoping that this quip doesn't push the boss' limits too much.

"Do you really think I care, Agent? I'm telling you that you broke it, and if you want another weapon that's not a gun, you're gonna need to figure it out yourself."

"With all due respect, sir. My name's Katana for a reason. I can't go out killin' people and doing the company's dirty work without my favorite weapon. I'm one of your best employees, ain't I?" She rhetorically asks, twisting the cord around part of her paw.

When she hears the dial tone, Agent Katana huffs out an annoyed sigh before placing the phone on its stand. The boss made everything so difficult sometimes. He paid Katana so much money to just go around killing people, and he gets peeved when she asks for a replacement sword? It can't be that hard to just force someone to make one if he was somehow able to get it done last time.

Boss is just a big-ass baby who's too lazy to get a new weapon. One that isn't a stupid gun, anyway. She grumbles quietly one more time before walking outside of the phone booth.

"So, how'd it go?" Says Agent WPNZ, the man who is standing next to the red box and lightly tapping his foot. The two of them are business partners, and while they weren't too jazzed about having to work together at first, they've learned to tolerate each other. "Let me guess, Boss folded, and he ordered a shiny new sword for the kitten princess."

Katana scoffs like the word princess pained her before punching WPNZ in the gut. It was one of the few places that he wasn't made of metal, meaning that the punch would hurt his soft flesh more than it would hurt her. Sometimes, she wouldn't get so lucky when she hit her acquaintance, resulting in a metallic bang, throbbing knuckles, and a laughing WPNZ. But as of right now, the young man is trying hard not to keel over with pain, instead letting out a deep and breathy chuckle.

"I'm not a princess, you metalhead." Her nose twitches upward and she makes a face, causing WPNZ to truly laugh at her. This makes her lash out, sheathing her claws at once and pouncing on top of him. "What the fuck has got you laughin' right now, funny man? Huh?"

"It's just your nose, Katana." He smiles up at her before shoving her away.

"What about my damn nose." She spits out, still staring at him defiantly.

"It's doing that little twitchy thing again." He smirks before deciding to push her buttons even more than before. "Aww, princess Katie's getting all mad, you can see it in her cute little face~"

"DO NOT CALL ME THAT, WPNZ!" She hits him again, this time straight in the eye socket. "They gave me this job for a reason. I'm vicious, and I'll- I'll prove it! I'll prove to you and Boss that I can be the great Agent Katana, even without the..." She pauses, trying to figure out how to say the next part of her sentence without getting made fun of.

"Katana without the katana? You had no good way to end that, did you?" WPNZ mocks the humanoid cat, looking down at her smugly.

"I'm done with you, bro." She scoffs, finally deciding to walk away from the annoying man who is constantly finding new ways to get under her skin. "Go shoot old people or something."

"Wha-" He is about to make a snarky comment, but Agent Katana puts a paw over his mouth and shoves him away.

"Nope! I've got a flight to catch, asshole." She smirks before saluting at him and jumping off the bridge they are currently walking over.

"What the hell? Katana!" WPNZ rushes over before he sees her carefully parachuting down to the water below.

"Gullible!" She yells at him, flipping him off before landing in the ocean below with a small splash.

Now, all the young agent needs to do is go home, dry herself off, and buy plane tickets to Japan! With her stupid business partner out of the way, there was no one left who could stop her from getting her new weapon. Because even though she would never admit it out loud, she knew that WPNZ was indeed right about one thing.

I'm not myself without my katana.

~~~

Katana walks through the airport in Japan, hood pulled over her head tightly. She didn't want to draw attention to herself, especially because the people here weren't like the ones in the Mushroom Kingdom. None of them were Toads, Goombas, or those fucking walking turtles or whatever they're called. Every single intelligent creature here was a human. And while Katana was half human, she felt extremely out of place.

As she is quietly walking and trying to mind her own business, someone bumps into her, and her hood falls off her head. Once her teal hair with her ears sticking out is visible, many people turn around to stare at her. Some of the more polite people just avoid eye contact with her, though she could feel some of them do double-takes when they believed her back was turned. But as an assassin, she has been trained to almost have a sixth sense, knowing where people are and what they are doing around her.

Quickly, she fixes her hood, but not before she hears a few people talking about her. Yes, it was in a language that she barely understood, but it wasn't hard to pick up on the disgusted tone that they were using. Humans. Always weird around others that aren't exactly like them. She continues to walk through the airport to get to the taxi pickup area, but she could already tell that Japan was not the place for her.

She walks through the automatic doors, the wind hitting her in the face as she grabs her hood. Katana makes sure to secure it on her head as she walks, not wanting to bring any more unnecessary attention to herself. She was a secret agent on a secret mission to get her favorite weapon recrafted, and she didn't want to talk to a single person other than her taxi driver and the guy who was going to make her a new weapon.

Speaking of the driver, he was waiting for her to get inside the car. This is enough to draw her attention away from her hood and compel her to get in the back seat. She still doesn't feel comfortable enough to take it off, but she tries not to feel as uncomfortable now that she is in a more private setting.

As she is getting situated, the driver looks at her from the rear-view mirror. Then, once they make awkward eye contact, he looks at the steering wheel.

Katana sighs heavily, realizing that she'd need to speak with this man, so he knew where to take her. What better way to practice her nonexistent Japanese skills?

"Kon'nichiwa, watashi wa machi de anime no on'nanoko ga hoshīdesu." Katana says, deeply proud of herself even if she likely said the wrong thing.

"Anime taun? Sōiu imidesu ka?" He questions, making her head spin.

"Hai." She smiles fakely at him, hoping that he would stop asking questions and just drive her to Yokohama.

He nods his head, shifting his car into gear and beginning to drive along the road. She places one of her earpods in her ear, connecting them with a plug to her iPod and playing her favorite music. She tries to keep it very quiet, so she can hear if the driver is doing anything suspicious. Just in case, she did have a gun on her, even though she felt as if that weapon was for lowlifes. Like WPNZ. That jackass sure loved his guns.

She turns to look out the window, only to let out a surprised huff once she realizes that they're driving on the left side. We're driving on the wrong side of the FUCKING road! Her eyes shrink into slits, fur standing on end, before realizing that the driver wasn't trying to kill her. That was just how they drove in other places of the world. Japan is going to give me a goddamn heart attack, I swear.

Quietly sighing in relief, she slumps back down in her seat and her eyes go back to normal. The life she leads has made her overly paranoid, that much was for sure, but she needs to keep this job more than anything else in her whole world. She had been without parents or a family of any sort since she was a young child, and Boss had found her living on the streets nearly a year ago. Obviously, she jumped at the opportunity to have a job, even if it was violent and morally wrong. Hitman INC paid more than any other job could offer her, considering her lack of experience in any other field than killing.

Yeah, she had spilled a lot of blood, and she occasionally felt guilty about it, but she felt as if this was her purpose in life. The job was dangerous, but she didn't feel like she had to protect herself from anything. She was trained well, and she could just kill anyone who came after her. Not like they'd know to, anyway. Agent Katana had no other life outside of her job, and she was fine with that.

Even if she had to see WPNZ's face every single day of her life.

He was a thorn in her side most times, but she had to admit that he can be funny and helpful when he wants to be. They never have to rely on each other, even if they are so-called partners, so she doesn't really mind if he's there. She'd do things the simple way, and he'd do things in his own sick, twisted way. They annoyed each other every shot they could get, but that was typical for frenemies.

At a time like this, however, Katana was very glad that her business partner wasn't here. If he noticed them driving on the left side, he totally would've shot the driver without thinking first. It certainly felt like a breath of fresh air to be away from his spontaneous ass. But it would also be nice to have someone next to her in this new country. Not that she was considering him a friend, but she wouldn't be upset if she shared this experience with him. Friend, my ass. That boy is just nothing but a bad influence. She laughs to herself, barely noticing as the car begins to slow down as they get off the freeway.

As they go along a few side roads, she notices that nearly every billboard and advertisement have some sort of anime girl on it. She notices all of them doing flirty poses, saying something in Japanese that she obviously couldn't read, and it makes her frown slightly. If there's anything she hated more than Agent WPNZ, it was anime simps. The whole idea of anime wasn't even bad, but those weebs who set up shrines and praised anime like it was heaven-sent needed help.

"Watashitachi wa koko ni." The driver stops the car, motioning to the credit card machine next to her.

"Huh?" She shakes her head slightly, making eye contact with him as he huffs out a small sigh.

"American?" He frowns, clearly unamused. "All done. Pay, please."

"Hai, of course." She says in a mixture of both languages, giving him some cash and silently thanking Memes that she didn't have to make a horrible attempt at understanding more Japanese.

"Arigato." He nods as she leaves the car, hoping that wherever in Yokohama he dropped her off was close to her hotel.

What she is met with surprises her, to say the least.

There was anime everywhere. This wasn't just billboards, this was everything. Anime stores, even school supply shops and bakeries, littered the streets. It seemed like there was not one normal place for miles. She even caught a glimpse of a "sexy" Shrek maid cafe, which people were wasting their time to go to. This must be a mistake, there's no way that Japan is like this. Her hotel did not look like it was even close to this area, at least it didn't when she looked at it online.

Did I misspeak? I definitely mentioned Yokohama and not anime. RIGHT? Katana desperately tries to remember what she said, because there is no way that she would have been stupid enough to throw herself into a living nightmare like this. Nope. She was getting out of this hellhole, right now. She'd even pay the driver extra!

"Shitsureishimasu?" She turns around to notify her driver that something had gone wrong, in hopes that she could get this all sorted out.

Unfortunately for Katana, he was nowhere to be found. He had already driven off, leaving her here in... Akihabara, as one of the signs says. Damnit.

She decides to go into a nearby internet café to look this city up, curious to know a little bit more about where she's found herself. Upon walking in, she sees many people with anime shirts on. Men were rocking shirts with their favorite waifus, while a few women were cosplaying or flirting with the other weebs and tourists. She rolls her eyes at this, turning her focus to the computer as she throws some cash at the man at the front.

"Gobun." Katana doesn't try to turn around to face him, instead sitting down as quickly as she can.

Her paws fly across the keyboard, as she is just as determined to learn more about her location as she is to leave quickly. The results say that Akihabara is a district in Tokyo, and it is highly known for its anime. When she searches the distance between this place and her hotel, she deepens her already existent scowl. It was thirty-five kilometers away which was about twenty-two miles, and forty-five minutes by car. She also didn't have another car readily available, and it didn't look like many taxis ran through this... special part of town.

It looked like this was another problem that she was going to have to figure out by herself, though it's not like she really minded. On their missions, much to her displeasure, WPNZ never cares to help her anyway. Though Boss had mentioned how it would be better to work as a team, they'd never really tried to make that happen. Katana was used to doing things solo.

Katana gets up from her seat with a heavy sigh, realizing that she still couldn't understand Japanese like everyone else in the town. Sure, she could speak a few simple phrases, but she was prone to messing them up somewhere in the middle. She suspected that the whole reason she was in this mess is because she didn't even try to learn this language before she went here.

Maybe this whole solo mission was going to be harder than she thought.

She walks out of the internet café, only to be met with the setting sun. It was getting late now, and she had to check into her hotel! Otherwise, she would have to stay the night somewhere here, and it was likely too late to make a reservation. And Agent Katana, the great assassin on a secret mission to get a new weapon in Yokohama, would never sleep in the streets again. She wasn't the same poor, lonely child that she was before. She was going to figure this out! She was brave, strong, self-dependent, and she would definitely be able to manage herself without knowing how to understand a lick of-

"DORAEMON?!" A loud, shrieky voice snaps Katana out of her thoughts, making her look forward and make eye contact with a starry-eyed human.

"Uh..." She looks him up and down a few times, clearly confused.

"Doraemon!" He just repeats, jumping up and down like a crazy person.

"Sorry, I don't speak Japanese." She says, hoping that this will get the man to back away and stop talking to her.

"I can say English! You are Doraemon!" He squeals, fawning over her like a child. "Cat with no ears! Anime!"

"Ah, jeez, I'm not-" She cringes, tugging on the strings of her hood as she grows more uncomfortable by the second.

"Koko ni kite!" He yells, beckoning many of his friends over to gawk at Katana. "Doraemon! Kanojo wa kare to onajida!" She begins to get surrounded, causing her eye to twitch and making her wish that now, more than ever, she had her sword.

She had the gun that she had taken for special occasions, and she almost contemplated using it. Though she quickly realized that if guns were illegal back where she's from, the police wouldn't be jazzed if she tried to attack a group of anime-obsessed losers who were crowding her. Since she can't use violence, she quickly decides to use the next best thing.

"Aah! Get the fuck out of my face!" She screams, shoving a few of them out of the way and running the other direction as fast as she can.

Katana keeps pushing herself, focused on getting as far away from those creeps as possible. Maybe if she kept running, she'd eventually leave this city! She continues along the sidewalk, running and running, until she falls short of breath. Leaning against a building, the agent looks up to see how far she's gotten. She sighs in annoyance when she is met with an equal number of waifus littering the sides of buildings.

Then, she finds her saving grace: a payphone.

She scrambles over to it, still huffing to catch her breath as she fumbles with some Japanese money in her pocket. At least this was the one thing that she was prepared for. If there's anything that being a secret agent/killer has taught her, it's that you always need to have an extra weapon in your back pocket. In this case, her weapon was just money, but she couldn't wait to hear someone, anyone, speak in non-broken English for the first time all day.

Katana then hesitates, wondering who she could possibly call. Her parents were dead, she had no siblings, no friends, no coworkers that she liked, and- She stares at the keypad for a moment longer, before slumping in defeat and typing in the phone number of the last person she would have ever wanted to talk to in this moment. She knows that he'll be of no help, but upon realizing that she knows nobody else, she just needed the clarification that she was at least acquainted with someone.

"Hello, Doe residence. John speaking." His all-too-recognizable voice speaks from the other end of the call.

"Can it, WPNZ. I know it's you." She tries her best not to smile, still not wanting to fully admit that it was a relief to hear his voice.

"Aww, Katana! Japan proved to be too much for you already?"

"Memes, just shut up, okay. I just... needed to hear someone's voice who didn't speak only Japanese. Everything's been a lot these past few hours."

"I bet you're jetlagged as hell. It's like, eight at night there, right?"

"Yeah. What time is it there, noon?"

"It's four in the goddamn morning, Katana. You're damn lucky I got a smartphone and that I keep it by my bed, or you would've gotten a sweet little dial tone. Besides, how do you not know the difference in time from here and there and I do?"

"It's hard to keep track of time when you're on a plane for twelve hours, and then you almost have a heart attack when your driver goes on the wrong side of the road, only to end up twenty-two miles away from your hotel because you can't speak Japanese correctly! And of course, to top this shitty day off, I found myself in Anime Town and was mistaken for a talkin' anime cat!" She spills all her emotions, almost able to see WPNZ's uninterested expression from the other side.

"Look, that's interesting and all, but why are you calling me, again? There's got to be other people who you could bother with your problems-"

"Well, there isn't, okay? You're the only person I know other than Boss and a few of our other coworkers. I thought maybe you'd swallow your pride for one second and listen to what I had to say, but no! You're just so annoying!"

"You seriously have no one else you can call." He says in an unreadable tone that Katana wishes she could understand.

"Look, man. You annoy the hell outta me, but you're like..." She stops herself again before going ahead with her embarrassing confession. "You're the closest thing I've ever had to a friend."

The silence between the two of them is deafening, before a dark sigh is heard from WPNZ and he responds, "Don't die in Japan, Katana."

Then the line goes dead, and the young woman can swear she feels unwanted tears pricking at the corners of her eyes. He was the one person that she could count on in this moment, just to talk to for a few minutes, and he hung up on her. She was foolish to believe that they could be anything more than just business partners when all he cared about was guns and murder.

The thing that upset her the most is the fact that she really didn't have anyone else. Was she doomed to only know him closely, and have no real connection with anybody? His sense of self was just guns and violence, and while that was Katana's job, she couldn't say that she loved the idea of being feared, being wanted by the police under an alias. She was a strong and independent woman before she took the job; but after spending her whole childhood in a cardboard-shadowed misery, she felt like she had something that she needed to prove to the world.

And she could harp on her... not-so-friendly partner all she wanted, but her entire identity was her weapon as well. Hell, this whole trip was just to force the swordsmith to craft her a new katana. She went through all this trouble instead of just staying home, dealing with herself, and learning how to shoot a gun. Maybe WPNZ could've even taught her, she was sure he would've liked that.

Maybe it had something to do with her name, and how it was so deeply connected to that sword that she just couldn't let it go. Even if "Katana" wasn't her real name, she still liked to entertain the idea. After all, anything was better than the name given to her by birth. It only reminded her of her parents, and though they were loving and caring, they were still broke, homeless, and ended up dying anyway. Little Karen needed the support of her parents, she needed protection, and she was just a shell of her former self when she was left to rely on her own capabilities to stay alive. Little Karen was depressed, unable to do anything other than wallow in guilt and pain every day.

But Agent Katana? She was tough. Though the scars from her past life still lingered, she has been able to pick herself up from the depths of her own problems.

At first, the killing was only for the money, then it served a more emotional purpose. If her parents just got to die one day because someone was recklessly driving, but the driver got away with nothing more than a broken arm, someone had to pay. With each kill came a new sick form of justice... until she realized that this is who she's supposed to be. There was no more Karen. No one had to know about that vulnerable, scared side of her when she could just be Katana.

And the woman she's raised herself to be would never sit next to a payphone and cry over some undefined relationship with a man. So, what if she's lonely and friendless? She was perfectly capable of dusting herself off, getting up, and walking twenty-two miles to her destination. She had a gun, and though she had no training, she knew how to fire it. And if all else fails, her retractable claws can always serve as defense against anyone who would dare attack her in the middle of the night.

She looks up at the moon, now twinkling in the east. Now, she just had to travel south-ish for the next seven hours and twenty minutes, no stopping, and she would reach her hotel. Goddamn.

Maybe I should just sleep next to this damn payphone... at least it doesn't look like it will rain tonight. There's no point in being a damn baby about my past and crying because sleeping on the streets brings up shit that I don't want to remember.

"H-hel-help m-m-me." A man with spiky black hair and orange clothes crawls up to her, grabbing her ankle as she exclaims with disgust.

"Hey! Get offa me, you creep!"

The second she says it, the thing that was grabbing onto her tightly disappeared, leaving a cloud of dust where it once was. Her eyes widen in surprise, as she just gives the cloud a blank stare. She is deeply confused, and concerned, but she just shuffles back under the box after shaking off the initial shock of what just happened.

But, of course, odd things aren't done happening to the agent yet. Now, someone else was running up to her. He was not human, which slightly surprised her, as everyone else outside the Mushroom Kingdom area had always been human. He looked to be some sort of humanoid axolotl, wearing a long-sleeved shirt and baggy pants. He was also carrying a large stick that looked to be a very fancy pen, cursing as he barreled towards Katana.

"Goddamnit, Goku! You were living so long, where did you go?!" He says, searching for something as he sniffs the air. "Oh! I've picked up on your essence! You can't hide from me for long!" He bends over backwards, all the way to the ground, sniffing behind him while he continues to walk forwards. While doing this, he catches a glimpse of Katana, and they lock eyes awkwardly. "Hi! Have you seen a stray Goku anywhere around here?"

"The hell even is my life." She mumbles, refusing to respond to him as she scoffs.

"D-Doraemon?!" He suddenly gets very excited, looking Katana up and down. "The earless cat? You look so realistic! Goku must've died, and I smelled your essence!"

"Memes, what the fuck are you people here on? I have ears," Katana pulls down her hood, "and I'm not anime!"

The axolotl man quickly realizes this, his amazed expression turning to one of deep apology as he backs away and stands up like normal. He notices the high concentration of glittering dust in the air and sighs, leaning slightly on his comically oversized pen.

"Sorry, I got a little bit excited. It's not every day that you see someone who's not a human around these parts, so I naturally assumed you were anime." He scratches the back of his neck before gazing up and down at Katana again. "I'm Axol."

"Katana. And I ain't here for small talk. I've got places to be." She frowns.

"Sitting next to a payphone? I figure you could use someone to talk to. Well, other than whoever you're planning to call."

"I already called him, not like you have any place to be asking me about something personal like that." She gives him a weird look, silently hoping that he would just get lost and leave her to face her past in peace.

"O...kay then." He pauses for a moment, looking like he is about to walk away, but his curiosity gets the best of him, and he asks her another thing. "Where are you from, cat girl?" Axol crouches down next to her, trying to be friendly.

"Oh, I'm from the city of Nunya." She says, adapting a cheery demeanor after he asks her this.

"Cool, where's Nunya?" He wonders, glad that he finally got the cat woman to talk.

"Nunya business, fish boy." She smirks, knowing that she set up that joke just the right way once his expression flips from intrigued to mildly pissed.

"Look." Axol quietly sucks in air through his teeth, trying to stay calm and not act upset to the grumpy stranger he's just met. "I'm trying to help you. I know these areas well, and you're not from here. You're obviously upset about being here, and I can tell by the look on your face that you don't like anime and being in an anime-obsessed town is like some sort of living Hell for you. I was trying to be friendly and see if there was anything I could do to help you, especially because you're sitting next to a payphone on the side of the road and not walking back to a hotel."

Katana sits there in silence, still defiantly looking at Axol as he stands back up. He was clearly annoyed, but the fact that he still wanted to give her a hand and help her back on her feet sparked something weird in her heart. It was like she wasn't nearly as opposed to the idea as she was a minute ago when he walked up to her with his body folding in ways that shouldn't be possible.

Her thoughts floated back to Agent WPNZ, how annoying he was on the phone, and what a bad person he always was. He would've never come up to a stranger who looked like Katana, sitting on the street next to a payphone, and tried to help. He would have either made fun of her, pointing and laughing as he walked by, or he would've just shot her in the head and still laughed while she bled out. Someone like him would've never cared, and if it looked like he did, then it was just some silly act to get a reaction out of the person he was trying to piss off.

Now that Katana began to think about it, her joke about Nunya sounded exactly like something that her business partner would say. All the time that they've spent together over the past few months has made her think that people were all like him. She didn't give anyone a chance, and she didn't even trust people enough to have simple small talk at the grocery store or at work. She'd even become quite... mean. She was rude to people all the time, under the impression that it was funny, or the insults were just a prank or joke. Katana, Karen, wasn't like this before she took the job at Hitman INC. And she's just now realizing that even if the stubborn man who she hangs out with doesn't consider them friends, she's adopted his personality, and he lives inside her when she's making decisions. Agent WPNZ had done something to her mind, and even though she knew it was wrong to be such a jerk, it was almost etched into her sense of self.

"Uh..." She stares at the ground while she is deep in thought. There's no way that her not-friend had made her like this and even made her believe that all strangers are hostile. Axol meant well, and she wasn't in the position to be mean to him. "I..."

"Sorry, I didn't mean to assume things." He smiles, but you could tell it wasn't as genuine and bright as the first few times as he gets ready to leave. "I'll be off, you can enjoy yourself while you call people, I guess."

"Axol, was it?" Katana addresses him with a louder voice, causing him to raise an eyebrow and slightly turn back around. "Listen. I didn't mean to be such a bitch. Your assumptions were correct; I'm kind of stuck here. And no one really speaks English, so I've been fucked this whole day. I was here for business and my driver fucked up the location. I'm supposed to be in Yokohama, that's where my hotel is."

"Oh..." His expression turns sympathetic at once. "You need a ride to Yokohama? Why didn't you just say so in the first place? That's easy." He almost laughs after that, his wide smile returning.

"You'll give me a ride? Man, seriously?" Her flat expression turns up just enough to the point where some may call it a smile.

"Totally." He snickers quietly before holding out a hand to help her up. "C'mon, follow me. I have a faster way to get there than just the road."

She takes his hand as he pulls her up. Then, they both begin to walk, not really saying anything to each other. Axol leads the way through a few side roads, then he walks down a sketchy alleyway that makes Katana frown. This was really beginning to bring back more unpleasant memories for her, but she needed to stay strong and stop letting her emotions get the best of her. The last thing she needed was for the man walking beside her to make a comment about how she was dragging her feet and staring at the ground. That would spark a conversation that she didn't want to have.

"Where are we going, exactly?" She asks as they go down an even narrower alley and she gets more skeptical.

Was she wrong to trust him, after all? He isn't some freak who's just taking me all the way over here to kill me? Or worse, use his crazy pen to somehow turn me into anime? She shudders at the thought, sending a doubtful glare as they shuffle through the skinny gap between two buildings.

"Do you know who I am?" He responds with another question, not sounding cocky, just innocent and confused.

"What's that even supposed to mean? Are you famous or something?"

"Hmm. Just wondering." He says as he stops walking, pausing in front of a hole in the side of a hill.

"If you think that I'm about to crawl through that, you're insane." Katana gives it a once over before looking back at Axol in disbelief. "Where the hell does that even go?"

"To my private train tracks." He shrugs before walking through the hole without another word.

"Wha-" Katana stutters before peeking her head into the darkness. "You have private train tracks, what the hell?"

"Just come on, it is late, after all." His voice sounds from deep inside the tunnel, beckoning for her to follow despite her initial refusal.

She sighs like she is deeply troubled, but she is very curious to know more about Axol after the revelation that he has his own private train tracks. There were many questions brewing in her mind, and the only way to get them answered was to follow a stranger into a dark hole. As an assassin, she is careful when she walks into these situations, and she usually has WPNZ by her side, but this is another instance where she needs to rely on her own skills in case something goes wrong.

"Coming." She calls out, following the faint outline of his shadow as the light from the moon illuminates less and less of the dark space.

They walk quietly as the tunnel grows darker and darker until suddenly, Axol stops in his tracks. Katana had wonderful eyes, courtesy of her being half-feline, so she could see everything that was around them. She could tell that the other couldn't see nearly as well, as he was taking slow steps and feeling his way around the place.

"Hey, cat girl?" He whispers in his usual raspy voice, turning to where he thought the young woman was.

"Over here." She whispers in response, biting back a laugh because he has to do a full 180 degree turn to face her.

"I don't want to sound... racist, but can you see in this darkness with your cat eyes?" He catches her off guard with this question, making her chortle in amusement.

"Yeah, I can see. What do ya need?" She doesn't really know how she can respond negatively to his comment, so she tries acting nicer.

"There's a light switch somewhere, could you push it? I can sense that we've made it into the main area of the tunnel, but I can't see anything." He asks as Katana looks around for the switch.

Once she locates it and presses it with her paw, a huge spotlight makes a chunk noise and switches on, blinding both people. Katana lets out a quiet hiss as her eyes change from huge round balls to slits, almost like snake eyes. Axol's frills point back, but they quickly return to normal. He looks like he wants to ask Katana a question but ends up biting his lip and directing his attention to the train tracks ahead of them, which were now fully lit as well.

"So. You own these?" She asks, gesturing to the tracks that seem to go in one direction for miles.

"You seem surprised." He grins. "I suppose I do owe you somewhat of an explanation, but there are also a few questions I would like to ask you. Let's get to know each other once we get on the train, okay?"

"What train?" Katana frowns, looking down the tracks and not seeing or hearing anything. "Since this is private, shouldn't your train or whatever be here already?"

"Ah, prepare to have your mind blown, cat girl." He smiles widely as he holds his large pen high above his head, throwing a piece of paper on the ground.

He begins to scribble on the paper, drawing something with the writing utensil that was nearly as tall as Katana. She cranes her neck to get a better look, but the pen moves across the paper so fast that she can't tell what he's creating. This only formed more questions in her head as she stared, dumbfounded, while the axolotl man continued to doodle something.

Then, he steps away from his creation, breathing heavily as he wipes the sweat off his brow. Just as Katana is about to question what in the actual hell he's doing, the paper begins to vibrate and glow a bright yellow as it lifts off the ground. It shakes violently, making the assassin a bit scared as her eyes grow narrower with suspicion and her ears slightly prick back.

A large, blue tank engine with a gray face and a creepy-ass smile is conjured from the glowing paper, which explodes into dust the moment that the train poofs into existence. Katana shrieks, clearly astonished and freaked out beyond belief now, seeking shelter behind Axol as she watches the engine grow eyes and a mouth. Axol laughs quietly at her shenanigans before she begins to recognize the freak of nature that is now situated on the track.

"Wait a second... Is that who I think-" Katana starts to speak before she is unexpectedly cut off by none other than the train.

"Yo fam! Choo-choo, Thomas here to fuel your memes!" The all-too-recognizable cartoon train chirrups in a lively British accent, his weird language making both Katana and Axol very weirded out.

He begins swaying back and forth, going cross-eyed with some sort of headband across the very top of his face. The agent assumes that the headband was anime, but she didn't know why it was there. Was Axol toying with her by adding that and making her catastrophic day even worse? And she couldn't wrap her head around what was going on with his pen. It was somehow able to make his drawings come to life, despite them having some mental issues.

Speaking of issues, Thomas is now ascending, a bright white light around him as he floats about five feet into the air. Then, he pauses there and opens his mouth, a cheery song being sung while his lips didn't bother to move an inch and his expression stayed as a blank smile. It sounded more like an mp3 was playing through his voice, even with every bit of clarinet music and female harmonizing that was in one of his music videos titled "Thomas, We Love You".

"It's Thomas the Tank Engine, hip, hip, hip, hip, hooray! Chugga-chugga, chugg-chugg, chuff-chuff-chuff, he rides along the way! And when you hear that whistle, it can only be one train. Our favorite little engine, Thomas is his name! Thomas the Tank Engine rolling along..." He continues his song, even harmonizing his whistles like he was the chorus of young girls that originally sung this.

"What the fuck is happening?!" Katana needs to scream over the volume of the train's "singing", which was sounding creepier the longer he dragged it on.

"This is just a thing that he does." Axol chuckles nervously, leaning against a wall as he lets Thomas continue to partially rise to heaven and partially break their eardrums with a child choir at the same time. "I've learned to go with the flow, especially because he's my only mode of private transport. And there's still a good two minutes before his song ends and he'll even think about taking us anywhere."

"Goddamnit." She sighs, slumping against the wall before slowly sinking to the ground and sitting down. As Thomas begins to act like an unstable internet connection, she turns her attention to her companion. "You owe me so many answers, Axol."

"With time, cat girl, with time. It's best to just keep our voices down and let Thomas do his thing." The humanoid axolotl responds dully and absently, instead eyeing his creation carefully as it sings its heart out.

Katana's eyes narrow with boredom as she listens to the song about Thomas and how all his friends love him with all their hearts, even if he was a cheeky train. Everything about this was making her cringe and want to run away at the same time, but she knew this could very well be her only chance to get to Yokohama. Her determination to get a good night's sleep, to get her weapon in the morning, and to catch the quickest flight out of this place was enough to make her stay and endure this painful experience.

"Thomas, we love you!" He finishes, tooting his horn before lowering himself to the ground and staring at the two acquaintances with a spooky grin that nearly broke the boundaries of his face. "Y'all ready for a T-Swift opera remix?! Let's vibe, fam!" He yells, causing Axol's eyes to widen and for him to spring into action, grabbing his large pen and pointing it defiantly at his living drawing.

"Ugh." He clearly sounds revolted, though Katana can't seem to figure out why until he speaks again. "Yo Thomas, chill with the tunes! I'm your OG creator, and I've got some serious biz to drop on ya."

The secret agent stares at him, not sure whether to be puzzled, disgusted, or both. Axol just shrugs with an apologetic expression on his face. There is a short silence before the tank engine's face lights up and he nods vigorously with understanding, dropping his microphone that had appeared out of nowhere.

"What can I getchu, fam?" Thomas responds, talking in a weird mixture of English and cringey slang that Katana can't seem to wrap her head around.

"Can you vibe with my homie and me to the end of these tracks in Yokohama? We ain't got no time to lollygag!" Axol asks Thomas in a pleading tone.

"Idk, fam. Maybe." The train responds, looking between Katana and Axol like he's trying to figure out some kind of riddle.

"OMG, Thomas! I just want to GTFO and I'm tryna be a total hero for this random. So can you just chillax and vibe with me?" He snaps, sounding agitated at his creation.

"Bet, whatever fam." The train gives in and Axol's eyes light up.

"I am... horribly confused." Katana stares off into space as the humanoid axolotl motions for her to go to the top of the train. "But, good job, I guess."

"I hate speaking in Meme. It's the worst language ever." He grumbles as they both climb on top of Thomas, getting situated before he begins to rev up his engine. "But it's not like my drawings are even remotely intelligent enough to learn a new language in their ten-minute lifespans."

"Wait, only ten-" She begins to voice her concern.

"I should probably explain-" He also speaks before they both abruptly stop, looking at each other with an embarrassed flush on their faces.

Thomas begins to slowly chug along as Katana and Axol sit opposite each other, making awkward eye contact as they sit in prolonged silence. Neither knew what to say, and both were waiting for the other to finish the sentence they had started before getting their words cut off.

"Um..." Katana chuckles, tucking a piece of her hair away from her face. "You can go on, if you want."

"Well, you asked for an explanation, right? I was just saying it's high time I told you who I really am." Axol smiles, the awkwardness getting washed away by his friendliness.

"All right." Finally. Katana thinks to herself, trying not to appear too curious as she nods, slightly encouraging him to go on.

"I am Axol, the most popular manga writer in all of Japan!" He simply says, striking a pose with his seemingly magical pen.

"Just Axol?" Katana couldn't help herself and began asking questions. "What's your last name? Is that your pseudonym?"

"U-uh..." He looked a bit bothered by the question, smiling nervously. "It's not my real name, but I'd prefer you called me that. I haven't heard my real name since I left my old home."

"That's cool, I can call you whatever." Katana tries to be nonchalant, but there is a small pang in her heart.

She hadn't heard her real name in a long time either, nearly a year now. There were many similarities between her and Axol, and it made her smile. Just to think that she had a random run-in with someone who may be able to share a few of her struggles, someone who she could talk to, made her happier than she would've liked to admit. She couldn't help but wonder if he had problems with being not fully human in this country, or if he's learned to adapt to it.

"Thanks, cat girl." He smiles, making Katana slightly wince at the nickname. Does he even remember my name? She wonders before Axol begins to talk about his backstory in more detail. "When I was a young, aspiring artist, I lived in... another, more insignificant place, and everyone there hated anime. I had invented a pen that had the power to make any anime drawing come to life, so long as there was ink inside of it. I was not exactly liked there, and neither were my drawings and comics, so I moved to Japan to share my art with the world."

"And you got more popular here than you would've ever been back home. More successful, like you found your place." Katana muses, now recognizing yet another similarity between them.

"Why do I feel like you're about to do one of those movie flashbacks and I'm about to glimpse into your past?" Axol chuckles, albeit uncomfortably, as he watches her with a certain degree of expectance and interest.

"Wh- no." Katana exhales sharply, turning her gaze to glare at the floor. "I just zoned out for a second." She denies.

"No matter, you're right, anyway. I have found my place. Being famous can be tough, considering I don't have many personal connections anymore, but it's worth it. Especially when I go to Akihabara to sign things every day for locals and tourists alike." He winks, exactly like a famous person would do to one of his admirers.

"Where are you originally from?" Katana presses on, though she feels humiliated for asking a stranger such a personal question. "You don't have to answer that."

"No, it's cool. I haven't told many people, because they never really asked, but I'm from Inkopolis. The inklings who live there hate anime more than anything else. You might not know where that is, but it's in this obscure little kingdom that barely follows social standards-"

"The Mushroom Kingdom." She cuts him off, smiling to herself. "I'm pretty familiar with the place."

"That's awesome! I haven't met anyone here that even knows what I'm talking about when I mention it. Inkopolis wasn't the best place for me, but I've heard that the other cities there are nice."

New Donk City. 

The place Katana spent most of her life, the street corner where her old apartment was, and the intersection where her parents were fatally hit by a pickup truck while crossing the road. The sidewalk that she lived on, the store that she stole the cart from, and the bank where she took the last of her parents' scarce money out of their safe. That was where she was born, with a promising life ahead of her, only to have it be ripped away and for her parents to screw her over from beyond the grave with only twelve dollars in their wills.

She had unwillingly spaced out, placing her paws in her hair as she stared at her boot-covered feet. Her vision began to get blurry as she didn't avert her gaze, not even daring to blink as everything started to shake around her. Her ears ring, louder and louder, until that's all she can hear, the silence in that moment being too loud. Now's not the time for this, Katana. You can't have an attack here, you're in public. PUBLIC, Katana, with a stranger right next to you!

She couldn't help but see her parents' corpses dance in her mind, remembering just how it felt to watch the FBI take them away. How badly she wanted revenge, how she still does, for what happened all those years ago. Why she got into killing in the first place, because she knows that it's not just for the money. That driver was the first human she ever killed, and she knew damn well that his body wasn't worth a dime to the company. The people whose lives he ended meant everything to Karen, though, and disposing of him also meant that Katana could stop living in the past.

But still, even after all that, she knew that she still carried her old self deep within her. It's not ever just been about the money... Katana's profession is just as personal as it is monetary.

Snap out of it! That fish boy is staring at you, he's right there. Just...

"Snap out of it!" Katana screams, a single tear rolling down her face as she grips tightly at the locks of her hair.

Axol's eyes widen before his gaze softens, his hand hovering just above the young woman's shoulder. He wants to comfort her, but he doesn't want to make her any more upset or uncomfortable that she already appears to be. Conflicted, he sighs quietly, pulling his hand away and trying to give her some verbal comfort instead.

"Hey, cat girl." He calls out before taking a deep breath. "Hey, hey, please stop panicking. We can talk about whatever's bothering you, just take deep breaths, okay?"

His words don't look like they're working, and his expression turns from a sympathetic smile to a frown. She is still staring at the ground, her breathing shaky as she tries to hold back her tears, hating herself for acting this vulnerable in front of some random man she's only just met.

Then, slowly, she begins to calm herself down. She removes her hands from her hair, sitting back up and wiping her tears. Axol sighs in relief, glad that he's somehow gotten through to the stubborn woman and she's begun to get back to her regular self. He notices that she's embarrassed, suddenly very interested in staring at the walls of the tunnel. Thomas continues chugging along, and Axol wants to say... something, but he can't bring the words to leave his mouth.

"Goddamnit!" Katana suddenly screams; her face filled with rage as she bangs her fist against the side of the train.

This startles both Axol and the tank engine, who glitches for a second due to the force of her punch.

"Ayo, fam! Chillax!" Thomas warns, shaking a bit more before continuing a bit slower down the tracks than before.

"Uh, you want to talk about... it?" Axol speaks to Katana, who finally makes eye contact with him. "You seem troubled."

"No shit." She growls, clearly not wanting to be bothered.

"Sorry, cat girl. Just thought I'd see what's up, considering that your body shut off after I mentioned the Mushroom Kingdom." He pauses before saying one more thing. "And I told you a lot of things I don't just tell everyone, so I think it's only fair you should owe me a backstory too. Just saying." Axol shrugs, leaning back in his seat and averting his gaze.

"I..." She feels a bit guilty for not telling Axol anything, so she just quickly blurts out a few random things. "I'm Katana. Not my real name, it's my agent's name. I'm an assassin for Hitman INC in the Mushroom Kingdom. I'm here because I need a new katana and there's a man in Yokohama who can weld one for me."

It takes the anthropomorphic axolotl a few minutes to process what she's just said, but once he does, his expression is priceless. He looks like he's just been hit by a bus, winded and completely speechless. He blinks a few times before finally talking with a shaky and crackly voice.

"An assassin?!"

"Don't freak out, I'm not gonna kill you!"

"I let a fucking assassin, a hitwoman, a killer on my train! What's been your ploy this whole time? Have you just been waiting for the right moment to kill me? Y-you were probably holding back until I got close to you and asked you to calm down, maybe gave you a hug, thank Memes I didn't! You-"

"I don't have my weapon." Katana yells at him, causing him to stop spiraling. "The only thing I have is a stupid gun that I can't use and some simple self-defense techniques, okay? That's literally why I'm here. I couldn't have come to another country to pull off a hit, anyway, because our company is local. Kingdom business only."

"Then why did you have a random breakdown? Something like that must be a tactic to get someone close so you can kill them."

"I just had a rough childhood, all right?" She growls at him, her anger rising even more now as her eyes shrink into slits. "I'm not trying to kill you. I just want to get to Yokohama, get my fucking weapon so I can never pick up a gun again, and leave Japan."

"It's just hard to trust you now that I know you're capable of killing me whenever-" He is cut off by Katana taking her gun out of her pocket and throwing it off the train.

"Now I'm not. You happy now?" She rolls her eyes. "And again, it's not like I could shoot the damn thing or had any interest in tryin', anyway."

Axol is extremely surprised by what she's just done, trying to study her face for any signs of deceit. Maybe she had another gun hiding somewhere else in her clothing, and she really is waiting for him to let his guard down. Or maybe she's still waiting to find the right time, and she truly is lying about not knowing how to properly shoot a gun.

But, then again, there's also a possibility she could be telling Axol the truth.

If Katana really wanted to hurt him or keep anything secretive from him to keep the upper hand, she wouldn't have revealed her job title. She would've tried pulling a gun on him when he got close, but she didn't. The only reason she told Axol what she did for a living was because he explained who he was previously. When he was skeptical, she even discarded the only weapon she had to prove her point.

Axol had reasons to not trust Katana, especially because she was a skilled tactical killer who he most literally took in from the side of the road, but her actions have reflected why he should believe that her intentions are genuine. Even in the only reason she's in this country is to buy a specialized weapon, it truly means that she couldn't care less about hurting a hair on his head. She was grateful for his help, especially after her seemingly catastrophic phone call, but the axolotl man was still curious to know more about her.

You fumbled the bag big time, Katana. He's going to kick you off the train and then you'll be even more alone. You should've just said you were a humble accountant, or a worker at McDonald's, but no. You had to go and tell him the truth. A famous stranger who has contacts in the Mushroom Kingdom and can get your company discovered. Memes, what will Boss think, what will Agent think? He hates you, yes, but he'll hate you even more now. You're just pathetic, so stupid to think you could trust a fucking-

"Look, cat girl." His raspy voice speaks out after about a minute of complete silence. "I think I'm going to trust you, as you've been pretty truthful to me. Most secret agents or spies who want to keep the upper hand on their targets know to never reveal their true identities, and the fact that you did tells me that you may prove to be trustworthy." He pauses again, staring at her intently before continuing his well-thought-out words. "But I want to know a few more things about you. Communication is key to a healthy and friendly relationship, especially with those who don't know you all that well."

"Fine." Katana looks at Axol with a deadpan expression. "Just stop acting like you're my therapist; it's pissing me off."

"Deal." Axol nods, ready for her to elaborate on her past.

"When I was young, my parents died. They got hit by a car and stuff, whatever. Anyway, due to their poor choices in both life insurance and will-writing, I was left with nothing, and I was homeless. That's why my brain basically shut down when you mentioned cities in the Mushroom Kingdom." She shrugs. "Just you reminding me of those words brought those memories back to me, for some reason."

"That's awful... If I had known-" Axol tries to be consoling, but Katana cuts him off.

"It's fine, really. I've learned that my past is shitty, and I just need to get over it." She frowns before clearing her throat and continuing. "Around ten months ago, my soon-to-be boss found me eating leftover dumpster fish on the streets. He offered me ten thousand dollars to perform a hit on a man in the country, and the money was presented in cash right in front of my face. Next to the roll of money, in his other hand, was a gun. Obviously, I took the job but ended up killing the man with a knife and not the weapon he'd originally provided. That's when he took me back to the base and offered me all these things if I'd keep killing. An apartment, a full-time job with a substantial salary, and even the promise of extra money if I were to kill some more dangerous enemies." She quickly explains how she got to become an assassin, skipping over the more gruesome details of her first kill.

"And you accepted." Axol nods. "I would've too, especially if I had been in a situation like yours before."

"Yep. I've been doin' that job ever since. It comes with perks, like my original katana. I had told Boss that I didn't know how to shoot a gun, and he didn't bother to train me because he saw how cleanly I had performed my first one with a simple knife. He said I would be great with a sword and offered me a variety of selections, each one fancier than the next. That's why I was never trained on gun handling, instead focused more on my swordsmanship and agility."

"So, you broke your katana, then decided to come all the way to Yokohama to get a new one? Is this really that special of a sword?" He asks, almost incredulously.

"Yes. It's what makes me who I am, I literally named myself after the weapon because of how skilled I am with its use." She raises an eyebrow.

"And you won't even try with a gun? This is a very weird topic to be casually chatting about, but I feel like you'd be able to... unalive... them quicker with bullets." Axol stumbles over his words a bit, clearly finding a slight discomfort with the topic they're speaking of.

"First off, please never say 'unalive' again. It sounds like you're a five-year-old who's too scared they'll get grounded if they talk about killin'. Secondly, you could say I have cat-like agility, especially with the blade. No one in the whole company has ever had reason to doubt us." She chuckles quietly.

"Us? What do you mean, us?" Axol questions, making Katana immediately realize her mistake of mentioning... him. "Do you not work alone?"

"I, uh, no. I don't work alone. I have a business partner, his name's Agent WPNZ." She sighs, realizing she'll have to explain much more than just that.

"Agent Weapons? Like your name, but generalized?" He asks, making her slightly shake her head.

"It's spelled W-P-N-Z. Something of his own making, I suppose. None of us know each other's real names, so that's all I've ever known him by." She explains. "Basically, he's a gun-crazy freak that's about 75% metal. His arms and legs are all some form of rocket launcher or gun, and he has a double-barreled cannon serving as a helmet on his head. Even his tie is a little knife. We have different opinions on how we should do things, and we're usually pissed at each other, so I didn't feel like inviting him along."

"He didn't even offer?" Axol scoffs, acting surprised.

"Nah, that's not how the two of us operate. We work separately, forced to split the money when we 'work together' on big jobs. Also, he would've probably teased me the whole time, so I wouldn't have wanted him there anyway."

"But isn't it sort of frustrating to do everything by yourself the whole time? I'm not one to talk because I don't even have a beta reader for my manga, but if I had a partner, I would take advantage of the fact and work together with them on everything." He seems concerned, but Katana's frown just deepens.

"I'm independent. Doing important things with other people means that you're twice as likely to mess up." She argues.

"Yes, but it also means you only need to do half the work. If you work with a person long enough, eventually you'll end up being more in sync with them than you ever thought was possible." He smiles wistfully. "Maybe one day, I should get a beta reader. Or just have someone who gets me."

"I swear, sometimes you act more like a well-being counselor than a manga writer." Katana gives him the side eye.

"Sometimes, you act like more someone who needs counseling than a big, bad assassin. "He throws her words back at her, leaving a slightly bitter taste in her mouth.

"Hey! You don't have to be a-" She begins to insult him but is cut off.

"But really, you must have at least one friend. One person who you feel like you can talk to and vibe with at any given time."

"My only friend is the blade." She scowls. "I don't need anyone else getting in my way or telling me what I can and can't, or should and shouldn't, be doing. I already have my boss to get on my ass when my kills aren't completely clean."

"Oh yeah? Then who did you call on that payphone?" He flashes her a knowing look. "You don't mean to tell me you were calling someone who you don't consider a friend."

"W-what?" Her face goes pale.

She freezes up at this, realizing that Axol did have a point. Her mind played back the call she had with her business partner. It had started off like every conversation they usually have, with a friendly banter and a few small argumentative statements, but then it had taken a turn. Katana had called him the closest thing she's ever had to a friend, which was a not-so-subtle way of her asking for them to be friends. It wasn't received well by the other agent, and it made her feel alone.

She liked being independent, but loneliness like that was something she hadn't felt since her parents died. It was weird for her to be that emotionally attached to the most annoying man she had ever met, but she couldn't help it. WPNZ knew Katana better than anyone else ever had, and Katana had grown to appreciate him more after understanding what he's all about. They still worked separately, and she expected they'd be even farther away and more out of sync than ever now that she dropped the big f-bomb on him.

"Hey, cat girl? You spaced out again." Axol waves a hand in front of Katana's face, snapping her back to the present. "Who were you calling on the payphone?"

"It was WPNZ." She sighs in defeat. "He's the only person I know because we spend so much damn time together, so I figured I'd be able to call him. I talked about how everyone here thought I was some fuckin' anime cat, and it was normal. But then, he asked me why I called him specifically, and I told him it's cause he's the closest thing to a friend I ever had. I don't know what I was thinking, but I thought maybe he would tell me I was being weird, or funny, or maybe he'd even agree. That's when he just fell silent, told me to not die, and then he hung up."

She looks back up to see Axol's expression, expecting him to be remorseful or sympathetic, but he was the complete opposite. He looked starstruck and excited, like he was about to start fanboying. Before Katana could ask him what the hell was wrong, he began talking at a mile a minute.

"Whoa, that's exactly what happens in every single anime I watch, as well as every manga I read! The girl admits something to the boy, who is her rival or maybe someone that she doesn't know all that well. The confession is usually along the lines of, 'If you were to stay here with me, there would be no regrets... I would do anything for you!' By the way, that is quoted directly from Naruto and it's one of my favorite love confessions! But anyway! Anyway! Sometimes, when the girl confesses something, even if it's just friendship, the boy pushes her away, conflicted with his feelings and not sure how to respond and act. Whenever the boy does that, it means he's definitely, absolutely, one hundred percent in love with the girl." Axol finally finishes his rambling, still all jittery.

Even though Axol's talking point was about anime, Katana was able to understand what he was saying. If the axolotl man's theory was correct, then WPNZ pushed her away because he was... in love with her.

Katana's face goes pink, her whole body feeling like it's going into overdrive. She felt like she had a fever, though that wasn't really what was happening. Could Axol really be correct? Was her business partner just hopelessly pining for her, but too scared to admit it once she told him that they were basically friends?

The more she ponders Axol's anime-like theory, the more she starts to realize that the manga writer could have a point.

The thought that WPNZ is secretly in love with her is...

"HAHAHA!" She doubles over in laughter, clutching her sides as the blush is gone from her face and replaced with a hysterical expression. "That's a funny-ass joke!"

"It's not a joke, cat girl, I'm being serious. Anime has more similarities to real life than you might think." Axol frowns, wishing that she would take him more seriously. "There are strong reasons to believe that he's in love with you."

"He is not in love with me. He hates me. Every time we interact, he takes every opportunity he can and annoys the hell outta me." Katana's expression turns to something unreadable as she speaks, but Axol is determined to convince her of the storybook truth.

"Listen. I've seen this so many times. Sure, my romantic experience may only be through the books I read and the anime I've watched, but through my time I've seen this. Your business partner, Agent WPNZ, is not sure how to get close to you properly, so he engages with you in a negative way. The way he ended your previous conversation could be his attempt at getting your attention, to get you to call him again. He left things unanswered because he was so desperate for another interaction, even if he was aware that he hurt you in the process of doing so. I bet, in his mind, that's a small price to pay for getting to hear your voice again, especially now that he knows you care for him."

"I... There's just no way. I want to believe you, but..." Katana stutters. "It's so hard to think that he's developed feelings for me. I mean, I just accepted that he could be a friend to me!" Her entire face goes red as she begins to think of what the two of them could be like as a couple.

They could finally be nicer to each other, and they could be their true selves without having to hide behind the same grumpy mask that they always do. Katana could finally feel what it's like to be loved, to share a laugh with someone who she cares for and who she knows feels the same. They could finally work together instead of separately, their movements beautifully synced and their skills working in tandem.

After a long day doing one of their jobs, Katana could even fall asleep next to him, and then he could hold her in his strong arms all night. His metal arms that could endure every bullet, every blow fired his way and could shield her from anything. They would have each other's backs, both in public and in those private moments when they each need comfort.

She bet he would be a wonderful father, too, teaching their children how to defend themselves. He'd be kind, patient, and she could totally see him being one of those dads that would sneak the kids out of the house to go practice their skills. Then, afterwards, Katana would meet them at the shooting range or the arcade and then they would have fun, together. If any trouble ever came their way, she would be able to count on her partner to be protective, to always keep their family safe.

The more she thinks about it, the young assassin can't help but start to swoon over those fantasies. That's all she'd ever want in a partner, and she can't help but notice that WPNZ could end up fitting the bill perfectly.

"I know that lovey-dovey look." Axol smirks knowingly. "You just realized that you love him, didn't you?"

"W-what?!" She sputters and scoffs, trying to push those thoughts away and deny everything that she's been thinking about her strictly professional relationship with her business partner.

"All right, all right. I won't judge you or anything, but I do have a suggestion." He chuckles, wiggling his eyebrows. "The next time that you guys need to do a job with each other, try working together."

"As if. That would require me learning how to use a gun... a disgusting-ass firearm." She rolls her eyes. "Nothing will make me do that."

"What if you break your new katana? You'll have to come back here. Eventually, I'd suspect taking trips to Japan when you don't know a lick of Japanese could get frustrating." Axol shrugs, and she hates to admit that he has a point.

"Maybe you're onto something, but I have no one to teach me how to use those kinds of weapons. They expect that when you join the company, you can already use anything that requires a bullet." She tries to argue back, still not ever wanting to touch something like that.

"What about your little friend? I'm sure that he'd love to teach you about his favorite weapon, especially if it's a chance to bond with you." He smiles, making Katana angrier.

"Look, would you drop it? I've already said I'm not interested in pursuing a relationship with that asshole." She slightly snaps at him, somehow only making his smug smirk widen.

"You want him to hold you in his big, strong arms. And for him to be the father of your future children."

"Y-you... I-I said that out loud?!" She begins to feel a bit woozy. "All of that?"

"Every last bit, cat girl. There's no need to lie, I can see right through you. Just admit that you like him as more than some quote-unquote acquaintance. Even if you can't tell yourself that, you need to give him one chance to bond with you. See if you really hate working together with him, or if you can't stand guns after he's done teaching you how to properly handle one."

"But I already know that I don't like him. He's always such a dick to me, and don't even think about referencing your anime again, I swear to-"

"Give him a chance, Katana." He uses her real name, something that shocks her into a state of silence. "Trust me, you won't regret it. Even if he turns out to be a completely horrible person once his walls come down, something good will come out of it. That's how everything in life goes. You may befriend someone who you later despise, but then you could end up finding your lifelong partner through people they knew. I know, even though I have a lack of romantic experience, that the right person will find you. The perfect girl will find me too, and the best thing about that person is that they don't have to be perfect for anyone else. Hell, even if your lifelong partner turns out to just be a friend, they'll make you happy, and that's what matters in the end." He goes off on another one of his therapeutic rants, but Katana finds herself listening this time.

"I just... I don't know." She is still conflicted.

"Just try. You'll be happy you did." Axol leans closer to her, putting a reassuring hand on her shoulder.

"I gue-"

Before she can answer, there is a deafening screech that rings out from Thomas' wheels, signaling that his brakes are getting slammed on. Both people fly in separate directions as he comes to a stop, slightly thudding against a wall. Katana groans and looks up to see the problem, but her eyes slightly widen when she sees that the tracks have ended. There is a large sign on the brick wall that says something in Japanese, and she doesn't even bother to put herself through the pain of reading it.

Axol slowly gets to his feet as well, noticing the sign and smiling. He taps Katana's shoulder, getting her attention, as he begins to talk again.

"I painted that once these tracks were finished." The human-like axolotl points out. "It says: Welcome to Yokohama, Japan's 'horizontal beach'. That's what the city's name directly translates to in English." He explains.

"That's a good painting." Katana compliments him. "These flowers are nicely drawn, and the whole thing's in great shape."

"Well, thanks! No one's ever seen it before, but I'm happy that you enjoy it. I really did put a lot of time into this mural because Yokohama is like my home now. Inkopolis is in my past, and I'm happy that I've moved on and created a productive life for myself-"

"Ayy, we finally hit the spot! Mission accomplished, fam. Driving you here was a total vibe, Axol!" Thomas interjects in the middle of our conversation. "And who could forget that cute bean you brought? It was lit chugging with you!"

Axol's expression turns from calm and relaxed to one of pure terror as he scrambles for the train's exit. Katana just stands there, trying to decipher what the train said, before Axol reaches to grab one of the strings on her hoodie. He grabs thin air, as her cat-friendly hoodie didn't have any addictive string, and grumbles, instead resorting to lightly pushing her onto the stairs.

"Cat girl, we have to go! He's gonna blow!" He screams, jumping off the train as she senses the urgency, also running off right as Thomas toots his horn and poofs into a cloud of dust like Goku before him.

"Shit!" She yells, basically diving onto the sidewalk to avoid falling on the tracks.

Katana breathes heavily, the adrenaline wearing off. She wondered why Axol wanted her to leave so quickly, and she was now gasping for breath. The wind got knocked out of her, and her hands were scraped when she jumped off the train.

"Are you okay?" Axol checks to see if she had any major injuries, sighing in relief when she appears to be all good. "If you'd have stayed on Thomas, it would have been a forty-foot fall onto sharp train tracks! Not to mention, there would have been a high risk of you disappearing with him altogether!" He acts like a concerned mother, helping her back on her feet and keeping a very close eye on her.

"Deadass?" She huffs out, very quietly. "You're tellin' me that an anime version of Thomas the Tank Engine could've just ended a skilled assassin's life?"

They stand in silence for a moment, staring at each other with completely blank expressions. They let the reality of their situation sink in, just for a moment. A cartoon train nearly took out the great Agent Katana. Then, they burst into laughter at the sheer idiocy of what had just happened.

It was right in that moment that something changed in Katana.

That was the first time in years that the secret agent has truly had a laugh, and it felt good. It filled her with a sense of joy that she thought she may never feel again, especially after she spent most of her recent years dealing with the grief of everything that has emotionally scarred her in the most brutal ways. Yet here she was, laughing her head off with a complete stranger in the middle of his private Japanese train station.

The weird thing was that the longer she thought about it, the less of a stranger Axol seemed. They had bonded, despite it being in a weird way. They had many things in common, and it was refreshing to be around someone who she felt like she shared things with. Well, things that they shared that weren't the love of killing and money. That much was a given with both WPNZ and all the agents who she saw in the company's main building when they had check-in meetings.

She thought she could call WPNZ a friend, because he seemed to know her better than she had ever known anyone else. Yes, she was still somewhat willing to give him another chance, but it was Axol's weirdly persuasive words that made her even consider that he deserved it. She had bonded more with this man who she met off the street in thirty minutes than she ever had with the man who she thought she'd been close with for the past ten months.

It was an eye-opener, honestly. She found herself wanting to go through the effort to be a better business partner to WPNZ because she's felt what it's like to have someone who she can bond with, cry with, laugh with. And the fact that this was in such a short space of time really boggled her mind. It made her feel like she could become friends with anybody, if she put in that tiny bit of extra effort. This feeling of pure joy is something she could get used to.

"That sounds so stupid the more I think about it. Concerning and dangerous, but... absolutely ridiculous." He chuckles, making soft eye contact with the cat girl. "We should go up these stairs; I think you'll be excited when you see where we are."

Katana raises an eyebrow at him but follows him up the seemingly handmade dirt staircase to get back above ground. They reach a manhole cover at the top, and Axol opens it to reveal a bustling city. It is lit up by both the moon and the light pollution, but she found it to be beautiful. They were right next to the water in the bay, and a building shaped oddly like a manicured fingernail was only a few hundred feet in front of them. Katana was in awe when she realized that the weird building was indeed her hotel.

"What the hell?" She is at a loss for words.

"My house is a three-minute walk. The two most popular places to stay in Yokohama are within view, and I'm hoping that one of them is yours." Axol smiles at her before explaining. "There was not a good place to end the tunnel that was any closer to my own home. Especially because the characters I drew to help me had zero IQ, meaning that if we were to build in the wrong spot the whole thing would collapse. Seems to have worked out well for you in this moment, though."

"Yeah, this is... rad, I mean, I'm really-" She gets cut off as Axol continues to excitedly talk to her.

"And it's only 9:16. Even if the Thomas I drew today was derpy, he was efficient for what he was." He taps his watch in a boastful manner, eliciting an eye roll from the cat-like woman.

"I'm not going to lie, that's impressive. But I'm about ready to fall asleep." She yawns as she says this, covering her mouth with her paw. "I'm so jetlagged, it's not even funny. Especially after that whole weird emotional swing I did on the train."

"Crying can definitely drain your energy." Axol nods, then he looks at the ground for a moment before looking back at Katana. "Well, cat girl, it has been a pleasure. But I think this is where we'll have to depart."

"Oh, yeah." She also looks a bit downhearted about the fact that she'll have to bid farewell to him, but she needed to check in as soon as possible. "Guess this is goodbye then, huh Axol?"

"I guess it is, Katana." He hesitates for a moment before holding his hand out for some form of awkward handshake.

She returns it, but there is still some unspoken tension between the two once they let go of each other's grasp. They stand in silence for a moment, knowing that they should walk away, but for some reason neither of them wants to do that yet. There was still something that needed to be said.

"Hey, Axol. I just wanted to say... it's been nice gettin' to know you. We kind of have a lot in common, and it's a big refresher compared to all the, you know, gun-crazy maniacs that I'm used to seeing." The assassin breaks the ice, moving her booted foot around on the sidewalk as she talks.

"I agree, this has been good. I haven't talked to anyone who has seen me as a peer in quite a long time, due to my fame, so it's a relief to know that I can make connections with someone and not have it be all about anime." They share a warm look. "I'm not exactly good with friendships or anything like that." After this, he laughs nervously, waiting to see Katana's reaction to his word choice.

"You'd say we're friends, huh?" Her reaction isn't at all what he was expecting as she walks a bit closer to him. "Even if we'll probably never see each other again?"

"Oh please, it's a smaller world than you'd think. Who knows, maybe I'll find my way back to the Mushroom Kingdom one day to find you raising those kids with your 'business' dude." He teases with a small smirk, causing her to blush and lightly shove him.

"We'll see about that whole thing. The fact that I'm even willing to consider the idea of learning how to shoot is crazy in and of itself."

"Just you wait. I bet when we're middle-aged, we'll meet each other again and we'll both have awesome partners and kids. I'm 21 right now, so I'm not nearly ready to settle down yet." He explains.

"I'm 18. If I married or had kids any time soon, I would be out of a job. Could you imagine an assassin who needs to retire at age twenty-five because she's already having kids?" She seems mortified at the idea of settling down too early.

"Sounds like the same assassin who was almost taken out by Thomas the Tank Engine." Axol jokes, catching his new friend completely off-guard as she starts wheezing in intense laughter.

"Got me there, Axol, got me there." She shakes her head, calming down. "But I should really get going. I fear if I stay out here too long, my adrenaline's gonna run out and I'll collapse on the pavement."

"Yeah, all right. It was great meeting you though." Axol sighs, still a little bit sad to see her go.

"Totally. And you're right, I think we will see each other again. Just remember, if you're ever visiting the kingdom, to stop by the Hitman INC building in downtown Mushroom City disguised as a run-down candy factory." Katana nods. "I'll be there, unless I have, like, triplets or something and I'm legit bedridden."

"And if you ever come back here, remember to stop by Akihabara. I might sign something of yours if you get in line." He winks playfully, earning a loud scoff.

"Yeah, yeah." She laughs one more time before taking a deep breath and pulling him into a hug. "I'll see you around, Axol."

He returns the hug for a moment before they let go of each other. They both have bright smiles on their faces, happy to have found their first friend. As Katana gives him one last wave of her hand before setting off on her way, he finds himself calling out for the cat woman once again, quickly jogging back up to her.

"Wait!" He yells, causing her to stop in her tracks and look at him with a clearly puzzled expression.

"...Yes?" She looks up to meet his gaze.

"Remember how I said that Axol wasn't actually my real name? How I told you it's a pseudonym, and I haven't heard or said my name for a long time?" He reminds her of the exact conversation, though she already knew what he was talking about.

"Yeah, I do. What about it?" Katana asks him.

"My name is Daniel Leonardo. Kind of weird, and basic, uh, sorry, that just sounds weird to say after years of going by Axol. I like my pen name, so I'll probably never go by my old name, but I wanted you to know." He feels a bit better now that he's said his name.

"Well, Daniel." She swallows the lump in her throat. "You told me your real name, so I figure it's only fair of me to also tell you mine. Katana is just my alias, and all agents need one in case their covers are blown."

"Yeah, that makes sense. I wouldn't want my first name known if I was, you know, killing people and all that." He fidgets uncomfortably when he says the word kill, but still listens, eager to know her real name.

"My name is Karen Katphish." She sighs. "And I haven't said that in ten months. I'm not proud of Karen, and Katana is the only way I'll grow stronger."

"Valid point, honestly. But if you get to call me Daniel, then you know damn well the next time we see each other I'm calling you Karen."

"Fair." She puts her hands up before turning to walk away, for real this time. "Goodbye, Axol." Respecting his nickname, she smiles sweetly at her friend.

"Goodbye... cat girl." He snickers quietly as Katana crosses the street, walking into her hotel to finally check in and retreat to her bed.

Maybe she'd keep her word to Axol and start to rely on others a tad bit more... But Agent Karen Katana Katphish made no promises.

Twelve Years Later

She had never bought that katana in Yokohama. Instead, she was taught how to shoot by none other than WPNZ himself, who Axol ended up being right about all along. She had never been a twenty-five-year-old assassin. Instead, she really did have those triplets, only at the even younger age of twenty. She had never gotten the chance to see Axol again. Unbeknownst to her, the only friend she ever had and the only one who ever made her change her mind was dead.

Karen's day at work was slow. She didn't expect much else, because her "day" was her working the night shift at a sketchy-ass 7 Eleven. That's all her jobs were anymore, just stupid things that pay almost no money but need to be done anyway. At about six in the morning, she got off work and drove home to make sure her kids were doing okay with their babysitter. Obviously, she trusted the man with her life, so she knew that everything was going to be perfect, just the way she left it last night.

She had unlocked the front door and found her friend, SMG4, preparing breakfast for the kids at around 6:30. As usual, she gave him a hug and thanked him for his help, then tried to pay him. Like every day, he refused, instead telling her that it was his pleasure and that he loves those little goofballs. Then, she had taken the kids to school with him while he told wild stories about the adventures he has daily, and once they were gone, both friends went to the Showgrounds to hang for the afternoon.

Then, at about ten, SMG4 had gone to get a latte from his neighbor's café, leaving Karen in the gaming room to chill. Some days, a few other people came in to talk or play video games with her, but in between the hours of ten and two, she would sleep, awaiting the time for her to go pick her kids back up from school. Every other day, Four would go with her to watch the kids, and on the days he didn't, she would be there at night because she had a day shift. It was a hard schedule to adjust to, but it was hers, and Karen didn't mind the sacrifices she made for her children to have a happy life.

Right now, it is about one in the afternoon. As far as she knows, her and Four are the only ones in the castle. He is working on editing his newest video, holed up in his room with the door locked, and Karen is fast asleep, sprawled out on the couch with a sleepy and content smile on her face. Neither noticed that someone was in the guest bedroom the whole time, she was just staying very quiet and going through a box of old things.

"Oh, Axol." A high-pitched voice sighs, staring into the box. "Figured I might as well go through this last box, huh."

Melony quietly giggles upon seeing a few pages of Axol's old manga drafts and how romantic they were. Sometimes, the memory of her boyfriend was too much to bear, but recently, she has become stronger and more resilient. Finally, after almost four years of him being gone, she is ready to go through his last box of things. It was marked as "Confidential", and she had been too scared to look through it before. She felt as if it would be defying Axol's wishes, and she would never want that.

But ever since she published her manga, she has been filled with a new sense of confidence. She was ready to see what Axol found confidential, secretive. Mostly, there were a lot of scrapped manga pages from when he was first starting. They were dated in 2009 or 2010, and they were much sloppier than his final works. These pages still made Melony smile, however, because they were made by her boyfriend. And she also found it amusing that he was such a hopeless romantic when he was a teenager.

She continues going through papers until she reaches the very bottom, something that didn't resemble the contents of the rest of the box. Curious, she picks it up, seeing that it is an envelope. On the front, it has a little note that reads:

To Katana/Karen Katphish, From Axol. Date: 8th August 2013. If I never get the chance to see my friend again, please see to it that this letter is returned.

Melony's eyes widen once she reads this, placing the envelope down in her lap. Axol had written a letter to Karen twelve years ago, and it may have been in this box since then. She had no clue that those two had ever met, but this letter must have been extremely important to Axol. He wanted it returned if he would never get the chance to see her again. It had been in a box for four years while it could have been given back to Karen, and Melony couldn't help but feel slightly guilty for not womaning up earlier and realizing that Karen could've been waiting for a letter ever since his death.

She gets up from her seat, letter in her hand as she swings open the door to the guest bedroom that she had half ownership of. She could hear SMG4 typing away on his keyboard, giggling every once in a while every time he added something funny. Then, she set her sights on the partially opened game room door, where she was certain that Karen was sleeping.

Slowly, Melony tiptoes into the room and places the letter on the table next to the sleeping woman. Careful not to wake her friend up, she sneaks out like she was never even there in the first place-

"Melony?" A groggy voice rings out, making her turn around to face a sleepy Karen. "What are you doin' in here? You want to play video games or something?"

"Oh, no. I wanted to let you sleep, so I just came to drop a small thing off." She motions to the envelope, shyly tucking a piece of her green hair into her hood.

"The hell is this, a letter? From who?" She groans as her eyes are still adjusting to being awake.

"Did you ever go by the name Katana?" Melony asks innocently, causing Karen to grow pale and her body to stiffen up.

"A long time ago, yes. Why do you ask?" She questions the melon girl, now very suspicious of this whole ordeal.

"My, um, look. You may remember meeting someone named Axol at some point in your life. He left this letter for you; in case you'd never get to see him again. I don't know how close you guys were, but I assume you know that he's, well, you know." She fidgets, stumbling over her explanation.

"Oh, Axol, yeah." Everything about Karen softens up, the memory of Axol, Akihabara, and Thomas the Tank Engine making her relax. "He's giving me a letter? I haven't heard from him in forever, how do you know him?"

"Um." Melony gulps nervously before taking a deep breath and gaining the strength she needs to say this next part. "I was Axol's girlfriend for thirty seconds. You see, we loved each other for many months, but we were too afraid to say anything because we thought that the other would never feel the same. He confessed on his deathbed, when he was getting possessed by SMG0, the worst villain my friends and I have ever faced. The only way to stop that monster was to..." Her voice wavers as tears prick in her eyes, but she continues. "I had to end Axol's life after we confessed and kissed each other. He's been gone for four years, and I just went through the box that contained this letter today."

Karen puts her paws over her mouth in horror, unable to stop the tears from falling. Her first friend, the one who convinced her to do so much, who basically changed the path of her entire life, had been gone for years without her noticing. Everyone she has come to be close with has known this, and she hasn't. She just thought that he was busy making a life for himself in Japan, that they really would be reunited one day. Yet, this is how she finds out that Axol is just dead. He's gone. And Melony is still clearly an emotional wreck about it, though it happened so long ago.

"Melony, I'm so sorry I didn't know." Karen gets up from her seat on the couch and hugs the young woman who is fighting back tears.

"It's okay, we have to learn how to move on. It's certainly tough to talk about, but wounds can heal with time and help from your friends." She smiles, embracing Karen before pulling away. "I'll leave you to read that letter. It's what he would have wanted."

"Thanks. For tellin' me all this. It's a crazy thing to take in, but I can't imagine not knowing about this now that you've told me." She says as Melony smiles, waving before walking away and leaving Karen alone in the game room once more. "Four years, and motherfucker, I didn't have a clue." She cusses before staring at the faded paper.

Sighing quietly, she rips open the envelope. It was still hard to believe that he was gone, just like that. They had a great bond back in Japan twelve years ago, but she thought he had just forgotten about her. Now that she knows he died, and that he took the time to write her a letter so she knew he had never forgotten about her, it makes her feel more at ease. Axol had remembered her that whole time, but he had been busy with life until he passed away. He had even found his girl who still thought about him every day.

She smiles, wiping her tears as she begins to read what Axol wrote only a few months after their only meeting.

Agent Katana,

I'm writing this letter in case something happens to me. In case we are never able to see each other again, I want you to know that I'll never forget about you. Ever since we met at that payphone and became friends, I've gained the confidence to become more social. It's a work in progress, but I hope that one day I will make many friends and that you will have the same luck with friendships such as those.

Also, just know that if this letter gets to you and I'm not the one reading it, that I'm watching over you from above. I'll know if things worked out with Agent WPNZ (If they did, I told you so), if you learned how to shoot a gun, and if you ever had any children after all.

I hope your life has been great. If I'm dead, please don't let the shock or sadness hold you down. I want everyone who mourns me to move on quickly. Please don't forget me, because that would be sad, but don't cry over my grave every day either. Know that I'm watching and be strong with the guidance from those around you.

I only have one more message for you.

Be yourself, but don't try to do everything by yourself. The people who love and support you will lift you up if you do the same for them.

Good luck out there, Karen.

-Axol

~~~

17070 Words

Notes:

AN: Guys, I'm going to be honest, this took almost 2 months to write... I'm fucking dead. All worth it though because this is my favorite oneshot yet. Also yay, first request I ever got is done!

Chapter 14: Next Best Thing ☁️💔❓{GunShow}

Summary:

TW: Swearing, Slight Insanity, Suggestive Joke

What if Mr. Puzzles actually used his brain in the movie and decided to flee the Mushroom Kingdom with WPNZ and Toomp?

This oneshot takes place during the movie Guns N' Puzzles.

Notes:

Inspired by both the movie and a request I got for GunShow fluff.

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

Mr. Puzzles clenches the bullet that Mr. WPNZ had given him just moments ago, exhaling with a sharp wheeze and turning the corner as they approach a fork in the road. His breathing is coming out in heavy pants as he is extremely conflicted. He thought that he was sure about his plan to betray his new acquaintance to gain the SMG4 Crew's (more specifically, Meggy's) trust, but now he finds himself more unsure than ever.

Toomp peeks his head out from the back of the car, smiling cutely at the two villains in the front. WPNZ chuckles, returning the soft gaze to the slimeball that he acts almost parental towards. The TV headed man, still in his prison jumpsuit, looks over at his two companions and his grip tightens on the golden souvenir from their recent battle.

He bites back the suffocating urge to smile back at them and to engage in another friendly conversation with the gruff man in the passenger seat. If his eyes could bulge out of his head, they definitely would due to how much stress he was under. The junkyard, the raid at the Showgrounds, the damn prison break... all it did was bring the three of them closer when Mr. Puzzles desperately hoped that he wouldn't become too attached to this.

The bond between Toomp and Mr. WPNZ was strong, even a blind person could see that from a mile away. If Mr. Puzzles was being honest, that little magenta booger was more of a convenient background character than a friend to him. They both cared for the sharp-witted assassin. Toomp's bond with that guy was near the point of familial, but Mr. Puzzles still tells himself that he and WPNZ are nothing. All the moments they've shared, including the dancing, the banter, and all the times they've called each other friend and pal don't matter.

Toomp doesn't matter. He doesn't matter. No one else will matter other than her.

There was only one woman whose validation mattered to the troubled TV. He would do anything to make her happy with him, to make her trust him and love him like she did when they were friends. He would hurt, betray, and destroy anything, everything, just to please her. If it meant breaking WPNZ's heart even more than it was, so what? At least he would have Leg- ahem- Meggy. He would always have her friendship.

...Right?

"Fork's coming up fast." WPNZ's raspy voice snaps the driver out of his swirling thoughts, even if the relief comes for only just a moment. "Better pick a lane before Jesus picks one for you." He smirks slightly, expecting a snarky response from his friend.

But Mr. Puzzles just continues to shake, struggling to decide. This should be easy, he has been planning this grand scheme for weeks. Fuck WPNZ and Toomp over, get the crew to be completely amazed by his loyalty to the "good" side, and then have Meggy back. She would be by his side forever. Everyone else could die and go to Hell for all he cared, all that mattered to him was that Meggy was by his side forever and ever and ever and ever and ever and ever and-

His mind shifts from the left side of the road to the right quickly, holding the bullet while trembling and thinking about the phone in his pocket. The Showgrounds or the border? Would he throw everything out the window with his new... pals, or go back to Meggy and feel like his plan and purpose have been fulfilled?

"Almost at the Showgrounds? I really hope you're coming. They all keep saying you won't, but I can't believe that. I'm the only one who's still waiting for you. Please. Don't let me down."

"From that last blast against the Death Fridge. Keep it. Y'know, for all the goopy, sappy memories we're apparently making tonight. Look, I'll help you with this kidnapping thing, cause I got your back. No matter how crazy things get."

Cute honking and slimy noises

He would feel terrible, just wretched, if he left Meggy, he really would. But the guilt that he would feel if he left WPNZ and Toomp was beginning to surface in his mind, really making his thoughts spin. Why was he like this? He felt like he was growing too... attached.

Memes, he might actually care about those two idiots. It might matter to him if he were to go through with everything. His precious, precious plan to get his friend back. No one else could ever be a true friend to him, not after everything that he and his orange-haired gremlin have been through together. It would hurt him too much to leave her, ever. Prison already made him lose enough of his mind, he didn't need to be apart from his dear Meggy any longer.

But he just doesn't know.

He can't decide.

He needs to figure this out.

Before he goes even more insane than he already is.

Now now now now now now now now now.

W̵̢̞͋H̴͈̔͊͜Á̴̢͕͑T̷̲͌̅'̶̥̝̋̎S̶̘̑͠ ̸̜̻̚T̵̘͊Ḫ̷̩͂̕Ě̸̫͠ ̵̼̓͊͜R̷̞̿I̷̯̾G̶̻͠Ḣ̵͇̹T̷̫̾̔ ̵̧̥́̉C̷̱̠̑͝Ḥ̵̍O̵̤̽I̵̞̙͋͛C̸̺͔̀E̸̗̜͛?̵͉͕̒͒!̴̰̆

Mr. Puzzles cut the wheel, causing WPNZ to exclaim in a mixture of surprise and excitement. Toomp gurgles, flying through the very back of the car before woozily getting himself situated. The gruff man has a wide smile on his face after feeling that rush, looking up at the TV headed man and speaking to him again.

"Whoa, living life on the edge! I like it!" He chuckles, not really taking notice of the darkened, broken expression on his villainous companion's screen.

"Y-yeah." His voice wavers and he immediately regrets saying anything at all.

WPNZ definitely notices his weird behavior now. He reaches out to Mr. Puzzles, who flinches when the cold metal hand touches his shoulder. His whole body shakes even more violently as he grips the wheel, his mind teetering on the edge of a complete breakdown. Toomp sees this too and decides to hop in the front and settle on WPNZ's lap.

Now, the three of them just sit there in silence, with Mr. Puzzles driving at an accelerated speed that no one notices for a good few miles.

"Goddamn, pal, slow it down!" The hitman suddenly yells, noticing that they were going ninety miles per hour in a zone that they were only allowed to drive forty.

"Huh." He quietly huffs, slamming on the brakes and nearly sending Toomp flying again if it weren't for his father figure keeping a tight grip on him.

The car jolts to an immediate stop in the middle of the street. They were lucky that no cars were out on such a secluded road in the middle of the night, because Mr. Puzzles was not going to move this car anytime soon. He's panicking, cursing himself for making the "wrong" choice, but knowing that he can't go back because it will completely eat him alive. Not to mention that it would raise even more questions from the man in the passenger seat who he desperately wanted to stay quiet.

Mr. WPNZ raises an eyebrow at his villain partner, who is now shaking and his screen is glitching again. He didn't know how to even begin comforting him, or saying anything to him at all without it coming off as a snarky, underhand comment, so he just quietly sighs, sitting there and trying to figure out what was even wrong with the TV man.

That's when he notices a sign that reads: 10 miles to the Mushroom Kingdom border.

This bubbles up a question in his head that he wants to confront Mr. Puzzles about. As he looks over again, he wonders if this will only further piss his new friend off, but he's too curious to resist asking the question.

"Yo, boxhead. I thought we were doin' that kidnapping gig. What... man, are you okay?" He stares at the man who is still jarred, refusing to look away from the wheel.

"Y-y-yeah." He whispers, very quietly, before taking a deep breath. "Yes. I'm all right." He charmingly smiles, but still stares at the steering wheel that he's gripping tightly.

"Kay. Then you won't have a deal with telling me why you veered off towards the border." He pauses for a second. "Not like I'm complaining, of course. The damn Death Fridge won't find us there. I just wanna know why."

"Maybe it's just my business, okay? Maybe I don't want some armed toaster in my face, either." He growls, trying to get WPNZ to back off for good.

"Ouch." Unfortunately for the conflicted TV man, WPNZ is both too stubborn for his own good and smarter than he looks. "But if you think that's gonna make me stop asking you, you're a lot stupider than you let on."

"Ugh." He grumbles with frustration, tightening his hold on the wheel so his knuckles whiten underneath his gloves. "If you think asking me is gonna make me stop refusing, you're a lot more imbecilic than you let on." He says in a mocking tone, jazzily waving his hands.

"Why are you..." The man in the passenger seat pauses, fidgeting with his hands before leaning closer to Mr. Puzzles. Slowly, he brings his hand to touch one of the TV's straight edges and hold it tenderly. Mr WPNZ turns the TV man's head towards him, finally forcing Mr. Puzzles to stop staring at the wheel and for them to lock eyes. There is a faint heartbeat monitor blush on his face as he stares, unmoving, at the man who just grabbed his face. "Ok, pal. You're makin' me do this because you're being so damn stubborn, you know." There's a slight flush to his face, too, but he'd never let it show any more than that.

"What do you want me to say?" His voice is low due to their proximity, but there is still that same bite as before.

"Tell me why you suddenly gave up on that thing we were supposed to do. You really wanted to kidnap some bozo, like, two seconds ago. In fact, you were so passionate, so obsessed, that you had a fuckin' freak out when I asked you a question about it. I wanna know. It's like what I said before. Teamwork, boxhead. I'll have your back, I just want ya to communicate, yeah? You get where I'm coming from?" He stares deeply into the digital eyes on Puzzles' screen, trying to read the hidden emotion behind his blushing face.

"Look. You were the one who just asked me to let go. Maybe I was being nice, maybe I decided to heed your simplistic advice for once. If I were you, I'd be grateful that someone as sophisticated as myself would have even considered being friends with you in the first place." He argues for the single purpose of keeping the angry conversation going.

"I'm flattered, buddy, but your decisions are definitely based on more than my 'simplistic advice'." He squeezes his TV a bit harder before releasing his grip, making every muscle in Mr. Puzzles physically relax itself. Sighing quietly, he bites his lip before speaking in a low, almost kind voice. "I won't push your limits if you don't wanna tell me, I get it. But communication's a good thing to have between friends."

Friends. Why does that word hit so much harder now? Because the decisions that Mr. Puzzles have made are reflecting that he thinks of that guy as more than just a tool to use as well? He is beginning to realize that maybe Mr. WPNZ is right, maybe he should communicate a bit more. While the villain wasn't one to wear his heart on his sleeve, he agrees that there are definitely times when conversations about emotions and all that are needed. Unfortunately, now just happened to be one of those times.

"Remember when you said that we made memories today?" Mr. Puzzles chooses his next words cautiously, averting his gaze back to the dashboard, suddenly very interested in the speedometer and the reflection of his TV screen in the glass. "Sappy, you called them?"

"What about em?" He leans against the top of the center console, putting his chin in the palm of his hand as he listens to what he's going to say next.

"That's what I was thinking about when I made my decision. You had spoken about Toomp and I like we had almost, how do I phrase this, replaced your family. That sounds quite preposterous, I know, but I think it really influenced-"

"Not too far from the truth there." He laughs. "Good to know you can read between the lines after all, boxhead."

"Excuse me?" Mr. Puzzles' body goes rigid with shock, clearly not expecting WPNZ to confirm such a thing so quickly.

"My kids, my wife, you know how obsessed I was with them. The only thing I could do to cope before I found them again was just... think about them. That's all I could think about. And then when they left me, when they kicked my ass, I couldn't get it out of my brain. It was the same as when we were battling that Death Fridge. I thought of 'em even then. It was pathetic, really, but I couldn't stop until you caught my attention."

"Huh? Me?" He raises a digital eyebrow but he is still completely engrossed in what his villain partner is saying.

"That's what I said, innit? You, me, and Toomp were fallin' after that blast. It gave me a rush, a thrill I hadn't felt in ages. At first, it reminded me of my family, like things like that usually do. But then I saw you." His gaze softens and his mouth turns up before he realizes what he just said. His cheeks tint a little bit and he nervously chuckles, trying to cover up that weird, sappy stuff he just implied. "And Toomp. You and Toomp."

"Yes, of course... Toomp." Mr. Puzzles grimaces inwardly. "For a moment I-" He cuts himself off, knowing how much WPNZ adored the little booger.

"What's that, boxhead?" He raises an eyebrow at the questionable thing his friend said.

"It's just that the thought of Toomp slipped my mind for a moment." He glances back at the blob who gives him a small glare, but stays quiet like usual. "Like it was just us two in the car, especially after how you failed to mention him just seconds ago."

"You know I'd never forget my Toompy Woompy. I was just sayin' that I saw you and it reminded me of how we're almost like a family."

"Don't you be a hypocrite now, my friend. You said you looked at me, and you added Toomp's name a good five seconds later."

Toomp makes quiet garbling noises, sounding like noises of agreement. Then he laughs, the sound like a gloopy, muffled chuckle, and shakes it off. He seems to know something that the other two men either don't know or they haven't picked up on yet.

"Well c'mon now boxhead. How could I forget him? Whatever relationship's goin' on between us isn't exactly familial, but you know I'm damn right when I say that it's the next best thing. And everyone knows that a family wouldn't be complete without a kid." He smirks mischievously, causing Mr. Puzzles to flash him a look, silently asking him to not say something stupid. "Otherwise we'd just be two losers having nobody to call us "Daddy" but each other~"

"ARGH! WPNZ!" Mr. Puzzles screams, turning his body fully away from his villain partner and hiding his bright red face in his hands. "YOU C-CAN'T JUST SAY THINGS L-LIKE THAT?!"

"Your face!" WPNZ laughs, pointing his finger at him and laughing. "You've gotta be the easiest person to fluster ever. I'll remember that one, pal."

He balls his fists, but the TV man can't bring himself to be as angry as he's acting on the outside. In reality, that was actually kind of funny, he just didn't want to admit that it made him stifle a laugh and also still overheat all at the same time.

They sit in silence for a while, though it slowly grows less tense and more comforting. Yes, they still weren't looking at each other, but Mr. Puzzles had relaxed and Mr. WPNZ had basically forgotten the whole ordeal already. The gunman was petting Toomp's head, and the small creature was purring lightly at the attention. The TV man was looking at the trees through the windshield.

It only stayed like this for about thirty seconds before Puzzles broke the silence, a thought popping in his head that he just had to verbalize.

"Back to the... comment you made when you handed me the bullet. Now that we're an official group, or, family, or whatever, there's, um, one thing I would like to do." He sighs, glancing back up at his friend. "One more memory I'd like to make."

"Ok, go for it I gue-"

Puzzles doesn't give WPNZ any time to respond, mirroring the exact thing he had done before and cupping his face with his hand. The immediate action makes the walking weapon reflexively flinch and shrink back, but his face is held too tightly for him to squirm away.

Then, the man in the orange jumpsuit tenderly caresses his cheeks, leaning even closer as his screen hovers dangerously close to the hitman's face. Toomp, who has been staying silent this whole time, blinks before his mouth goes agape. Mr. Puzzles can't second guess himself now, he's too far in. Luckily, he doesn't even give himself time to entertain his subconscious.

The TV leans in, his plans discarded as this weird gut feeling takes over his mind. The basketball was never met by the villain and therefore never won over. And the toaster? The toaster was loving whatever the hell this was. The rush, the thrill, all of it, not having experienced it since he first fell for his ex-wife. Goodbye, Beg-Leg-Meg-whatever. The two real friends were ready to live their lives now.

But would friends ever be the correct word for them anymore? Would that describe the relationship they had and explain all the tender moments they found themselves sharing and secretly reveling in? Could it ever justify why one of them was leaning in, and the other had stopped trying to move away? Would the word "friend" ever be able to explain the passionate kiss they shared in the car that night? The singular action of a mouth on a TV screen that cemented... everything?

No, it wouldn't.

And maybe, for once, Mr. Puzzles was content with going off-script.

~~~

3052 Words

Notes:

I was too inspired by this amazing movie to resist. I'm a GunShow shipper now and this is how I'm coping with their divorce.

Chapter 15: Stepdad ☁️💔 {CatVideo}

Summary:

TW: Swearing

SMG4 loves babysitting Karen's kids whenever she works long shifts, and they always have a lot of fun. But when Cory calls SMG4 "Dad", things between Karen and the Meme Guardian begin to change.

This oneshot takes place a month before the Karen arc begins.

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

"Hey, kids, SMG4's here!" The twenty eight year old single mom calls down to her children.

"Mister Four!" The oldest triplet, Katie, yells as she runs down the stairs. "Come on, Zack and Cory!"

"I'm coming." Zack, the child who was the most rebellious, sticks his tongue out at his sister, who just laughs playfully.

Cory, the littlest, cutest, and youngest, sits at the top of the stairs before sliding all the way down on his knees. He giggles happily as he zooms to the first floor. When he reaches the bottom, he adjusts his helicopter cap on his head and skips over to his mom.

He would have said something, but he decided against it. He's not super confident with how he talks and how he expresses himself. Instead, he makes silly meme noises or mumbles, which his siblings and mom have rapidly picked up. Right now, he was quietly humming and holding out his arms, which Karen quickly notices and picks him up.

"Hey, munchkins." She smiles, ruffling Zack's hair and kissing Cory's forehead. "Now, remember what we talked about?"

"About babysitting, right, Mama?" Katie asks, earning a nod.

"Duh. What'd you think it was about?" Zack narrows his eyes.

"Anyway. I remember, Mama." Katie says, flashing a look at her annoying brother before continuing. "When you're gone, there's three rules. One, whatever Four says goes. Two, if there's anything wrong, call you right away on my phone because I'm the most responsible." She responds, as responsibly as ever.

"By five minutes!" Zack interjects, feeling like he just has to say something in that moment.

"And of course, rule number three is to have fun!" Katie says, simply ignoring her annoying brother as she smiles at her mom.

"Very good, Katie. Now, I'd like to hear you all agree with me again about these rules." Karen says.

"Okay." Katie and Zack reply, with the younger one of those two still making a grossed out face.

When their eyes turn to Cory, who is still in his mom's arms, he flashes a shy thumbs up and mumbles quietly. They all smile at him, Karen rubbing his back.

"All right, kids. I'm trusting you to be good." The mother nods before unlocking the front door and turning the latch.

"Hey, kids!" Four smiles, his enthusiasm lighting up the room.

"Four!" Katie and Zack yell, running up to the YouTuber and giving him a big hug.

"Hey, SMG4. Thanks again for all this." Karen smiles sweetly at him, causing his cheeks to turn a bit pink.

"No problem, Karen. It's my pleasure, really." He chuckles. "So, fish for dinner?"

"Yeah. I'll be back at eight." She says, putting her purse over her shoulder and placing Cory down on the floor. "Be good to Four, all right?" She yells out to her kids, who give no response.

"Come on, Mister Four! Let's play Minecraft!" Katie yells, tugging on the leg of his pants.

"See ya, Karen." He waves one last time as she closes the door.

"Bye." She says, walking down the stairs to her driveway. "I know you'll take good care of them." She whispers to herself as she gets in her car.

~~~

"Alright, Cory. To craft a sword, remember that goes in the middle." Four says, guiding the little kid's controller on the screen. "And once we have all our weapons and armor ready, we can defeat the ENDER DRAGON!" He screams excitedly, making all three children's eyes go wide with excitement.

"You really think we can, Gooby4?" Zack asks, causing Four to chuckle at the nickname from when Zack thought he was making brainrot videos.

"Heck yeah! We can do anything! So long as we work as a team and try our best!" He says, encouraging them as Cory finishes his diamond sword.

"Mission success!" Cory memes, clapping his hands together as his character holds out his new shiny weapon.

"Wow, that looks great!" Four ruffles Cory's fur. "Now let's go kill that dragon!" Cheers erupt from all three of them, but Katie looks troubled. Four quickly picks up on this, placing a hand on her shoulder in concern. "Hey, Kate. What's up?"

"Once we beat the Ender Dragon, the game will be over. And you watch us a lot, so I was thinking maybe we could win the game next time?" She says quietly. "Maybe we could watch one of your videos until Mama gets home?"

"Katie Katphish..." Four says with an unreadable expression. "That's a great idea! Let's do it! Is that okay with you boys?"

"Yeah!" Zack yells as Cory gives a thumbs up to Four.

As the man sets up YouTube on the TV, the latch on the front door clicks and the knob turns. There are a few friendly knocks on the door before it opens, revealing Karen. She had bags under her eyes, but she looked very excited to see her kids. Holding her arms out, she calls for them and they go running.

"Hi, Mama!" Katie says, hugging her tightly. "We had the best time with Mister Four!"

"Yeah! We ate yummy food and played Minecraft!" Zack agrees.

"I'm glad you kids had fun. And sorry I'm late, SMG4." Karen apologizes, looking at the clock which read 8:45. "The boss kept me so late today."

"You're good! I like hanging out with these kiddos." Four says, reassuring the single mom who breathes deeply.

"Well, how much do I owe you?" Karen asks, taking out her wallet.

"Hell no!" Four says, putting a hand over hers and lightly pushing down her wallet. "You're not about to pay me. I do this because I want to help you out, not because I want any of your hard-earned money. What would be the point to give me things that could be used for your family?"

Karen is rendered speechless as she simply puts her wallet down in her purse. Then, she walks up to Four and gives him a tight hug. He freezes for a moment in shock before hugging back. The woman rests her head on his shoulder, and her tears of gratefulness stain his shirt. Four doesn't care, however, because he's just happy to help.

"Thank you so much, SMG4." She cries out. "You don't know how much this means to me. I'm so lucky to have someone like you in my life." She smiles, leaning close to him and patting him on the shoulder. "You're the greatest person I've ever met."

"Gee, Karen. Thank you." Four blushes, getting a little bit flustered as she pulls away from the hug.

"You have to go, I'm sure." The single mom says, wiping her tears with a hint of disappointment in her voice. "Come on, kids. Let's say bye to Mister Four."

"Bye. See you next time!" Katie waves politely at him.

"Do you have to go so soon, Gooby4?" Zack asks, his eyes wide as he makes the please face at the Meme Guardian.

"I'll be back whenever you guys need me again, promise." Four reassures, taking another glance at Karen.

Just as he is about to say his final farewell, Cory makes a noise as his way of calling out to SMG4 one last time. Four acknowledges him, leaning down to his height and giving him a warm smile.

"See you, kid." He says, giving Cory a fist bump and winking.

"B-bye, D-Dad." The little child says, his speech a little bit broken but still perfectly understandable.

"Dad?!" Everyone else in the room screams as they are shocked for two reasons.

One, the kids never knew their father. This much was inevitable. And two, Cory had never spoken before. Not in his whole lifetime. So to hear words come out of his mouth, now of all times, was unexpected.

"Oh, Cory..." Karen says, tearing up and hugging him tight to her chest.

"Uh- um- I should maybe get-" Four stutters awkwardly, trying to head for the door before Karen grabs his sleeve and pulls him backwards.

"Stay for just a little longer, okay? I want to talk with you." Karen says. "Be good for five minutes, kids. Mister Four and I will be outside." With that, she drags the already flustered man out to the front porch. Closing the door quietly, she looks up at Four with a weird expression. "Did you tell 'em anything that would make them think..." She says, her voice trailing off.

"No, of course not. They know I'm their babysitter!" Four raises his eyebrows. "At least, Katie and Zack do. I didn't think that Cory would tie my involvement in your life with that."

"Well, what are we even supposed to say to him? Their dad left when they were super young, he left me all alone." She tears up before shaking it off.

"Karen, I'm sorry, I didn't know that. Maybe he learned about the family tree or something in kindergarten?" Four suggests.

"They go to school, but they're taught different. They're with all of the meme kids because they're... I don't even know what I am. Half human, half cat? That's been something I've been wonderin' my whole life. When I was 18, I found someone like me at work, and I thought we were just meant to be together. I let hope cloud my judgement and got into a serious relationship with a man I didn't know much about. Then, when I was pregnant, he was more focused on his job. I realized I made a mistake. Their dad left, then I just never talked to them about it. Thought it would be cool to just forget he existed." She sighs, running her paws through her hair. "But I guess Cory must've thought that we were a normal family. Naturally, since you're the only male who's close to my age, he thought you were his dad. That probably freaked you the hell out, though. I get that."

"It surprised me, but I get why a little kid would think that. I am around a lot." Four says, showing understanding to the emotional woman next to him.

"You know what, SMG4? I like to think of myself as a strong female, and one hell of a good influence, but sometimes it doesn't seem like enough. I feel really dejected and depressed at times, and I feel like I just need an extra helping hand. Just for someone to be a part of this family and help provide. And let me tell ya, your help's just turned my whole world around. You just do all these things for me without asking for anything in return." Karen says, looking back up at him with an expression of vulnerability.

"Of course. I'd do anything to help you out." Four says.

"But why? How could you care so much about me and my kids? We're just one family out of the whole world. Why do you even wanna help us?" She asks, clearly curious.

"Karen, I really like you. I think you're great, and you have way too much on your plate. I've known you for a while, and now that I know your struggle, the least I can do is try my best to lighten the load." Four says, his face flushing ever so slightly.

"O-oh. SMG4..." Karen stutters. "I think you're pretty great, too. I'm super grateful for you, don't forget that."

The two of them stare into each other's eyes, their gazes slowly beginning to soften. Four reaches forward for Karen's human-like paw, holding it tenderly. A look of surprise washes over her face before she squeezes his hand as if to tell him that whatever they were doing was mutual. They move even closer, Four's other hand trailing to the small of her back and her other paw resting on the side of his face gently.

They were holding each other very lovingly at the moment. They stared at each other so tenderly that hearts nearly appeared in their eyes. Speaking of hearts, Karen's was jumping basically into her throat at this point. She had never felt like this in her whole life. Not even when she thought she was in love with the father of her children. This feeling was different. She felt like she was looking into the eyes of the love of her life.

Although this was the first time that they were sharing a moment like this, they could just tell that it felt right. Certainly more real than any love Four had ever experienced. He could tell what Karen was thinking, and she was almost certain that the butterflies were in his stomach too.

The two were almost in sync now, leaning their lips together in perfect harmony. Four brushed a strand of hair out of Karen's face, which made her quietly giggle. All of this reminded her of being younger again, like SMG4 just took the years away from her. They were about an inch away from each other's mouths, their eyes fluttering shut, about to change their relationship forever.

Then, the front door swings open and Katie peeks her head through. The light shines on the two, exposing just exactly what they were about to do.

"Hey Mama, do you know if we have time to watch some TV before we go to- oh!" Her eyes widen once she sees Four and Karen about to kiss each other.

The two pull away, quickly and awkwardly, both simultaneously scratching the backs of their necks.

"Katie, uh, no. It's getting pretty late. How about we get you three into bed?" She says, blushing furiously.

"Yeah, I'll leave you guys be." Four says quietly, putting his hand on the banister of the porch. "See you next time, Karen?"

"Okay, SMG4." She says with a very sweet smile plastered on her face.

He quickly walks away, desperately trying to calm his beating heart. Karen tries to do the same as she walks in with her daughter. She motions for the boys to walk upstairs with her, and they follow. Katie was very curious about what she saw, though, and she didn't just want to let it go. So, once they were up in bed, she tugged on Karen's shirt and asked her a question.

"Mama, are you in love with Mister Four?" She asks innocently.

"Um, it's too early to tell. But he definitely wanted to see us again, so that's good." She smiles to herself.

"Well, I think it would be good if you loved him. I really like Mister Four, and he would be a good Dad." Katie says. "Even if it's too early to know for sure. Goodnight, Mama."

Karen's eyes widen once she realizes what her daughter is saying. She would want Four as a dad? What did this mean for their relationship? As she turned off the light, there were many questions going through her mind. Would Karen want Four as a part of their family, too? Walking down the stairs to the living room, she realized that she might actually want that.

Is this what falling in love felt like?

~~~

 

2441 Words

Notes:

My school is starting soon, so I probably won't be able to write as much as I'd like, but I'll try.

Chapter 16: Porta Potty ☁️🥝🗑️ {SMG34, Megari}

Summary:

TW: Swearing, Making Out

A few members of the SMG4 crew get into legal trouble and have to resort to hiding in a porta potty. But what would you do if you were being chased by the FBI at a pool?

This oneshot takes place after the episode Hobo Mario.

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

"Come on, come on!" Meggy yells, dragging SMG4 by the arm.

"Chillax, squid." SMG3 rolls his eyes as he walks beside Tari.

The four close friends decided to take a day off today and spend it at the newly constructed attraction, PoolMall. Yes, it was exactly like it sounded. A mall that was built like a water park, with slides to get everywhere, and slip n slides to glide down the hallways. It sounded like a dream, especially since their last vacation was to Western Spaghetti. This was a good place to just get away from everything... more specifically, to get away from Mario.

He was being an asshole lately. Between the whole pranking incident and the time that his cheese demons completely shut down the castle, everyone had enough of Mario. The four people who were the most stressed about it decided that they would just take a day to relax and have fun amongst themselves.

"I'm plenty chillaxed!" Meggy yells before taking a deep breath. "Sorry. It's just so weird that Mario's not here. I'm used to him just annoying the hell out of me all the time."

"Well, I think he's okay. He can just be a bit... chaotic at times." Tari shrugs, adopting her usual positive take on things.

"Sometimes? Try every damn day." Four sighs, pinching the bridge of his nose.

"But." Three interjects as they get closer to the entrance. "That doesn't matter, right? That's why we're taking the day off. To just let all this shit go. We'll all get to go back to the Showgrounds tomorrow when it's fumigated."

"Look at you being all optimistic! Looks like we really did rub off on you." Meggy teases, punching Three on the shoulder once he and Tari catch up.

"Shut it, Meggy." Three frowns before he reaches the entry booth for the PoolMall. "Hi, that'll be three adults and one midget, thanks." He chuckles, smirking at the ex-inkling.

"Goddamnit, SMG3! I'll kill-" She is about to attack him before she realizes that she is in the company of a stranger. "Ha, sorry. Four adults, please."

"Four adult humans?" The girl at the ticket booth blinks rapidly.

"Yeah, unless you have a discount for Meme Guardians?" Four asks. "'Cause we'll take that."

"Meme Guardians? As in, the people who turn memes into energy, traumatizing them forever?!" Her eyes widen as she backs away.

"Oh, great going, SMG4. You scared the living shit out of her." Three scoffs. "Meme Guardians help restore the balance of the universe. Sorry if any meme you know was hurt by those powers."

"No! No, no, no Meme Guardians allowed in PoolMall. They will turn all the meme employees into energy!" She shrieks.

"Look, kid. We're not going to hurt you guys. We just want to have a nice pool day!" Four tries to explain.

"Stop it! Go away!" The girl persists.

"We're not all Meme Guardians. You know, if you just wanted to let us girls in, that'd be great." Meggy whispers to her.

"What the hell, Meggy?" Four and Three both say at the same time.

"The power of Christ compels you!" She screams, holding up a cross.

"We want to go to the goddamn mall! Let us through, now!" Three yells back at her, finally losing his temper and getting in her face.

"Security!" She yells at the tippy top of her lungs, causing them all to jump back in surprise. "Get the Meme Guardians!"

Suddenly, a group of about ten burly men run to the teenager's aid, each holding a gun and wearing armor. These were obviously not just your typical mall security guards. Upon closer inspection, the friends could see that the men had the letters FBI inscribed on their uniforms. This made them even more shocked.

"C-can't we all just be friends- Eek!" Tari shrieks as an FBI agent jumps at her, causing her to drop all the pool stuff she was carrying.

"Run!" The shorter girl screams, booking it into the parking lot as she grabs a hold of Tari's hand tightly.

Four and Three take one look at each other before following the girls, running as fast as they can past the fence. The agents hurriedly go after them. All four friends knew that it was pointless to run from FBI agents, however. They needed to come up with a plan, and fast. There was a concrete path that lead up to the mall that was about ten feet long, and they had to hide quickly or make some kind of distraction. Without saying anything, Meggy drags Tari to the left side of the building. She quickly motions for the other two boys to go to the right, and they nod.

Once they both go their separate ways, Meggy sees a door and dives through it with Tari. She doesn't give a second thought to where they went, but it worked. The agents all ran past them because of her quick thinking. Tari shuffles closer to Meggy, and she whimpers quietly.

"Where are we?" She whispers, looking around before Meggy turns on her flashlight.

Then, they both notice that they're in a storage unit. It was peculiarly stinky, and they didn't realize why until they noticed that they were in the room where PoolMall stored all of their garbage. The longer they stayed in there, the more disgusting it smelled, until they ran out of there breathing rather heavily.

The noise alerted one of the agents, who began to run back in their direction. That was when they had no choice but to run into the nearest thing to them: a porta potty. Meggy quickly locked the door and motioned for Tari to be super quiet. The blue haired girl simply nodded as the agents continued to search the area around them. Luckily, none of them would think to look in a double porta potty in the bushes, so the girls were safe for now.

This place was smelly, but it wasn't nearly as bad as the garbage room. They were okay there, but they would definitely rather be relaxing in the pool. Then, there was a quiet thud in the porta potty next to them, which made Tari tense up.

"Eep!" Tari quietly squeaks, causing Meggy to lean against her friend and hug her.

The contact between them was comfortable. The shorter girl held Tari close, allowing her to play with her ginger hair as they cuddled into a corner. She rested her head on the cyborg's shoulder, making both of them slightly blush. The position they were in was a little bit embarrassing, but they were able to make each other less scared as they waited for the agents to lose interest.

Then, Tari did something unexpected and cupped Meggy's cheek with her hand. The girl got very flustered at this action, but still tried her best to stay calm and quiet. But when Tari leaned closer to her, she couldn't help but question what was happening.

"Tar, what are you doing?" She whispers.

"Meggy, please don't hate me." She says as she connects their lips.

The ex inkling was very surprised, but she knew how much she had wanted this. Ever since Meggy had taught Tari to be brave, she had seen an amazing side of her. She was smitten with the woman, and now that they were kissing, she took advantage of the fact and kissed her back.

Their kisses began to get deeper as Tari leaned her against a wall. Even though she was caught up in the heat of the moment, Meggy hoped that the boys were as safe as they were.

~~~

"Come on, idiot!" SMG3 hisses as they run away from the FBI agents.

They have been chased almost all the way around the building, and there has been no place for them to hide. It seemed like there was no hope for them, until Four saw something out of the corner of his eye. There was a double porta potty that was mostly hidden in the bushes, and they might be able to get in there. The agents had begun to slow down just a bit, and they were just about to turn a corner. It was the perfect time to create a diversion and dive into the porta potty.

As they round the corner of the building, Four grabs Three by the arm and pulls him into the bushes. Then, he takes one of his flip flops and throws it in the direction that they were running before they veered off the path. Spitting out a few blades of grass, Three opens his mouth to insult Four before realizing that his spur of the moment plan actually worked. The agents continued on, confused at how the Meme Guardians could have gotten so far ahead of them.

But Four's plan wasn't exactly done yet. Once they were behind the bushes and outside of the agents' sight, he grabbed Three again and dragged him into the unlocked toilet. They thudded the door shut, locking it quickly, before Three tripped, bringing both him and Four down. Now, Three was pinned diagonally against the wall as Four was heavily breathing on top of him.

Biting his lip, SMG3 blushes heavily as he tries to get up. Curiously, Four stays where he is and leans a little closer to Three's face. This makes him even more flustered, causing the men to ignore the quiet squeak that came from the other porta potty. Both were getting equally more enticed as they continued to inch closer and closer. Then, their noses touched, which seemed to strike a nerve in Three as he tried to back away.

SMG4 wouldn't let him go that easily, however. He grabbed the other man aggressively by his cover up shirt, causing the fragile thing to come off of him. Three huffed quietly and tried to shield his bare chest by turning the other direction. He hadn't noticed it in the seconds before, but this toilet was completely empty and unused. Four quickly noticed this as well, causing him to push Three against the clean seat.

"What the hell? Get off me, you baka!" Three hisses quietly.

"Why won't you just let me do this?" Four whispers, caressing the side of the other's face lovingly as he turns him back around.

"Because it's freaky." He cringes.

"So?" Four quickly talks back.

"Get off me, or you're going to make me do something I'll regret." Three grows, clearly tired of Four's shit.

"Oh yeah? Do it then." SMG4 challenges, smirking as he refuses to move away.

"You asked for it." He replies, scowling and bringing a hand up to Four's head.

"Asked for wha-" Four begins.

Then, his expression quickly changes as he crashes their lips together. Four is immediately surprised, but he kisses back once he realizes what's happening. The two of them enjoy their moment in the porta potty before SMG3 slowly pulls away. Quickly blushing in realization of what he just did, Three desperately tries to wipe any remnant of the kiss from his face.

"I told you that you'd make me do something I'd regret." Three frowns, turning away from his frenemy yet again.

"Would you regret it if we made out?" Four says, trying his hardest to make Three give in to his temptations again.

"SMG4." Three scolds him. "We can't. We're supposed to be rivals, not... not this."

"Let's change our ways then. Dude, I'm so freaking in love with you. I don't know if you feel the same way, but why wouldn't you if you just kissed me?" Four says, basically begging for Three's love.

"Look, let's just figure this out when we get out of here." Three sighs, looking into Four's beautiful eyes again. "But for now..." He stops talking before kissing him again.

Four was prepared for the kiss this time, and he quickly opened his mouth and allowed Three to slip his tongue inside. The two of them were now aggressively kissing, trying to grab onto each other's hair and clothes. Three didn't have a shirt on, so Four just latched his hands around his waist tightly.

As Three began to pull at Four's cover up shirt, he hoped that Meggy and Tari had found their way into somewhere safe as well.

~~~

After their third lap around the building, the FBI agents were tired. They were pretty sure that the perpetrators were nowhere in sight, and they really didn't want to waste much more of their time. After all ten of them caught up with each other, they nodded in a silent agreement with each other and began to leave the premises.

"Hey! Where are you going? What about the lawbreakers?" The teenage girl running the ticket booth whines.

"Look, they escaped." One of the agents took off her mask, revealing that it was Karen Katphish, one of Four's friends. "And besides. I don't think any of us get paid enough to chase around a bunch of twenty somethin' year olds."

All of them nod in agreement, simply walking away and leaving the employee confused and defeated.

"Oh well. The minimum wage I'm payed isn't enough to catch them, either. RIP, Memeployees." She shrugs before getting on her phone.

Those four would figure out that they were free eventually... and they'll have a lot to explain once they get back home.

~~~

2232 Words

Notes:

Guys this is such a dumb concept... It was based on a dream I had last night and personally I think it's insane. Hope you enjoyed it.

Chapter 17: Author's Note

Chapter Text

Hey guys!

I know I just posted a oneshot, but I have a quick announcement.

My school is coming up in a few days and I won't be updating anywhere near as frequently as I have been this summer.

So no, I'm not abandoning this book or my other one, just don't expect to hear much from me because I'm getting assaulted with schoolwork.

I feel like it was just yesterday that we hit 1K reads and now we're looking at 2K here on this platform, so I also want to seriously thank everyone who's read any oneshot in this collection. Seriously it means the world that people are enjoying these silly scenarios I write in the darkness of my basement.

Also like how did I turn into one of those creators whose least favorite thing they've created is their most popular? My oneshot with the second most reads (other than the first one which doesn't really count because it's the oldest) is THE NEW CAFE. In all honesty I was shocked when I looked at the stats. It's a rewrite of an episode and the only difference is like... a 500 word makeout session. 💀 I know what you are/j

But anyway guys, all jokes aside, I'm mentally preparing for school right now, so I should skedaddle.

See you whenever my homework lets up and I have time to write about these goobers again!

-Lyssa 💙💜

 

Chapter 18: Staying For You ☁️💔❓{SMG34, Axolony}

Summary:

TW: Swearing, Drinking

Melony wants to hold a funeral/after-party for Axol, honoring his memory and celebrating their victory. The funeral service is wonderful, but the party...? It turns out to be quite boring for a certain Meme Guardian. And sometimes, when you're bored, you end up talking to people you normally don't.

This oneshot takes place one week after the Genesis Arc.

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

"Good evening, everyone. Thank you for coming. I would like to take these next moments to say a few words in honor of my recently departed boyfriend and everyone's devoted friend, Axol." Melony smiles warmly as she addresses the small crowd, presenting herself with elegance as she stands at the top of the grand staircase. 

A few others watch her with interest through a slightly opened door, murmuring quietly before shutting up once the melon girl begins to talk again.

"First of all, I would like to confess something. I- I was never able to say this until I learned he felt the same, but I loved Axol. I loved him for months. I admired the way he treated everybody, how he was always so protective of me, and I took a special interest to his art. Especially his show, Two Piece. If you know, you know." She blushes, remembering just how obsessed she was with Watermelon-Kun at the time.

A few of her close friends, specifically Luigi, laughed out loud once she mentioned that. She smiles, gaining confidence to continue her speech.

"I think it was my feelings for Axol and his crush on me that drew us closer over the months that we were lucky enough to share with each other. I tried to convince myself that it was just friendly, but once he got possessed by SMG0, I felt like I needed to be the one who protected him. The one who saved him." She takes a deep breath, blinking back tears. "He- he gave me this comic he'd drawn. When all the SMGs were zapping him with their USBs, I was pulled into his headspace and given this."

She takes a sketchbook out from underneath her podium, holding it up for everyone to see. A quiet murmur washes over them before they go silent, allowing her to go on.

"It's a w-written confession. Drawn, really. He had reciprocated my feelings the whole time, but we were both too scared to admit it. And the next time I got to see him, to tell him that I liked him too, it was also the last time I would ever get to be near him. The first and last time I'd ever touch his face, kiss him..." She trails off.

She hadn't revealed this information to anyone yet, so all the people in the crowd were still listening intently to her every word.

"And I didn't even know it." Her voice cracks a bit at this. "I was so sure that I'd be able to get him out of his own mindscape, out of Zero's hold, with my deity powers. When I realized the truth of it all, I just. I just broke down. Because we both knew that the only way for the world to be saved, to ensure that millions of lives weren't lost, was for him to die. More specifically, f-for me t- to, well, kill him." She takes a deep breath.

"WHA-mmph!" From behind the door on the second floor, an exclamation is heard, but then a hand is clamped over their mouth.

Melony hadn't told anyone about this, either, and she could sense a wave of uneasiness wash over the crowd once they realized what she had done. People even whispered words with looks of disapproval on their faces while her friends just stood there, their faces a ghostly shade of white. She inhales again, trying to ignore them.

"I screamed and bawled my eyes out in hysteria, begging for him to reconsider. 'There has to be another way', I had said. Even though we knew there wasn't. He would've taken the sword to his own throat if his hands were free, but he was chained. Stuck in his own mind while our universe's biggest threat was pulling the strings." Her tone goes somber, a shadow crossing over her face just slightly. "It's neither his fault, nor my fault, nor the fault of anyone else who is standing in this room today. It's what had to be done."

The crowd still looks uneasy. All Melony wants to do is curl into a ball and hide, to live with the guilt and shame she has over Axol's death, but she has to finish.

"His sacrifice is the reason you all are still alive today. The name Axol means something different to all of you, but now I hope that now he will be recognized as the savior of the universe and that his brave sacrifice will never be forgotten." She wipes a tear that was threatening to roll down her face, smiling slightly. "The reason SMG4 and I also set this up for a party is so we can begin anew. Not to act like Axol wasn't a part of our life, but to move forward with our heads held high. It's what he would've wanted."

As her speech ends, the room is eerily quiet for a few beats. Then, Meggy and Luigi, who were in the very front, begin clapping and cheering for the nervous girl on the floor above them. The two are soon joined enthusiastically by all the rest of Melony's friends, the ones behind the door, and the members in the audience who were skeptical of her just a few minutes ago. She blushes with pride, staying quiet for a moment more before she adds one last thing.

"Anyone who wants to say a few words to Axol may come up to his casket, but otherwise I hope you all have a wonderful evening at our victory party." She says, waving once more with another smile.

The crowd gives Melony an encore of their applause, making her face flush again as she walks off the stage. Her fancy black dress trailed behind her as she walked into the door to Princess Peach's room. Her and SMG4 had spent a long time on these decorations earlier, along with converting the balcony into a stage to hold Axol's casket. Once she goes into the bedroom, she hops on the bed next to the princess and the meme-loving YouTuber, sighing quietly.

"T-that was great, Melony. Seriously touching." Four says, sniveling with a bright red face as he tries his hardest not to cry.

"He was sobbing like a baby the whole time. You did great." Peach smirks, leaning back on her fancy silk pillows.

"H-hey!" Four stutters, his mouth turning downward as he pouts petulantly.

"It's-a true!" An all too familiar Italian accented voice calls out. "And by the way, Melony, Mario's sorry for yelling in the middle of your-"

"Aah!" The three people shriek in surprise as they see Mario leaning smugly against the wall.

"How long have you been there for?" Peach asks him skeptically.

"Since Mario crawled through your toilet about five minutes ago." He giggles as Peach's eyes turn red and her fists clench.

"You crawled. Through my fucking toilet?!" She screams, jumping out of her bed and beginning to choke Mario. "What the hell is wrong with you?"

"Mario wanted a front row seat! It's not fair that Peachie and Es Em Gee Four get to have all the fun." He says, BLJing out of the princess' grasp as she grumbles.

"We're the leaders of this castle. SMG4's the head of your silly little friend group, and I'm the owner of your guys' hangout spot." She frowns.

"What? Unfair! Why is Peachie always here when Mario wants to get his party pants on?" Mario whines like a toddler as the annoyed princess just pinches the bridge of her nose.

"It's not my fault that you idiots need constant supervision." She shrugs.

"Idiots, plural? We wouldn't need supervision if Mario wouldn't crawl through toilets or whatever other dumb shit he usually does." Four laughs pointedly at Mario, who droops like a sad puppy at the insult.

"Guys. Axol wouldn't have wanted you to be fighting on his day of remembrance. Mario's right, it's not fair that no one else can be in here, yet we still are. We should all be downstairs, mingling with our friends and enjoying the party." She smiles at Mario, who has now completely forgotten about what they were talking about and is babbling gibberish. "Hey, Mario? Is everyone here?" She asks the fat Italian kindly.

"Edititutatalutu!" He responds, grinning as his eyes go in two seperate directions. 

Peach and SMG4 simultaneously facepalm, groaning in annoyance, but Melony stays patient and looks down to make eye contact with the idiot.

"Could you repeat that in English for us?" She giggles quietly, causing Mario's face to light up in realization that he'd switched languages.

"Mario thinks so. There's Woomy, Stinky, Luigi, Bitchy, BEEG MONKEY, Tari, Little Fishy..." He lists the names, or rather, nicknames, of everyone in their friend group.

"Who the hell is Big Monkey?" Peach inquires, raising an eyebrow.

"He said Meggy, Bob, Luigi, Saiko, Tari, Boopkins, and, uh, Donkey Kong I'm pretty sure?" Four narrows his eyes, waiting for a confirmation from Mario.

"BEEG MONKEY is Steve." He simply answers, making Peach sigh and roll over, officially giving up on this conversation. "There's also SMG1, SMG2, Kermit, Waluigi..."

"What about SMG3?" Four asks curiously.

"We invited Es Em Gee Three?" Mario asks, scratching his head. "Mario thought he still hated us and he was a big old bad guy."

"I guess, but I invited him to the channel's anniversary party. And we're technically Meme Guardians now, and that comes with being partners who rely on each other." Four shrugs, his hand glowing blue once he mentions his powers.

"Only friends who helped us defeat the evil cyclops man are allowed. And last Mario checked, Es Em Gee Three is not our friend." He twists his mouth into a frown.

"He's close enough. A frenemy, maybe. He helped us defeat Zer0, and you know that you'd still be in his control without SMG3's help." Four reprimands, causing Mario to look a little guilty. "But anyway, I already invited him." He laughs it off. "It doesn't matter if he's here or not."

"Do you hear yourself right now? Mario smells gay." The fat Italian giggles, wiggling his eyebrows at his best friend in a teasingly flirty manner.

"Me?! Gay for who?" Four guffaws, clearly shocked at the notion.

"God. You're almost dumber than him." Peach rolls her eyes, turning back towards them. "Mario is under the impression that you're in love with that so-called villain kid who used to steal your videos and tried to kill you. SMG3, his name was?"

"What! Mario, that's ridiculous!" Four yells before grabbing a hold of the doorknob. "I am not gay for anyone, why would I be gay? You're probably gay!" He yells before bolting out the door and down the stairs, pushing past the people who were already partying.

"I've never seen anyone get so defensive over a question they could've just rolled their eyes at." Peach smirks before getting up and ruffling her dress. "You two had better head downstairs to go and mingle, too."

"Buh. Mario's a gonna expose the gays if it's the last thing he does!" He frowns before storming out in a similar fashion to Four.

Just as Melony is about to leave Peach to her own devices in her room, the princess grabs her by the sleeve, causing her to stop in her tracks.

"Hey, Melony?" She asks.

"Yeah, Peach? What's up?" She smiles in her usual sweet manner.

"Just keep Mario out of their way. In case those two boys do end up talking or anything, we wouldn't want their moment to be royally ruined by his idiocy." She laughs.

"That's oddly nice of you, Peach." She raises an eyebrow, but smiles nonetheless. "I didn't think you cared that much about SMG4's love life."

"Oh, you're right. I don't give a damn. I just know that if SMG4 and his little crush end up making out or whatever and Mario interrupts them, I won't get any sleep tonight."

"Never change, princess." Melong giggles at Peach's usual demeanor before skipping out of the room. "You can always come join the party and hang if you want! I'll probably be with SMG2!"

"Thanks, kid." Peach smiles as she relaxes back into her bed and turns off the light. "That Melony, she really is nice to everyone.

~~~

This party sucks ass.

Kudos to Melony for combining a funeral with a celebration, but nothing about those two events meshed together. Many people in the castle were perfectly content, but one person in particular was bored out of his mind.

SMG4 wished he could just sneak out the back door of the castle, maybe go to 7-Eleven for a few hours and then come back to sleep, but he couldn't. He wanted to support Melony and pay homage to Axol. Plus, there was no way he could just ditch everyone when he was the leader of the friend group. 

If he was being honest, though, the night had dragged on for about an hour already, and he was ready to leave. When he first got downstairs, it was fun watching his friends get tipsy and conversing with a few of them. He eventually just walked into a corner, allowing the crowd to just swarm around him and make him seem invisible. 

That was, until a certain person arrived to the castle.

"Damn dead memes." SMG3 had said, picking some leaves out of his hair as he walked in through the front doors. "Yeah, I'm late. Get over it." He scoffed at everyone before walking over to talk to Melony. "I missed the funeral service and I didn't mean to, I swear. I'm going to just say something real quick so it doesn't look like I just came for the booze." He laughed.

"SMG3, you're completely fine. You didn't even know Axol that much." Melony smiled. "You're pretty funny, too. You'll fit in with the rest of us pretty well."

"What's that supposed to mean? I'm not friends with you guys. The universe just picked me to help you save the world." He frowned.

"You're friends with me!" Melony places a hand on her hip.

"I guess..."

"Look, just go talk to Mario and Meggy. If you hate them, then just leave. If you don't, then maybe you should stay a little longer."

"I was planning on interacting, Mel. Don't worry. I just wanted to talk to you a little more because we've known each other for quite a long time."

"You know what? I'm rejecting your idea, goofball. You gotta talk to people who you don't know! Just 'cause I was in your Anti-Cast doesn't mean you can only talk to me." She grinned, trying to push him into the people who were talking over by the dance floor.

"What the hell, Melony?" Three yelled as he was basically shoved into Meggy.

"Go make some new frenemies." She winked at her old friend.

The only thing that was keeping Four there was SMG3, who was mingling with some of the crew from across the room at the moment. Now SMG4 could probably leave at this point, but he was staying for Three. Yearning for a conversation. Even if it was just small talk, he would finally love the chance to get closer to his Meme Guardian partner. Four already knew that Mario would clown him for being gay, but he didn't think of this as gayness. Just the desire to get to know him a little better than before.

Before he could even blink, Four noticed something. Three was no longer with Mario and Meggy. He was standing right across from Four, slowly walking closer to him. As the Meme Guardian realizes this, his face heats up. 

All right, maybe Four was a little bit interested in him. But how could he help it? It wasn't his fault that Three was attractive and funny... at least when he wasn't insulting him. Even though he would never admit to it, the whole night Four had only been staring at Three. No one else. Rivals, shmivals, he needed to talk to him. And this party may be his only chance.

"Ha. Hey..." Four awkwardly side-steps so he is directly next to his enemy.

"Hi." Three raises an eyebrow at him.

"Crazy weather we're having!" He blurts out, mentally cursing when he realizes that there isn't a single cloud in the moonlit sky.

"Has it been? The Internet Graveyard doesn't really have changes in weather."

"Oh. Yeah. How's that going for you?"

"My banishment?" He flashes Four a look of disbelief. "How the hell do you think getting attacked by hostile memes every day is going?" Three rolls his eyes, turning away.

"I'm so sorry." Four puts his head in his hands. "Sometimes I'm just painfully awkward. Usually when I'm nervous."

"Why would you be nervous? We've known each other for ten years. Sadly." Three scoffs again, adjusting his cap as Four begins to sweat uncomfortably.

"W-well, you walked over here, so I had to make up some sort of conversation to have with you."

"What is going on? You're acting so jittery and- and pathetic right now."

"I just wanted to talk to you, and then you walked over here before I had prepared what I wanted to say!" Four defends himself.

"Why would you have to prepare what you wanted to say to your enemy? Just cuss at me and laugh at me for my defeat, like you always used to do." Three says, getting increasingly more confused.

"We didn't get defeated. We won. Kinda what this whole party/funeral is about."

"SMG4. Man." Three scoffs, giving his rival a side glance. "Just because I decided to be a hero this one time doesn't mean that it's permanent. I can't even leave the Internet Graveyard unless I'm given permission by either you or Susan WindexWindowsXPWajoooo."

"I'm sorry." Four echoes his previous words.

"You said that already, you know. Oh, I'm so sorry for fucking up your life, you tsundere!"Three mocks him in a high pitched voice. Instead of starting one of their silly arguments, Four just grumbles, walking over to the drink table. "Oh yeah, just leave me by myself! That's real mature!" Three calls after him.

"Want a drink?" Four calls out, causing Three to swallow whatever insult he was about to say.

"You're asking me?" He basically chokes. "Uh, just a cup of beer I guess."

"K, cool." Four says, trying to not let any heat rise to his cheeks as he pours a drink for him and his enemy. 'You're not gay, Four. This is just a friendly gesture for someone who you're definitely not gay for because you don't even like men in the slightest! Ok, maybe that's a lie, but you don't like SMG3!' He thinks to himself as he finishes pouring the drinks.

"Thanks." SMG3 nods, taking the cup from Four and slightly flinching when their hands touch briefly. "Why are you being nice to me? It's like ever since we met again because of that corrupted meme, you've been inviting me to shit and being all friendly. Don't get me wrong, it's nice, but it's also fuckin' weird. You'd think that you would be more... I don't know, you-y? Like you were last year."

"I'm tired of rivalry. And I'd say we both matured since we've had to work together. At least, as mature as 22 year olds can get."

"I'm 21." Three says the most irrelevant thing he can say in the moment to avoid accidentally sounding sappy or nostalgic.

"You know what? You want to know the real reason I got you a drink?" Four says boldly. "I think that it's nice that we've been talking more now. And since I want to talk to you, I thought, what better way is there to a villain's heart than alcohol?"

"Ha. That might be the smartest thing you've ever said, SMG4."

"Thanks?" He raises an eyebrow. "But honestly. I never took the time in the first place, and I kind of misjudged you, I feel. So, I thought maybe, I could finally get to know you better." His face flushes ever so slightly.

Three smiles knowingly, and Four's eyes widen. He had never seen a genuine smile on this man's face, and it caused his whole face to turn an embarrassing shade of red. The man in purple catches sight of Four's blush, chuckling as he begins to grasp the concept.

"I get it. If I were you, I'd want to get to know me better too."

"Yeah. Since we're, like, cosmically linked and we had to work together to save the universe, I was thinking maybe we could be..." His words trail off.

"Friends?" Three supplies as Four's face twists into a disappointed expression. "No? Maybe- Maybe something else?"

"What are you implying?" Four asks, eager to know where Three's thoughts were going.

"You implied it first!" Three blushes, getting defensive and desperate to change the subject. Then, the answer comes to him once he hears Billie Eilish's song Happier Than Ever play on the loudspeaker. "You know what, scrub? My favorite song is playing. Why don't you come with me to the dance floor?"

"Er, okay?" Four stammers as Three grabs his hand harshly and both of them place their untouched beers down.

"Well, come on, idiot. The song doesn't last all day." He rolls his eyes, dragging him over and placing his hands on the slightly shorter man's waist.

They start swaying delicately to the slow and sad music, a million thoughts swirling through their heads. Four shakily puts his hand on the recolor's shoulders, trying his best to adapt to the dance. The lights which were displayed from the disco ball were very dim and ambient, and everyone around them either seemed to be on the side or have some kind of partner to share the dance with.

"Your favorite song, huh? Didn't take you as one to listen to angsty girly music." Four takes a jab at Three, who just looks at him with disbelief.

"First off, how can you be insulting me when we're slow dancing?" He just simply laughs. "And second, just wait. This song gets hella better." With this, he smirks, giving Four a little dip so he can whisper in his ear. "Wait for my cue, then follow my lead."

Just like that, the slow acoustic guitar begins to speed up and the lights dim. Then, when the singer begins again, it's almost like everything just begins picking up. Three begins dancing with him faster until he lets go of his waist and disappears into the crowd.

"What the...? SMG3?" Four whispers as people dance all around him.

Then, the music goes a little bit quieter again as a hand grabs Four's, leading him to the middle of the crowd. Now everyone can see them dancing to the song like old friends. Some may even go far enough to say that they looked like a couple.

You ruined everything good

Always said you were misunderstood

Made all my moments your own

Just fucking leave me alone

Three sings along with these last few lines before the song goes into an epic electric guitar solo. He grins, nudging Four before pulling out his air guitar and strumming along. The man in white overalls laughs at his doppelgänger as he continues to act vulnerable and funny. 

Then, he pulls Four in and spins him a couple of times as the song continues to play so loud, it threatens to break both the speaker and their eardrums. Now it definitely sounded like a song that SMG4 could see his enemy listening to.

In the final seconds of the song, when it seemed to be winding down for the last time, Three grabbed Four by the overall strap and pulled him close, breathing heavily. A pink blush dusted both of their faces as they just stood there for a second, dazed and dumbfounded. Four was flattered with his rival, and Three was just in shock at what he did.

He flirtatiously danced with his enemy! The man he hated for so many years! He messed with the delicate way of the world by thinking, even if only for a second, that they could be any more than mean towards each other.

Then, they both realized that Three was still holding Four close. So close, in fact, that their noses were almost touching and Three's hand was resting delicately on the small of Four's back. The song had ended, yet they were still like this. There wasn't enough space in between them, and they needed to keep things like how they used to be.

"SMG3, I-" Four begins.

"Look, I think I need some fresh air." He says, looking visibly jarred as he lets go of Four. "I'll, uh, see you around, SMG4."

With that, Three runs out of the castle as fast as his legs would take him. Four stands there for a moment as everything catches up with him. Then, his eyes widen.

"Hey, wait!" He screams, catching the attention of a few of his friends as he follows the man he just shared an intimate moment with outside.

"Where do you think they're going?" SMG2 asks Melony from up on the stage, sipping her glass of Sauvignon Blanc delicately.

"I'm not sure, Two. But something tells me that SMG3 made too much of a friend in SMG4." Melony giggles. 

"Ooh, damn. You know I love me a little romance!" She chuckles, nudging Melony as she points out yet another couple on the dance floor. "But I hope they won't be angry with each other at the end of this. One and I are organizing designated training days so they can strengthen their powers!" She sounds excited by this idea.

"It'll all work itself out. Everything happens for a reason." Melony says, looking over at Axol's casket. "Even if we can't control it, or it's not always what we want." She sniffles, tears rolling down her face as she puts her head in her hands.

"Hon. Don't beat yourself up over Axol." Two looks up at her. 

"I-I just m-m-miss him, Two..." Her voice wavers as she lets SMG2 give her a small hug.

"I know, I know. I-if it makes you feel better, I know what you're going through. Spudnick, my avatar? They were killed by Zero too. Their death destroyed everything that One and I ever knew, forcing us to flee our decaying universe. I loved Spudnick to death, don't you know it. Not necessarily on a romantic level, but they were my everything. Them and SMG1, literally my best friends. I think about their death, how I could've prevented it, and how much I still miss them. But at the end of the day? We're all going to die someday. I'll see them again, you'll see Axol again. It's important to just enjoy life while you're living it." She sighs, slowly rubbing Melony's back to calm her down.

"Y-yeah. You're right, Two. I think I just need to go outside for a bit, clear my head, you know?" Melony smiles. "The fresh air'll snap me out of it."

"May I go with you?" SMG2 asks, to which Melony nods enthusiastically.

"Of course." Melony giggles as they both begin walking down the stairs, engaging in more friendly conversation.

~~~

Finally outside, SMG3 whips out his phone and goes to the portal app. He had to get out of there before anyone went looking for him, especially the man who he had just unexpectedly left. He opens up a portal frantically, shoving his phone back into his pocket. 

He steps through it, only to get stopped halfway by a gloved hand grabbing a hold of his.

A blush rises to his face as he bites his lip, hoping to see anyone other than SMG4. Of course, he already knew what was coming. Cue some kind of insult or scream in three, two, one... Nothing? He looks up, daring to make eye contact with the other Meme Guardian and see what he was thinking. He was met with nothing but a face that looked a little bit confused and hurt.

"Hey, SMG3. Why'd you run off? I thought we were kinda having a good time." He says with a frustratingly innocent smile.

"Look. You're a cool dude, all right? I just don't think I can accept that we're just good now. After everything that happened between us." He tries to explain.

"Uh, weren't we fine like two seconds ago when we were jamming to Billie Eilish?" Four shrugs. "I know we've had our differences. But I want to move past it. You know, friends? Like you said?"

"I said that in the heat of the moment, SMG4. We can't be like that. It doesn't matter that I like hanging out with Mario, or Meggy, or Tari, or whatever. We can't be close, you and I. We saved the world, but it just needs to be normal now. I need to go back to my plans to kill you and stuff." He raises his voice a little bit, trying to tug his hand away.

He grumbles when Four still holds him tight, not allowing him to go back to the Internet Graveyard.

"No. In the last few months, we've come so far. I'm not about to let you just throw all of that away just because... because of some dumb emo reason you're just not telling me!" Four stands his ground, trying to pull Three back into the Mushroom Kingdom stubbornly.

"Why won't you just let go? What's so important about me?" Three demands. "All I've ever done is make you suffer."

"That's not true, Three. No matter what you say, you're wrong about that. Nothing can make me hate you like I used to."

"But WHY?! And why the hell did you call me Three? You're giving me nicknames and trying to be all nice for no reason! We're not friends, and I've made it clear that I don't want to be." He yells even louder now, causing Four to get mad.

"You're just stubborn, SMG3." Four says, dragging out his name to prove that he wouldn't call him "Three" again. "I don't know why you're fighting me on this so much. What is it that you're hiding from me?"

"Well, you're obviously hiding something too. Because there's no way in hell that you'd willingly dance with me to Billie Eilish and not clown me and walk off."

"What can I say? You're a chill guy." Four spits out. "And maybe I like hanging out with you, ever consider that? Someone actually wants to let you into their life? But no! You have to be a little asshole and shut me out!"

"It's because I LOVE YOU, OKAY?" Three cries out, yanking his hand out of his glove. "I love you so much that I can't stand being around you. It hurts me because I know that you'll never get me. So just let me fucking leave. We can't be friends because it's hard for me to control myself around you! It's always been that way, it's why I've always been so jealous of you." Tears stream down the vulnerable man's face. "So you have your explanation. Now you never want to see me again, and I don't want to see you! So just let me live out my banishment, damnit-"

Three gets cut off with Four wrapping his arms around him and using all his strength to pull him out of the portal. He is tackled to the ground as everything he's thinking at the moment is halted. Four pins him down, his face red and his clothes covered with grass and dirt. The moonlight is illuminating Three's face, making his light blue eyes shimmer underneath him. His eyes soften as he places a hand on Three's cheek, causing him to blush.

"You really need to grow a pair of eyes sometimes." Four playfully insults the man who is flattened against the ground.

"So now you're just going to insult me?" Three growls. "After all I just confessed to you?"

"Just let me speak, maybe?" Four raises an eyebrow, still not moving from his position. "I haven't realized it until today, but I like you too. I thought it was just a little phase or whatever, but I know now. I see you as a wonderful man with a bright future. As someone who can change and become an amazing friend to Mario, Meggy, Bob, Saiko, and Tari. And also as someone who could be the perfect partner."

"No. You're joking with me. You can't like me, not after everything I've done." Three continues to be pessimistic.

"I'm not joking, SMG3. I really do like you and I want you to be my boyfriend. If you'll have me. Because I don't care what you've done. You love me, and you've shown that you're capable of changing. I've been watching you the whole night, and you get along well with my friends. Everything just works with us, SMG3, and I beg of you to give this a try. Give us a try."

"Please. Call me Three." He sobs, causing Four to also tear up.

"Memes, I love you so much." Four whispers, getting close to Three's lips and allowing their noses to touch.

No more words were needed as the two Meme Guardians hold each other close. They inched closer and closer until their lips connected, the butterflies in each of their respective stomachs going crazy. They didn't care that they were on the ground, in the dirt, or that there was still an open portal right next to them. The two of them had each other in their loving embrace, something that neither thought that they would ever experience.

Four finally pulls away from Three, brushing an unruly strand of hair from his face. They stare at each other with hearts in their eyes for a few more seconds before Four awkwardly clears his throat and gets off of Three. Then, he holds out his hand and helps his new boyfriend up off of the ground.

Whoa. Boyfriend. That felt so weird to say, yet at the same time, so surreal. As the two still revel in the moment that they just shared, they notice two figures sitting on the moat's bridge, their legs dangling over the edge facing the water. The mysterious people are staring at them, and the realization causes them to freeze like a pair of deer in headlights. Then, both of them let out little laughs simultaneously.

"Don't worry, you two. We won't tell." The shorter woman who they now recognize as SMG2 chuckles as they both breathe a sigh of relief. 

"What good would that do us? You guys are going to have to invite us to the wedding, so everyone's going to find out sooner or later." She winks at the two men, which makes their faces go red as beets.

"Melony!" Three yells as Four stares at them ground with embarrassment.

"You know I'm just teasing, goofball." She says as Two and Four raise an eyebrow at the nickname.

"All right, Mel. See you inside." He waves to his oldest friend, thankful that someone else didn't catch them so early into their relationship. "Damn, I thought she was Mario."

"Goofball, eh?" He pokes Three flirtatiously as they walk back inside.

"Shut up, Four. Let's just go dance to music that makes us look even more gay."

"Sounds like a plan, Three." Four grins as he intertwines their fingers and plants a kiss on his boyfriend's cheek.

~~~

"And then they had pizza all over their face, and SMG1 took a million pictures." SMG2 laughs.

"Oh my gosh, that reminds me of the time Axol told me that he summoned Colonel Sanders to food-fight Ronald McDonald!" Melony squeals excitedly.

"Are you feeling better now?" Two asks her. "Because I found out that reminiscing actually made me miss them less when I was still mourning-" She stops, noticing SMG1 walking outside the castle, talking to... Bob.

"What the?" Melony verbalizes Two's thoughts as they watch the two laugh about some joke Bob had told.

"O-oh!" SMG1 chuckles, waving at his best friend. "Hey there, SMG2! I was just telling Bob all about the Meme Life Cycle."

"MEME LIFE CYCLE? Without me?!" She excitedly shrieks, jumping up from her seat. "You coming, Mel?"

She nods and smiles, the door swinging closed behind the two Meme Guardians and the Garo. 

Looking up at the stars, Melony sees a constellation that resembles an axolotl. This makes her smile and whisper a little something to the sky before she rejoins the party.

"I love you, Axol."

As she walked inside, the stars seemed to sparkle extra bright. Almost like they were saying:

"I love you too, Mel-Mel."

~~~

6000 Words

 

 

Notes:

AN: This is the best one I've made yet (in my humble opinion). I have a few other ideas that I think you all will like as well, so I hope you're excited for what's to come (along with a few requests that I'm working on)!

Chapter 19: A Warm Welcome ☁️💔🌺 {Wreniles}

Summary:

TW: Swearing, Death, Violence, Gore

Wren dies in his collapsing simulation and awakens in the Afterlife. After making it past the gate and into his new home, he quickly realizes that he's not in Hell. No, this is much worse.

This oneshot takes place right after Western Spaghetti.

From Wren's POV!

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Requested by Ominus_Potato

 

It was broken. I was still connected to it, unable to escape, and it was broken.  

Everything that I was working on, everything I threw away, was all for nothing. My body was in pain, crackles of electricity jolting through it and making me feel like I was getting electrocuted, every single time I dared to move. The simulation had been unable to transfer itself into the real world, which had begun the imminent shutdown of its reactor core. All movements were painful as red light shone around me and the building slowly began to collapse. I was helpless, broken, and exhausted, unable to do anything to stop it.  

A few frogs and other townspeople from Western Spaghetti glitched around me as my vision blurred, my heart beating at an accelerated rate. I had become so wrapped up in the simulation, so desperate to hold onto any last drop of fame or skill that I had, that I didn’t even notice when it had become a part of me. I found myself feeling like my own body was slowly self-destructing, pain shooting up from my feet and up to my head. 

It continued like that, electrical shocks and sparks destroying my body and making my vision glitchy, until my feet went completely numb. I looked down, confused and scared, as the pain was still there everywhere else but my feet. I try to move them, just even wiggle my toes to see what is the matter with them, and my blood runs cold when I realize that I can’t. My feet would not move, muscles, joints, and bones completely locked in place, no matter how much I tried to make them do so. 

My eyes widened when I felt the numbness travel up all the way to my knees. I couldn’t bend them now, and fear was consuming my mind as my thighs grew numb. I slowly was unable to move more of my body, and by the time that it traveled to my stomach, I realized the harsh truth of it all. I was dying. And it happened because I’d become a part of the corrupted simulation. 

I grabbed a hold of the wires that were holding my legs and connecting them to the simulation and pulled them out. They had been embedded into my skin, so I had expected to feel some pain when they were ripped out, but instead I felt… nothing. Ink poured out of the wounds in my legs, but there was nothing. Everything was dead in my lower body. Maybe, since I’d ripped out the wires, the numbness would at least stop spreading and I would still have my upper body intact. 

At least, that’s what I thought before I couldn’t feel my hands. 

As it began to travel through my arms and all the way up to my shoulders, I also felt my body begin to droop as I lost control of my stomach, ribs, and core. I began to feel like jelly, and that only increased when my neck and head began to grow numb as well. I was scared for what seemed like the first time in my life, and I hoped that it also wouldn’t be the last.  

The only thing I could control at that moment was my mind, focusing on the beating of my heart. My eyes had closed, and it felt like I had lost consciousness, but I was still aware. I knew what was happening, though I still refused to believe it. 

I was dying. The simulation had taken over my entire body, and now that it is been shut down, I am following in its wake. 

I don’t want to die, but I don’t know how to live.  

I can feel my heartbeat growing slower, my mind slowly losing focus. The one thing that I felt like I had control of in that moment was slipping out of my grasp as the pace of my heart grew slower until it almost stopped.  

Then, it sped up. Faster and faster it grew until it was almost a buzz, impossible to keep track of. I breathed heavily, feeling like I was suffocating, still unable to open my eyes or move a single part of my body. Everything inside me tensed up before I felt my muscles and bones tense up. Then, they began moving inward, and I felt like I was imploding. My body continued to squeeze and compact until it expanded outward with great force, causing me to let out a strangled scream before a weight crushed my body into the ground.  

That’s when everything went completely black. 

~~~ 

My eyes flutter open and I groan, clutching my head. My memory is foggy, and my vision has trouble coming into focus. I feel floaty, like I’m drunk, and then the grogginess hits me like a train. Like the worst hangover I’ve had in a long time, likely contracted from me doing the same stuff I always do. Ten years now I’ve been up too late sitting in that same old messy house with the old TV, looking back on the good old days. Has it been ten? Maybe more like five, jeez, I only stopped winning in 2017, that was five years ago. 

...Six. Damn. 

No, seriously, how did I get a hangover. I’m sure I would have recalled buying and/or drinking enough alcohol to get me to that point. Think, Wren, think. What’s the last thing I can remember? There’s an ever-so-vague memory in my head of an enveloped letter, but that’s it. I don’t know what was in the envelope, if it was even a letter at all. There was a little seal on it bearing a weird television logo, and I just know I held it in my hands. That must be connected to something. 

You know, it’d probably do me some good to see if the letter is sitting on my kitchen table, where all my other mail usually is- 

“Ah-!” I yelp, pausing mid-step as my vision finally clears up. 

I am sure as hell not anywhere near my living room. Instead, I’m floating on a cloud, something that shouldn’t be possible. Why am I here? Where even is here? I can feel the cloud taking me up, higher and higher through the sky as I pinch myself. Jeez, I’ve got to be dreaming, what the hell. I was just at home last night, drinking it up, trying to forget all my misfortunes. Drowning my failures with a good bottle of beer.  

I steady my breathing as the cloud stops rising into the air. It reaches a larger, mist-covered platform that looks fairly large. I stay on the cloud, trying to see past the thick wall of fog that’s obstructing my view, but then a force from behind pushes me off.  

“Fuc-” I yelp before the rest of my swear is cut off by my face slamming into the grass along with the rest of my body. I groan in a mixture of pain and annoyance, clutching my head before I get up off the ground and dust myself off. Then, I look out into the misty abyss... And what I see makes my jaw drop. “What the hell?!” 

About thirty yards in front of me, there is a towering silver gate surrounded by a fence of its same shimmering color. Behind the gate, I can just barely make out a peaceful meadow full of greener grass, full trees, and flowers of every shape and size. I stumble closer to it, enthralled by both its beauty and the way the metal seems to radiate brighter than the sun itself. Small steps lead up to the opening in the gate, and I tentatively make my way to the bottom. This seems too good to be true, like the second I step on the stairs I’ll trigger some kind of trap. 

But what other choice do I have? I can’t try to retrace my steps, considering I got here via flying cloud. Even if this is a dream, there’s nothing out here other than fog and brown grass. I need to go through this gate or at least try until I wake up. 

One deep breath later, I’ve made my choice and I’m lifting my foot up. It touches the stone, and I brace myself for impact, only for it to never come. I relax, feeling relieved, and I am about to take another step up the staircase when I hear a booming, lighthearted male voice start speaking out of nowhere. 

“Quite the opposite, actually.” I jump back, turning my head frantically in all directions to see where the voice is coming from. I’m also a bit confused about his words, but it’s more frightening that I have no clue where this guy is. “I assumed that your earlier exclamation meant that you were wondering if you were in Hell. Luckily, this place is not Hell in any way, shape, or form.” 

“W-what?” I’m a bit perplexed, still trying to match the voice to a face. 

“You are incapable of seeing me, but if you would like something to look at, I suggest you direct your attention to the cloud that is above the entryway.” 

I find the cloud that he’s referring to and look at it with a raised eyebrow. 

“Care to tell me who you are, or where I am, or anything?” I ask, getting a small chuckle in return. 

“Ah, yes, I suppose I do owe you somewhat of an explanation. I am the one hundred ninety-sixth gate into the Afterlife, here to allow you entry. I usually see one person every 3.3 minutes, so I’m afraid I don’t have much time to tell you everything, per se.” He says. “I just have a few questions for you so I can see which sector I will be placing you in.” 

“My oh my. How many bottles did I drink last night?” I nearly laugh at the idiocy of this situation. 

“Pardon? There is nothing on record of you consuming any alcohol in the last seventy-three days. Unless you are talking about water, and in that case, I can tell you exactly how many ounces-” 

“Nah, nah. Those games ain’t going to work on me. Obviously, I’m dreaming, and my mind got completely hammered.” 

“Actually, sir, this is normal procedure. Trust me, I see five hundred people daily.” The entity laughs again, quickly growing pleased with my confusion. 

“This is crazy shit, that’s what. So, I think you should just give me access to whatever paradise there is on the other side, and we’ll both be chill.” 

“Oh, a non-believer. I assume I must give one of my assignments to 195 again. Apologies in advance, friend.” He sucks in air through what sounds like his teeth, and a strike of lightning is heard in the distance. 

“What in tarnation was that?!” I yell, my eyes going wide. 

“I simply transferred the next soul I was to retrieve. Now the gate before me, number one ninety-five, must take care of them. I only did this so I could better educate you about the situation that you are in.” 

“Ugh, I don’t want to be ‘educated’.” I use finger quotes sarcastically. “All I want to do is figure out how I can wake myself up. You got any advice, uh, what was your name?” 

“My name is Sentient Afterlife Terminal Gate Entity Number One Hundred Ninety-Six. But for the sake of time restraints, call me 196. And I am afraid that you will never be waking up back in your bed again. Unless you make an exact replica in your afterlife.” 

 “Cut it out with all the afterlife talk, would you? I know I’m not dead. I would remember if I effing died, all right?” 

“You are certainly a tough shell to crack, Mister... Wren.” 

“How? H-how do you know my name!” I point an accusatory finger at the cloud that I’m supposed to be speaking to. 

“I know everything about my assignments. Wren.” 196 says my name a second time, almost like he’s holding it above my head. “You are a male inkling, you are thirty-four years old, you have gray hair that fades to black, you go by the nickname ‘One Shot Wren’, you are single, and your last address to date was 135 Inkwell Road.” 

“This is a dream. I’m just an alcoholic, I guess. With an extremely inconvenient case of memory loss. Temporary memory loss! That’s some funny stuff right there.” I chuckle, though I still grip my hair and try to make sure that I’m here, that I’m real.  

That I’m alive. 

“Mister Wren. I can assure you that you are not an alcoholic- hold on. Did you happen to mention that you have a case of oddly placed memory loss?” 196’s tone of voice changes, causing my response to his question to be slightly delayed. 

“...Yes? Why do you ask.” 

“Oh my, you should have mentioned this before! No wonder you are in such deep denial about your death. You have forgotten it, as well as the events leading up to it, am I correct?” He asks me, and all I can do is slowly nod, trying to see where he’s going with this. “Ah, you are part of the wonderful ten percent who this happens to. Lucky for you, I can fix that right up.” 

Before I can say another word, a loud booming sound like thunder hits my ears, making me black out. Now all I can see are my recent memories as they slowly begin coming back to me. 

I had received the letter from a mysterious man who called himself Mr. Puzzles. He told me that he could help me become famous again, and I would climb back up the social ladder in an instant. Like any other fame-obsessed, lonely man, I followed a random person’s written directions to an abandoned warehouse and walked into a container. The wires attached themselves to my legs, arms, and neck in a cylindrical glass tube, and then everything went black. 

 I woke up in a completely different world. One where I could do whatever I wanted with no consequences, one where I would always win at everything. Yes, yes, it’s all coming back to me now. I was in a simulation, one that made me the most feared and powerful criminal in a town styled to be like the Wild West. It was awesome, everything I could have ever wanted, but then it got boring. Faster than I expected. I needed a rival, and I had the perfect candidate that would never make my simulation dull again.  

It was the Spletzer kid. Meggy’s potential was stunning. She even won Splatfest with her silly little team of humans.  

Once I found who I wanted, I knew that I could wrap her up in my simulation faster than most others. Ever since I gave her my hat back when I was in my prime, that girl loved me. Praised me like I was her damn idol. All it took was a few misleading clues, and I had her walking right into my trap. Man, I remember how surprised I was when she wasn’t even a bit suspicious about those kids I hired to steal the beanie, or that commercial I had thrown together at the last minute.  

Then I trapped them all in the simulation. Every single one of Spletzer’s friends who were dumb enough to follow her to the Wild West, riding on a train to nowhere. I led her on for a bit, she thought it was real until I finally showed her the truth. And oh boy, when I started teaching her what real rivals do, what I had brought her there for in the first place, she went crazy.  

I pulled her strings, cracked her mind, watched her struggle and break down after a straight month of pure torture. I was in control. I was the one who mattered. 

But Spletzer eventually fought back. Her blue-haired friend tore a hole in the simulation. They escaped and saved all their friends. They tore into my control room, and I was done having everyone rip my world apart. For the second time in my life, my fame was about to be gone, about to vanish without a trace.  

That’s when I foolishly tried to bring them back by bringing the simulation into the real world. After I realized that all my efforts were in vain and I had only aided the imminent destruction of all I held dear, it was too late. The whole simulation collapsed. Sections of the warehouse began to fall. And right along with the rubble, stuck to a corrupted piece of technology and painfully dying before being crushed by a piece of the ceiling falling on my glass container... 

Was me.  

Oneshot Wren, that’s me. I’m dead. 

I’m not alive, I’m dead, I’m not breathing, this really is the afterlife. I’m only thirty-four, and I’ll never have a thirty-fifth birthday. I’ll never see my house, my splat gun, anything on Earth ever again. I was single. I never got the chance to fall in love, marry, start a family, and be truly happy. My fame was all I cared about, but it was meaningless. 

My life was meaningless. 

I remember now.” I say darkly. “I remember everything.” 

That certainly is wonderful, Mister Wren. Now you can answer my questions, and I can proceed with my job as a guardian of the Afterlife.” 196 seems happier now, but I just roll my eyes. And honestly? It’s better to just humor him now so I can go to Hell. It’s where I belong. And it’s where I want to go. 

“Go ahead, hit me with ‘em.” 

“Oh, excellent. Here we go, sir. Please tell me what area you associate with. United Kingdom, North America, Eurasia, Mushroom Kingdom...” 

“Mushroom.” I reply quietly, stopping him in his tracks. 

Dead dead dead dead dead 

“All right. You will be in the tenth Afterlife group. Now, there are billions of citizens who lived their lives in the Mushroom Kingdom, so I would like to help narrow you down to a better sector. Could you name the last person you interacted with that is still living?” 196 asks me, making me growl under my breath. 

Spletzer left me for dead. I thought I had another way out, that I could outsmart the machine. No, she left me, and she was the last one I saw. 

Meggy Spletzer.” I respond, causing 196 to sigh pitifully. 

“Another one of the people associated with SMG4, are you? I’ve been seeing too many of you lately. That poor man will soon run out of friends, fighting all those formidable foes.” He says. “Unless you are an enemy of his that their group has recently defeated.” 

“That guy is a damn baby.” I laugh, not wanting to seem like my focus was on him. “I was after Spletzer.” 

“You do seem to have quite an antagonistic personality, Mister Wren. You will get along well with Mister Niles.” 196 chuckles like he just told an inside joke. “And if you harmed any of the living people in that group when you were down there, I pray for you. Goodness, especially Miss Meggy. The people in sector 6969, also known as the SMG4 sector, love her.” 

“Wait, sector? I’m allowed inside? Isn’t this heaven?” I am struck with curiosity as I lift my head to stare at the cloud like he’s crazy. 

"Heaven? This is the afterlife. Everyone who has ever died resides here.” He explains, sounding even more amused than before. 

“Even all the really shitty people?” I raise my eyebrows. “L-like serial killers?” 

“Mister Wren. The Afterlife is what we like to call a fresh start. But if you make too many people upset or make them feel unsafe, you will be subject to entity-issued punishments.” He pauses for a moment before adding another thing. “Also, if you really want to know, Jeffery Dahmer found a girlfriend who was okay with him eating her, and Ted Bundy got an emotional support dog, and he’s now married. At first, they tried to kill more people, but they quickly realized that everyone simply regenerates the next morning if they die. Then, they complain, and the killers can face cruel punishments that begin to make them rethink their poor decisions.” 

“...Ah. I see.”  

It is silent for a moment before lightning strikes the gate, causing me to scream and jump back into the brown grass. Once I blink and my eyes readjust, the gate is open to a blue, swirling portal. 

“This will take you to sector 6969, Mister Wren. Now I suggest that you hurry, because I have another assignment coming up in about fifteen seconds.” 196’s voice sounds like it’s behind me now, ushering me forward into the abyss. “Have a pleasant afterlife.” 

I thank him, my mind still swirling. This feels like a fever dream, like the second that I walk through the gate, I’ll end up waking up in my house after all, but I remember what happened. My entire body went numb, and my heart practically exploded, I died. There is no reality where I would still be alive, having survived both the simulation’s shutdown and a piece of rubble falling on my head. This is the final part of my journey, eternal afterlife. What 196 calls a... fresh start. 

Then, without dwelling on the past any longer, I run up the stairs and jump into the portal, leaving myself no time to second-guess anything. The gate slams shut behind me, and I’m catapulted into a black void at a physically impossible speed. I begin to hurtle through the liminal space, getting too dizzy to keep my eyes open.  

Am I already getting punishment for the poor decisions I’ve made in the last few months? Was the gate entity lying to me the whole time just to get me to willingly walk right into the end? Maybe this is what the Afterlife really looks like. Nothingness that makes you feel sick, dizzy, and weak. I try to fight the imminent shutting of my eyes for a few seconds before my body gives in, going limp as I continue flying through the darkness.  

~~~ 

“Oh gosh. Oh gosh, Terrance, Peach!” A high-pitched male voice is the next thing that I hear as I begin to wake up.  

"Memes. Another new guy? This one looks like an inkling.” A spunky female voice responds to the frantic-sounding man. 

“He probably got dizzy from The Void. Aww, poor thing.” His voice quickly changes in tone as I feel the grass rustling beside me. 

“We should probably help him out.” 

I wake up in an instant once I feel a hand on my back, my eyes shooting open and the bright sun nearly blinding me as I do so. The guy who was just about to grab me stumbles back with a squeak, nearly running over a little red blob behind him. After that, he runs right into the girl. They both end up falling, and I just blink multiple times. Wasn’t I just in some endless black hole?  

Some clicking resonates from the red animal who I originally thought was just a blob, and as my vision adjusts, I can see that it is a meme wearing a tiny top hat. The woman, who has already gotten up from the ground, has long, beautiful blonde hair and a petite crown on her head. She’s also wearing a puffy pink dress, and she looks as if she’s about 5’9. She smiles at the man on the ground, a cyclops-looking creature with blue skin, a lanky body, and a simple red and white hat with the number zero on it. Then, she holds out her hand and helps him up. 

“Thanks, Peach.” He smiles brightly at her once his is fully standing upright, and I notice that he’s really tall. He must be at least 6’5. 

“No problem.” The girl, Peach, chuckles, bending down to the Ugandan Knuckles. “You good, little T?” 

The meme clicks in response, doing a little dance to express what I can only assume is happiness or contentment. 

“Ah yeah, he is already awake.” The cyclops walks back over to me, realizing that I’ve already sat up and I’m staring at them. “Hey! I know you might be scared, and you might not know what’s going on or if this is even real, but it is! Welcome to the afterlife. My name’s SMG0, this is Princess Peach, the little guy down there’s named Terrance, and- oh!” He stops in his tracks, placing his hand over his mouth. 

“What? What’s wrong, Zero?” Peach walks over, studying my face while SMG0 just stares at me. 

More specifically, at a certain spot on my left cheek. My tattoo. The princess notices it as well, and her expression goes from concerned to unreadable in less than a second. I don’t recognize either of the people that stand above me, but they are staring at me like they know everything about me. It’s unsettling. 

“The hell are you looking at.” I finally decide to speak up, glaring at them as the raspiness of my voice surprising me. 

“Okay. This is, um. This is great.” Zero gives me a strained smile, removing his hand from his face before turning to whisper in Peach’s ear loud enough for me to hear. “Do you think they’ll do to him what they did to Niles?” 

“Pfft. From what I’ve heard, and from what we just saw, it’s likely he’ll get put through worse.” She pauses before snickering. “Desti’s gonna rough him up, that’s for sure. Oh, and Axol too.” 

“What?” I raise an eyebrow. “What is going on right now.” 

“You might be a... really dangerous criminal, and Peach and I don’t think-” 

“No, no, he doesn’t really look like him. The more I look, didn't the scary villain have a pink tattoo on his right cheek?” Peach studies me closer, and I just barely notice SMG0 holding his foot in pain. “Right?” She gives him some kind of weird look, and he also stares at me again. 

“O-OH! Yes!” He yells abruptly. “Peach, you’re so right. You poor inkling, let’s g-get you to the town square.” 

“I don’t want any help from you.” I grumble, quickly getting up by myself and standing to my full height. 

“Don’t be that way, come on! We can help guide you to your new home, mister...” Peach gestures for me to give her my name, and since I have no interest in becoming friends with these people, I simply shrug. “Well, you must have a name.” She laughs, prompting me to tell her my name once more. 

“It’s Wren.” I scoff, pulling the rim of my cowboy hat over my head. 

“Oh!” Zero visibly flinches at that, and Peach’s smile becomes a bit more strained. “W-well, no reason to dilly-dally, unless you want to be stuck in the forest for quite some time. The village is just this way!” She grimaces, grabbing my arm a bit too tightly and leading me through the thick trees. 

“I can walk by myself, damnit!” I try to pull away from her grip, but she is surprisingly strong and can overpower me. 

“No, I insist. Our friends would appreciate it if they gave you a warm welcome.” Peach tries to reassure me, but their strange behavior is making me on-edge. 

Terrance clicks, speaking in some language I can’t understand, and Zero laughs heartily at whatever the small meme is saying. His words also make Peach snicker, giving me some sort of side eye that makes me even more suspicious. Something's going on, and it’s really pissing me off that I have no idea what it is. Nevertheless, I shake it off, but I still stay ready for anything the three strangers can throw my way. 

“So. Wren. You from the city?” SMG0 suddenly appears next to me, cradling Terrance in his arms as the Ugandan Knuckles stares me down. 

“Yeah. I lived in Inkopolis before moving somewhere more suburban a few years ago.” I respond, watching him closely to see his reaction. 

“That’s cool. I’m not actually from the Mushroom Kingdom, or the surrounding areas like the Showgrounds or Inkopolis, I’m from a different universe. But I’m in this sector because I interacted with SMG4, and there’s like a whole separate part for us. Even if you guys make eye contact, you’re usually either in the exact sector or the areas surrounding it. And man, I love this place, even if it is just a small village, I’ve learned to love it over the past year or so.” He talks with an animated expression, using hand gestures as he reveals the purpose of the sector. “I think it’s been a year and two months since my friend Niles and I died.” There’s that name again. Niles. Who the hell is that? “Ha! Now that’s a funny story. W-well, maybe not so funny... but it’s intriguing! Let me tell you about how I got possessed and- Ow, jeez!” Terrance suddenly bites his hand and he cries out in pain, his lip quivering and his pupils getting bigger. 

He glares at Zero, muttering something along the lines of “lotta yap yap mon”. 

“Pfft, Little T, chill. He’s going to be stuck with us for eternity anyway, we might as well humor each other with our backstories.” The princess smirks, pushing away one last tree branch before her face lights up. “And look at that!” 

Out of nowhere, a village pops up into my view. There are about 100 small houses in this neighborhood, all positioned around the center, where we are standing right now. There is a large park with flowers and trees decorated in a beautiful pattern, along with a few extras like swinging benches and animal-shaped fountains. I notice a few brick paths leading to a statue right in the middle, that being of none other than a vibrant, rainbow-colored super star power up. There is a small pond to the left of the extravagant statue, and that’s where I see the first citizen that catches my eye, a young octoling with pink hair, simply staring into the water with a fond smile on her face. 

As I direct my attention back to the houses directly surrounding the statue, I see another notable person that doesn’t just look like one of the other five average people that are in the park. He is an anthropomorphic axolotl dressed in Japanese clothing, and he also seems quite tall. The axolotl man walks out of his home, not even bothering to lock his front door, and strides over to the octoling at the pond, saying a few things to her before they both head in the direction of the star statue. 

Then, more doors begin opening, more people walking out of their houses. There is an alien, a short, stubby red guy, and someone with a box on top of their head. Slinking behind, there is also a lizard with weird glasses, an uncomfortable expression on his face as he also approaches the statue. The last person to walk out is an exact copy of SMG0, the only difference being that he’s red instead of blue. The second that this man walks out of his house, Zero squeals, walking over to him. 

“Fred!” His scream makes me stop zoning out, and I stand up straighter, finally ripping my arm from Princess Peach’s grasp. Terrance jumps out of the blue man’s arms once they catch up to the SMG0 clone, whose name I assume is Fred. “Oh my gosh, Fred. You will never guess who we- hold on. W-where's Niles?” His expression turns into one of confusion, but that is soon washed away when he hears another person talking to him. 

“Yo! Is that Zero?” The octoling waves vigorously at SMG0, who grins and waves back at her, just as excitedly, trying to begin a conversation while they’re still fifty yards away from each other. “And Peach? My girl!” 

“H-hey Desti. Sorry, I have, uh... Give me a second, stay still damnit.” Peach grabs back onto me and begins literally dragging me towards the fountain against my will. All the strangers have now made it to the direct middle of the park, standing in front of the fountain and quietly conversing with each other. Now, I’m almost certain that I’m about to disrupt the peace. “This, um, he’s kind of feisty, uh, yeah.” 

We finally reach the statue, and everyone freezes.  

They are still, unmoving, not even blinking or breathing for a good thirty seconds, and it scares me. How do they survive without- oh. I’m dead. So, they’re dead too... 

“Oneshot Wren.” The octoling, Desti, chuckles darkly. “How nice of you to finally join the party, hmm?” 

I gulp, finding the courage to speak up from somewhere deep inside me. 

“Who the hell are you people, and how do you know my name?” I step closer to her, like I’m testing the waters, and I stare at her defiantly. 

“I watched your first Splatfest win live at the arena when I was a little kid. Then, you went on to get a threepeat, that’s some impressive shit right there. But I forget what you did after that last win, care to enlighten me?” She asks, almost tauntingly. 

“You’re seriously going to mock me right now. How immature do you have to be-” 

“No, no, I’m not mocking. Just observing, looking back on your life. And you probably don’t know a whole lot about me, but you’ll soon find that I’m quite important.” She pauses, looking me up and down before continuing with her backstory. “I’m Desti, former leader of the Octoposse, the team favored to win the 2019 Splatfest. My goal was to take down our greatest competitor, SplatSquad. Maybe you’re familiar with the leader, Meggy Spletzer?” 

What. The. Hell. 

“I-” I try to speak, but she cuts me off again. 

“We were just about to duke it out in Turf War, but then she went missing. Obviously, I wanted my opponent to be there for her ultimate smackdown, so I helped look for her. That’s when I realized that she was kidnapped, a part of a sick, disgusting, shameful plan to steal her ink and use it to draw sentient anime characters.” She gives the lizard a side eye, and he dips his head, biting his lip as he stares at the ground. “I helped SMG4’s crew save her, after they saved me from foolishly running in there to help her alone. As much as I hated to admit it at the time, I took a liking to that stupid inkling. I felt like we were finally friends, and that maybe when everything was over, we could finally put our differences aside. Have somewhat of a real frenemy relationship, heh.” She sniffles, taking a deep breath. “So, it was the final bit of the battle, and we had just defeated one of the most powerful anime characters. Meggy and I locked eyes and I smiled at her, trying to boast about how easy the fight had been. Then, it was just a blur, the worst pain I’ve ever felt. A new anime character put his sword through my stomach, blood went everywhere, Meggy screamed, which was much more heartbreaking than any of the insults we’d exchanged in the past. But it meant she cared, that we were developing something real. I thought of her as a friend, someone who truly thought of me as more than just a rival. So, naturally, I carried that love with me beyond the grave. I even got to go back as a ghost and hug her, back when it was just me in this sector. I love Meggy, she’s like the closest thing to a sister I ever had, even though I realized that way too late.” 

“So.” The axolotl speaks as he rubs her back, trying to comfort her as she blinks back a tear. “My name is Axol. After Desti passed away, Meggy was having a hard time trying to cope with her human transformation as well as this feeling of guilt that she had over Desti. We developed a close bond as I helped her through that, and she was my best friend. Easily one of the most resilient people I've ever gotten the chance to meet. After I died, Desti and I found a way to turn our small pond over there into a viewing pool, where we were able to check in on Meggy, making sure she was doing okay. And just a little extra bit of information, we can still do that. And we’ve been doing it for the past month, as well.” His voice takes on a darker tone towards the end of his small speech. 

“You...” Desti begins to shake, walking up to me and getting right up in my face. “You’re a bastard. And if you think that we won’t make you suffer for what you did to Meggy, I swear that we will make this afterlife like Hell for the rest of your days.” Then, before I can even blink, she’s pounced on me. “Hell! That’s what you deserve! You’re a piece of shit!” She easily delivers blows to my face, screaming with unbridled rage as she attacks me. 

Axol looks like he wants to jump in, but he stays back, seeming like less of the violent type. All the rest of them do the same thing. Peach, SMG0, Terrance, and the other strangers who I haven’t gotten the chance to get to know just stare at me, some of them even egging Desti on.  

The taste of my own blood stings on my tongue, the pain in my face almost numbing me at this point. My eyes close as I feel the raging octoling grab me by the collar and shove my entire body against the concrete surface of the statue repeatedly, the feeling of my spine cracking making me desperately cry out. She continues, not wanting to stop hurting me, screaming and crying and telling me how much I deserve this for what I did to Meggy, how I’d never be free from her. How, even if I fled the sector, she would find me and never stop emotionally torturing me, just like she still does with Francis. 

I have no clue who Francis is, but I do know that this hurts and that I just want to die all over again and not have to feel this anymore. I want to be free; I can’t take this. Everything in my body feels broken, but I’m not dying. I’m already dead. This is never going to end; this is my eternal punishment for hurting Spletzer. I’ll never escape this crazy freak, she could keep this going for hours, I have no clue when she’ll even want to stop, or how mauled I’ll have to be before she’s satisfied, before all of them are content, and I’m completely at her mercy until she- 

“What’s up, party people? I smelled violence, so naturally I had to check it out.” A new voice, attached to the form of a person that I can’t clearly see, makes Desti stop in her tracks and face them. 

“Late as always.” Her voice rings in my ears, too loud, making me wince. “Ugh, you made me lose track of what bone I was on.” 

“Tch, what the hell are you on about?” The person, whose voice I can now distinguish as male, scoffs. 

“I’m trying to break all his bones, and your impractical timing made me lose count, dummy.” She reaches up with a bloody hand and flicks him in the forehead, or at least that’s what it looks like through my blurry vision. 

“Oh? Who’s the newbie?” He nudges my booted foot, with his own, and I feel like mine just got stabbed by thousands of needles. 

“This is Oneshot Wren.” Axol speaks as Desti finally gets up, leaving me to lie on the floor with my hat over my face. 

The mysterious man leans down to grab my hat, tossing it across the courtyard to get a better look at me. I still can’t see anything other than a blob, but he leans closer to brush a bit of my hair out of my face and I can hear a playful laugh escape his throat. 

“Damn, you really mauled his cute face before I could get a better look.” He says the last thing anyone was expecting. 

“What? You sadistic f-” Peach sounds completely appalled. 

WhAaT?” He mocks her, standing back up. “I’m just stating the obvious. You fucked up his face before I could get a look, and personally, I think that he has the potential to be pretty cute. It’s not like I want to get, like, freaky with him or anything.” 

“DUDE!” Multiple people yell at the man, scolding him while he just laughs, sounding even more amused. 

“You’re too uptight. What’s the point of bloodying him up this much anyway, when all you have to do is just kill him? Y’know, snap his neck, then come back and do it the next day. If you want him to suffer, why not just do the same thing to him that he did to... Mickey, or whatever her name is. Like, watch, it’s so easy. All you have to do is just, here. See?” 

I feel cold hands on my neck, feeling around for just long enough to make me involuntarily shiver. Then, I hear a deafening cracking noise, and I’m finally greeted by the all-too-familiar dark embrace of death. 

~~~ 

“Ugh...” I groan, my eyes fluttering open. 

Quickly, I realize that I’m no longer bleeding out on the cold brick pathway of the city park. Instead, I’m tucked cozily in a warm bed, feeling more peaceful than I have in a very long time. All the pain that was taking over my entire body mere seconds ago is gone, and I feel relieved. Especially because something about this environment is just making me feel so happy, chill, relaxed, and- watched

I snap my head upwards and I scream when I’m met with a smirking face from a man sitting at the foot of the bed. 

“Ha! Took you long enough, newbie.” Instantly, I recognize his voice as the one of the man that did something to my neck. “Love that girly scream, by the way.” He laughs at me, then grabs a hat from the floor and puts it on his head. My hat. 

That’s when I start to notice more of his features. He’s wearing a zip up hoodie and shorts, and he has bangs that cover his left eye. His skin is about as pale as skin can possibly be, and he’s wearing a red hat like the one of SMG0 and his friend, Fred. Wait, if he already had a hat on, is he seriously wearing two hats? 

“That’s mine.” I lamely state, staring at the two hats on his head.  

“I think I’ve gathered that much.” He rolls his eyes and leans back on his hands. 

“Who are you?” I allow my curiosity to get the best of me, and I sit up a bit straighter. “You seem like you’re some kind of class clown.” 

“This isn’t some cliche high school movie. I’m just trying to lighten the mood, especially after I killed you yesterday. Didn’t want you to hate me before you even know my name. Feel free to do that after you know who I am, though.” He winks.  

“So, you still won’t tell me. Not even your name?” I press. 

“Your accent is so funny. You don’t sound like you’re from the city; you sound like you’re from the country. You sound pretty rural to me.” He continues to tease me, and it starts to piss me off. 

“Who are you?” I repeat. 

“Wow, you’re no fun, man. Your name is Oneshot Wren, right?” He smiles, deep in thought. “That’s a long name, don’t you think? What if I shortened that a bit.” 

“What.” I scowl. “Shorten it?” 

“What about Wrenny?” He mischievously giggles like that's the funniest thing he’s ever come up with. 

“What the hell?! Do not call me that!” I yell at him, a blush of embarrassment dusting my face as I hide my head in my hands. 

“Aww, you’re cute when you blush, Wrenny.” He teases me, crawling a bit closer and making me shift uncomfortably. “Am I making you all flustered?” 

“What are you doing?” I scoff, shrinking farther back until my body is pressed against the headboard of the bed. 

“Making you blush.” He continues to close in on me, and he brings a hand to my shoulder. “It’s cute, Wrenny.” 

“Stop calling me that.” I scold him, trying to sound authoritative. 

“You know you love it. And when I’m done with you, you can say that Niles is making your afterlife more bearable, all right?” He leans even closer, his breath ghosting over my mouth. 

“Niles?” I whisper, finally hearing what I assume is his name.  

“That’s my name, don’t wear it out, babe.” He airily laughs one more time before cupping my cheek in his hand and using his other one to place my hat back on my head. “Now just... stay still for a moment." 

“What!” I breathe out. 

My eyes widen and I wonder what he’s going to do, but I quickly get my answer as he connects our lips. The contact is brief, just a simple brush, but it feels like it lasts forever. Then he goes in for another one, deeper this time. Like he’s trying to get more every time he kisses me. I find this to be true when he holds me closer on the third one, kisses me harder. It’s too much. It’s not enough.  

I push Niles away from me, gasping heavily. My face is burning, likely red as a tomato, and the man pinning me to the bed is drinking it up with a shit-eating grin that I wish I can just wipe from his face. I try to get up, but he refuses to let me, staring at my lips like he just wants to devour them.  

“Don’t play hard to get, now. That’ll only make me want you more.” He plants small kisses on my neck, making that shivery feeling from before return in full force. 

I want to get him away from me, to shove him off harder than before, but I can’t bring myself to. I don’t know why, or what compelled him to even start this in the first place. He wouldn’t even tell me his name until he started kissing me, and we seriously know nothing about each other in the oh Memes he’s gone back to my lips. 

He’s really pushing this now, wrapping his arms fully around my neck and trying to make me give in. I can’t let him win, I can’t let him think that I’m as vulnerable as I was when he snapped my neck, making me wake up the next morning completely at his mercy. Pathetic, but I love the way this is making me feel. I am so damn pathetic. 

Two knocks sound on the bedroom door, and then it swings open before I have time to react. I panic, moving to push Niles onto the floor and pretend to be completely normal, but he’s already back at the foot of the bed. I blink twice as SMG0 enters, smiling at Niles and giving me a look of both uneasiness and pity. 

“Hey, Niles. Um, hey, Wren. I just wanted to check in to make sure you’re doing okay, both of you. And, in case Niles hasn’t already explained, uh, the only reason he killed you was so you would be put out of your misery. Just so you don’t file a complaint against him, because he’s one of my best friends. It would be horrible if he were to go serve a punishment and then I’d lose him again, expecting the worst!” Zero looks distressed, and Niles gets up to go pat him on the back. 

“Zero, man. It’s all good. Wren and I were just talking, and I think we’re chill. Right, man?” He asks, putting on the most chill face ever.  

“Oh, yeah.” I shuffle weirdly. 

“Niles can be a bit much at first. He’s nice when you get to know him, though.” SMG0 smiles at me, turning to leave. “I just wanted to make sure you two were okay, but... Wren. I want you to know that I’d like to be your friend. I think anyone can reform here in the Afterlife, and I want to give you a shot. Especially with how Desti destroyed you. It was deserved, after all you did to, like, her favorite person, but I think you could use a friend now that you’re settling in.” He waves. “We have a village meeting at 5:00, you’re welcome to join, by the way.” 

"Thanks." I give him an odd look, but it twists into a very small smile.

"I'll see you later then, you should get some rest. You too, Niles. You're welcome to sleep on the couch if you're tired!" He walks halfway through the door before peeking his head back in and saying one more goodbye to his friend.

SMG0 was only here for a minute! How could he possibly have that much to-

With that, the door closes for good this time, and Niles is already back on top of me, gripping my clothing and kissing me again. I gasp in surprise, this time leaning into him a little bit. I don’t know what this is, or if I want this, but all I need to think about right now is his lips and how to keep them on mine for as long as possible. I try to kiss him, to mimic the way he did it to me before, but then he pulls away. 

“Ah, you’re getting needy now, Wrenny, I knew I’d break you.” And just like that, he’s off the bed, leaving my lips swollen.  

“Hey! W-what?” I call after him. 

“What?” He cocks his head innocently, wiping his mouth like what we just did was the most normal thing in the world. 

“You just kissed m-” I begin, but he places a finger to my lips. 

“Ah ah! That was merely an icebreaker. For us to get to know each other better. But clearly you still have lots to learn about me, baby.” He walks all the way to the front door. 

“Then help me understand.” I demand, getting out of the bed and making him stop in his tracks, looking back at me with a curious expression. “What really was that?” 

“I want you to figure that out for yourself.” He simply shrugs, his smile never leaving his lips. His horribly soft lips.

“What?” I whisper, backing away slightly. “Why do you have to be so cryptic?” 

“Look. I want to be Oneshot Wren’s enemy, and Wrenny’s friend. Once you figure that out, come and find me. But for now, I just hope to see you at the town meeting.” He smiles and winks at me, turning the doorknob and walking through it to the outside of Zero's small house. 

I hear the voice of the blue-skinned man, already chatting Niles' ear off, and I just stare at the wall. Something about the way he winked at me makes me want to go to that meeting. It makes me want to endure the shit that I’ll get from Desti and Axol, the questions I’ll get from Zero, who never shuts up, and the small talk I’ll have to make with others. Because Niles just did something to me, something that I can’t even begin to explain. He made me crave more secret moments with him, made me want to be in his company just to feel his touch again. Even if everyone hates me, I will still have him, and his undefinable feelings. Hell, he might hate me too and this could all just be some sick game that he’s playing with the ‘newbie’. 

But for now, I can at least be delusional. I can at least have something to wake up for in the morning... The unpredictability of Niles, the man who has already managed to capture my heart. Who I’ll be stuck with for eternity, no matter what happens between us or anyone else in the Afterlife. And I don’t even know if he feels anything towards me. 

Huh, on second thought.  

I might be fucked. 

~~~

8825 Words

Notes:

My first 1st person oneshot... what do you guys think?

Also thank you for the request!

Chapter 20: Not Quite Dead {GunShow} ☁️💔❓🗑️

Summary:

TW: Swearing

Mr. Puzzles and Mr. WPNZ never died on camera, they just closed the rift in time. So that raises a question: what's next for this dynamic duo?

This oneshot takes place during WOTFI 2025.

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Music plays from Mr. Puzzles' speakers as the Looney Tunes ending scene shows on his screen, masking the fear he is feeling at this moment. Mr. WPNZ closes his eyes, bracing himself for the embrace of death. With one last inhale, they close the rift in time, tightly holding hands as they accept the fate that awaits them.

Then, not even a second later, Mr. Puzzles opens his eyes and finds himself in complete darkness, falling through a void of nothingness. The warmth radiating from his friend's hand has been lost, and the TV-headed man is alone in an endless chasm of pure blackness. He can barely see his hand when he waves it in front of his face, and that's just due to the glow emanating from his screen.

Otherwise, it's pitch black. There's not even any sound or any remnant of the rift they just finished closing. The frightening part for Mr. Puzzles is that he has no idea where Mr. WPNZ is. He hadn't fallen unconscious, which was what he was expecting to feel in death, but the assassin who he was holding is just gone. Is this death? Did he really not notice that he'd died?, 

"Boxhead!" A voice calls out for Mr. Puzzles, making him perk up and turn the brightness of his screen all the way up.

"W-WPNZ? Are you there?" He shakily responds before a metallic hand catches his vision.

Without a second thought, he grabs it, breathing out a shaky sigh of relief when the cyborg's fingers intertwine with his own once again. 

"Gah. Thought I lost ya for a moment there. I found ya due to that bright screen of yours, glowstick." He smirks, the expression just barely visible as Mr. Puzzles grabs his other hand, the force of their fall making them lay flat on their stomachs.

The TV headed man wants to laugh and make a comment about the new nickname, but the words get caught in his throat. How could WPNZ be so content right now, when they are falling to who knows where? How is he just so... calm?

"You... You're not scared." Mr. Puzzles verbally observes, a small frown appearing on his screen. 

"Huh?" Mr. WPNZ looks genuinely confused as he stares at his bright friend. "The hell are you talking about?"

"We could have just died, WPNZ." He chokes out, trying to keep his composure. "Forgive me for thinking you'd be a bit jarred, at least. We're just in this void now for who the hell knows how long, wondering if we'll ever escape, if we'll ever see the light of day again, if we'll eventually grow old and die in here, or starve before that can even happen, making these last few days we have completely miserable in every way possible-"

"Hey, boxhead, you're spiralin'." His gruff voice snaps the TV out of his funk, a heart monitor-like blush appearing on the latter's face.

"Ah, sorry." He curtly apologizes, looking away with a guilty look on his face.

"Why the fuck are you apologizin' for that? I understand why you'd be freaked out, man. Totally get it. But there ain't nothin' we can do about it now. We did what we were meant to do." He places a comforting hand on Puzzles' shoulder, the other man relaxing into the touch as they regain their balance and being themselves to an upright position (or, at least, whatever could be considered up. They had no sense of direction here).

"Y-yeah, you're right. It's just, I-" He pauses, trying to find the right way to voice his concern.

"What's up?" WPNZ smiles, silently urging his friend to keep talking by giving his shoulder a small yet firm squeeze.

"Why did you join me? You had a choice not to, but you just cemented your fate, no second thought. Now you're stuck in this place when you could have stayed out there, living your normal life." He sighs. "Like you already were before."

"Boxhead, I-" He tries to reassure him again, but Puzzles cuts him off.

"This is it, WPNZ, this is the end. We can't go back. I was prepared to leave everything behind, to have a happy end, but you. You!" He brings his hands up to his screen, clawing at his square head like he wants to tear it clean off. "You had a life, and a good one at that. You could have stayed with Toomp, made up for your crimes, become a valuable member of society, and- your children! You have children." His voice cracks. "Those annoying, stupid, perfect little gremlins just had their father introduced into their life, and now all they really have is Karen. At least before, they had hope. Now they'll know you're dead, gone just because you wanted to chase a foolish villain into a portal and face certain death."

"Well it's not certain, is it? I'm here with you." He raises his voice a bit, determined to make Mr. Puzzles hear him out. 

"But what about Toomp? He was like your child, he-"

"Toomp isn't a child." WPNZ nearly bursts out into laughter, instead just turning it into a light chuckle. "Before we found your hideout, he pulled me aside. He told me that he was an alien from another planet, equipped with more knowledge than every person on Earth combined. And he had, like, the deepest voice. He told me that we had to infiltrate your hideout, that it would complete his research."

"What?" Mr. Puzzles is completely taken aback, a surprised scoff leaving his speaker. 

"I assume he's already headed back. He said that, no matter what, he'd leave after he was finished collecting information. Since he didn't follow us, I assumed that meant he was ready to go back home. That's why I didn't say goodbye or anything."

"So, you followed me because you had nothing left to lose. Because your family hates you, and Toomp, your fresh start, isn't even a child that you can take care of. Your last option was to come sacrifice your life with me, to appear the hero and make me satisfied." The realization hits the TV headed man like a freight train as digital tears well up in his eyes. "I was your last option." He whispers, sounding defeated.

"W-what? No. No!" WPNZ desperately corrects him. "That's not it at all, boxhead. I promise."

"Then why in the ever loving fuck would you do this? I-I don't understand, I don't-" Puzzles hyperventilates, digging his fingers farther into the metal of his head. 

"Man! Screw your damn TV head on straight!" He desperately cries out. "You're the only person I'd ever follow into a portal. You're the only one who I'd ever die for. Hell, die with. Don't think that I'd do the same for anyone else in this whole fuckin' universe, boxhead."

"But we've only barely made up, WPNZ. Why?" He lets the tears fall more freely now, even if they are only an image on a screen. "What do you even see in me?" His voice drops again, broken and confused as his hands fall to his sides and a shadow crosses over his face.

Mr. WPNZ... didn't fully know how to answer that question, to tell you the truth. 

What did he see in Mr. Puzzles? How would he even start?

Well, he saw a strong man, capable of overcoming grief and still being, most literally, the brightest beacon of light in the whole room. He saw a man who has endured pain since he was little, yet was still always capable of cracking jokes, dancing around, being silly, and making situations more enjoyable. 

At the same time, he saw a villain who betrayed him after he finally thought he had found a friend, someone who he could get to know and love, no strings attached. He saw someone who he had broken out of prison, someone who he admired, and someone who broke him in ways he didn't think were possible. 

He saw someone who, despite all that happening, still tried to make things right after nearly being killed multiple times. He saw someone who made up for his mistakes, someone who he was willing to sacrifice everything just to spend his final moments with.

He saw his best friend. Someone who he loved more than words could even begin to express.

"I don't know." He simply answers, causing Mr. Puzzles to only sink deeper into his feelings of despair, thinking he was right, that WPNZ really didn't care for him at all, that he was just doing all this out of pity and spite-

Then, WPNZ engulfs him in a bone-crushing hug, holding him as tight as humanly possible. He rests his head in the TV head's wiry neck and closes his eyes, determined to wrap his arms fully around Puzzles' body. Mr. Puzzles just gasps, frozen in place, before slowly embracing Mr. WPNZ as well. The gunman's usual stone-faced expression turns up into a genuine smile as he nuzzles closer, with the TV having a small smile on his screen as well despite his best efforts to hide it.

"You're impossible." Puzzles giggles, a sound that makes WPNZ's heart flutter.

Wait, flutter? Whoa. Where the hell did that come from?

"Ha. I try to be." He smirks with his usual comeback, but he can't deny the butterflies in his stomach as they pull apart from their hug. "But in all honesty, glowstick, you're my best friend. I'm glad I'm here with you."

"Same here, my f- did you just call me your best friend?" Puzzles stops in his tracks, his expression slowly shifting into one of pure joy.

"Thought that much was clear by now, you moron." WPNZ flicks his screen, causing his blush to return tenfold as he stares at him, trying to regain his bearings.

"Gah! Y-you can't just get in my face and- and-" The TV headed man sputters, shuffling himself away slightly.

"And what, Shakespeare? Dare say I flustered you?" He chuckles in a low tone, inching closer to his screen until their mouths are mere inches away.

"Jeez, I-I-" He freezes up before awkwardly laughing. "S-screw you, you old... man of weaponry." Puzzles utters the lamest comeback ever, giving WPNZ a weak middle finger and trying to swim through the void to get away from him in a playful manner.

WPNZ just swims after him, laughing as they engage in a playful chase. Unfortunately for Puzzles, their little game ends with WPNZ grabbing him by the bowtie and laying on his stomach, smirking triumphantly.

"Looks like I won." The assassin taunts, leaning in close to his face once more.

"Be careful there. One more inch and I'll think that you actually want to kiss me. We wouldn't want that, would we?" Mr. Puzzles tries to tease him back, lacking the bite he wants.

"Maybe I do." He answers truthfully, even though his tone is laced with enough sarcasm for Mr. Puzzles to brush it off as some more teasing.

"Oh, you're such a scandal!" He scoffs, pretending to be offended and falling backwards dramatically.

"Pfft." WPNZ catches him, of course, holding him by the small of his back. "I'm your scandal, though, aren't I?"

"I'm not sure why I just noticed this, but your voice sounds oddly similar to that of Krusty the Clown." Puzzles goes off topic for a moment, suddenly deep in thought. "Doesn't it?"

WPNZ is stunned for a moment before pulling Puzzles in for a passionate kiss. It's unexpected, to say the least, but it sends fireworks exploding through the TV man's circuits before he kisses back with the same urgency. He has no clue why WPNZ just randomly decided to do this, but he's not complaining. He'd never complain if it meant he got to feel his soft lips and sharp teeth brush against his screen.

Then they pull away and Puzzles gets to see just how flustered his companion is. They still hold each other close in a silence that is both comfortable and awkward at the same time.

"Never change, Boxhead." That is all Mr. WPNZ says, and even though it sounds like an inadequate response to what they just did, it's all Mr. Puzzles needs to capture his lips in another kiss, wrapping his arms around his best friend's neck fervently.

And even if it was for just a moment, the two lovebirds completely forgot about the dark void they were in. All they could seem to focus on was each other, and they were perfectly content to stay in each other's arms for the rest of eternity.

~~~

2109 Words

Notes:

AN: WHY IS SNOWTRAPPED ALWAYS HAUNTING ME ON MY FOR YOU PAGE (uh Lyssa maybe it's because you've watched it 42 times) AHHHHHH

Chapter 21: My Dear Television ☯️ 💔{None}

Summary:

TW: Blood, Gore, Substance abuse, Swearing and Mr. Puzzles' bad father

Summary: A teenager is going through a hard time, and the only way he can find solace and happiness is through his bedroom television. While it's really a small thing, it gives him joy... Doesn't it look small enough to be a head as well?

This oneshot takes place around 2011.

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Indirectly requested by kerokerrrokerroppi on Tumblr

 

"I can't let you die." 

"But if you do this, you will die." 

"Let her heal you, Flynn! She has magical hair for a reason! Then you can defeat the villain together as star-crossed lovers!" The sixteen-year-old boy grabs his small bedroom television that is lying on his desk, holding it close as he stares daggers into the screen, waiting for what will happen next. 

He had waited nearly a year since this movie had come out, avoiding all spoilers so he could get the DVD version and watch it for the first time on his beloved CRT. Ever since Tangled had come out, he had overheard people at school talking about how amazing it was and how critics were saying it was one of the best Disney movies ever. 

And while he found it hard to believe the heartless teenagers in that wretched building, he was determined to watch every show and movie that had ever been made. 

That included the shitty children's cartoons, the badly animated adult shows, the cliche chick flicks, and even the more... suggestive adult romances. But none of this was a problem for him, as he was a TV enthusiast that was not about to have his goal stopped by a few pornos. 

His eyes grow wider as the two lean in for what appears to be a kiss, and a squeal even leaves his mouth in excitement. It isn't unexpected for the two main characters to kiss when one of them is facing imminent death, but he couldn't help getting excited. After all, the first kiss must be one of his, if not his absolute favorite part of any romantic movie or show that he's ever seen- 

"Hey." A voice booms from the doorway as the movie is paused, causing the boy to freeze in place before pushing his rolling chair away from his desk. “Peter.” 

“Father.” He grimaces, hearing the name he hates through his father’s lips. “It’s not Peter.” 

It had been what, at least five times that he had reminded the middle-aged man. He didn’t want to be called that anymore; it just brought back memories that pained him to resurface. His mother always used to call him that, and he didn’t care if it was his birth name, it would never sit right with him ever again… no. He refused to think about that, about her

“The fuck you mean. That’s your name, innit?” He slightly slurs his words together, pointing a half-empty beer bottle at his son’s face and spilling some of the drink on the floor. 

“My given name, indeed, but I find it difficult to hear others utter that name. Therefore I-” He tries to explain, but he gets cut off by none other than the drunk man getting closer to his face to be intimidating. 

“All those filthy fifties shows are fucking up your talk, Peter. Whaddid I say about bein’ normal, ya piece of shit.” He stares at his son with an expression of disgust, his red eyes and dilated pupils now visible to the teen. 

“Those ‘filthy’ shows are actually award-winning soap operas from the 1960s, and they are extremely inspiring to watch. I have no intention to be argumentative, but I have finished nearly every show from the twentieth century, and I find they are very tame compared to the newer things on television.” The boy tries not to shove his TV knowledge up his father’s ass, but he’s getting visibly more frustrated at the diss to one of his favorite genres. 

“This is why you have no friends. You’re a prudish asshole, no wonder. How did I raise such a loser?” He slurs out, taking a long swig of his drink. “Or did Anne’s death fuck you harder than you thought? Cause if I think about it, you didn’t really have your lil’ TV sex fantasies until she was outta here.” 

“Wh-what- how can you talk about that so lightly, Father? She was my mother, just as much as she was your wife, who was loving and supportive and-” 

“She made you weak, Peter. Indulged those stupid dreams of yours.” He scoffs, bitterness lacing his drunken words. “Oh, you’re the most creative little boy I’ve ever met! You can choose to be whoever you want to be, I’ll love you no matter what! Of course you can be a television host, you’ll make the best shows if you start your own production company! And yes, you have enough vision to make an amusement park just like Didney Worl!” His father mocks his late mother, repeating all her words that had filled him with joy when he was in elementary school. 

“You’re high, I can see the redness in your eyes. You don’t mean it; you loved her just as much as I do.” He sighs, trying his best to accept the older man’s behavior as a drunken standard. 

“She made ya think it was okay to be anything you wanted to be, something she was doing for the sole purpose of kissing up to you. Her own son. Made you soft, made you think it was okay to be a cocksucker. And what’d you turn out to be? I catch you watching gay shit all the time, probably because it makes you feel ‘seen’, represented or whatever. It’s her fault you like dicks because she made you think you had a choice.” 

“Father, I have the right to choose. I am a citizen of a free State.” He tries to explain his freedom of sexual orientation, but he wasn’t very educated about homosexuality. 

After all, he hadn’t even meant to come out to his father, especially in the way that he did. Making out with a paused screen showing a close-up of Captain America’s face was one of his worst times. 

“Making out with a TV. A man on the screen, no less. You’re a disgusting fucking loser, Peter. You think locking yourself in your room and watching this little old thing is just the solution to all your problems, don’t you? Little gayass son of a bitch.” He gets close enough to breathe into the teen’s face. 

“Stop calling me that.” He whispers, trembling in a mixture of anger and disbelief. “Have you been smoking, too?” 

“Vaping. What’s it to you?” His father growls, clenching something in his jean pocket that was 100% a vape. “Got a problem with what I’m doing? The person who feeds and clothes and houses you?” 

“You’re even more of a mess than I am. Sure, I like television. But my obsession stems from a dream I’ve had since I was about five years old, father, and that’s to create something, whether that be a show or an amusement park. You have never supported that. You say I have no creativity; you put me down, so I do what any misunderstood person does. Lock myself in my room and watch TV all day.” He sighs, knowing that his problems started way before his mother died. 

The only difference is that his mother was the thing that kept his obsession from growing out of control. His mom was also the only person who took away his father’s booze, drugs, and vapes, and made him work to quit and stay sober. If only she could see the mess he had become, the fragment of the man he once was with her by his side. A shitty, abusive father and a fucked-up loser who the teen wished would just leave and never come back because they would both be better off without each other. 

“Fucking excuse me? What the hell did you just say to me, Peter?!” Before the teenage boy realized that he said that whole last thing out loud, his father had grabbed him by the collar and started screaming in his face. “I’ll show you abuse, you ungrateful piece of garbage!” 

He takes his beer and smashes the bottle into his son’s arm, leaving him screaming as glass shards pierce through his long sleeve shirt and leave blood stains on the white fabric. Then, he lands a good punch on the kid’s face as well as his stomach, making him keel over in pain and fall back deeper into the cushion of his rolling chair. 

Then, the boy sees his father eyeing his beloved CRT with a crazed look in his eye, causing the younger one to panic and throw his battered body in front of it. Despite the immense amount of pain he is experiencing from the damage done to his body, he needs to protect his TV. The one thing still grounding him to reality. 

Without it, he’d be… his entire purpose in life would just be… lost.  

“No. Call me whatever you want, a cocksucker, a freak, a loser, whatever. Hurt me, make me feel worthless, just don’t break this. You know full well it’s the only thing I have left of Mom, and she gave it to me in confidence. It’s her prized possession, and she trusted me with it.” He cries out, desperate to get through to the man standing over him, even if only for a moment. 

“Well, that’s tough shit, ain’t it Peter?” He bares his teeth, striking the teen on the cheek and making him hiss out in pain. 

“I’ll call the police. If you touch the television, I’ll call them and get them to take me out of here.” He threatens, knowing that he can still have a semblance of power over him in that way. “I’ll tell them that you’re a fat, narcissistic, abusive FUCKER who is addicted to alcohol, vaping, illegal drugs, and CBD.” He shakily inhales, hoping this will work. 

“No, you would never dare do that. You’re weak. You wouldn’t be able to dial them right now.” The dad almost laughs, trying to call his bluff and hide his fear. 

“Try me. You will be put in jail, and I will be free to tell them everything you have done to me.” After he says this, his father huffs, throwing him to the floor after hitting him in the face once more harshly. 

“You slippery little shit. Fine, fuck those tiny little TV ports on that box, see if I care anymore. It’s not like you’ll ever achieve any of your irrational dreams, anyway.” He gives his son one more menacing glare before he leaves the room, slamming the door so hard it made one of the framed pictures on the teen’s wall fall off, shattering the glass covering it. 

After his dad leaves the room, he gasps, checking the picture. Though shattered glass is everywhere, the picture of him and his mom as well as the frame were still intact. He sighs a breath of relief, glaring at the closed door before biting his lip hard enough to draw a droplet of blood. 

Then, he turns his attention back to the TV and starts pulling glass out of his arm, quickly realizing he never paused it. He had missed a crucial part of the film, and it was at the part where Flynn and Rapunzel were sharing a passionate kiss. And her hair was cut, what the hell did he miss? 

“Damnit.” He chokes out a sob, his emotions suddenly flooding to the surface as his tough persona slips away. “Why is television really the only thing that gives me solace anymore? How have I regressed to this, I’m so obsessed, I- I miss you, Mama.” Tears freely stream down his face as he is face to face with the ending credits, recapping the love story between the two characters with cute illustrations and a catchy song. “Why did you have to die? Now no one loves me, Mama. Father hates me; he hates us. He’s an addict. A piece of addict trash who thinks he provides for me when all he does is make me miserable.” 

You don’t need anyone’s approval, my little star.” His mother’s voice speaks to him in his mind, reminding him of the words she said so long ago. “It’s your life, your path to choose. If you love TV, to whatever extent, make it part of your life to that extent. You’ll be happier.” 

He valued television more than anything else in the world, and he was not scared to admit that to anyone. He valued it more than his own life. How dare his father, how very dare he try to break his television. He couldn’t be that careless ever again. 

If he were to be a TV himself, have a library of every single show downloaded into his head for him to watch, so he can achieve his lifelong goal of watching every single piece of cinema and television that there ever was- 

Now that he’s thinking about it, that’s a… surprisingly good idea. Being a walking, talking TV, like a person with a CRT for a head. Getting a new look, a new name, but still being himself. Having his mother’s beloved television resting on his neck for the rest of his life instead of his head that holds his ugly face. Imagine if he had interchangeable expressions plastered on a screen, instead. Like little slides on PowerPoint. 

To simply start a new life for himself, a way to get away from his father and rewire himself in a way to be less human, less fragile, more powerful. To just cut off his face and put a TV in its place. Oh, how joyous that would be. 

There is that handsaw in the garage, and he certainly wouldn’t get caught by his father if he were to just grab it. Knowing him, the alcohol percentage in his blood was at least 0.5.  

Really, the plan was simple. Almost too simple for him to find anything wrong with getting it ready, at least.  

 

~~~ 

 

“C’mon. Worst case scenario, you die. At least you’re free. It’s not some puzzle that I have to solve. And even if it was, remember what Mom always said.” He hyped himself up, taking rapid deep breaths and rigging a few wires in the CRT. 

Every time they had a game night, his mother would bring out a jigsaw puzzle. She said it was because he’s the puzzle master, having an immense talent for getting them done at record speed. At least, in her mind. 

“You’re the Master of Puzzles, my little star.” 

Heh. She should have called him Mr. Puzzles, like a little man. That would have been loads better.  

“Best case scenario, your dreams manifest themselves. You’ll finally be the TV host you wanted… starting your own company and rising above every challenge. You can become the person you have only ever imagined; you can be someone beyond the boy who is too weak to make a stand against his own father.”  

Imagine how much it would fuck him to see his son with a TV head. Or maybe it wouldn’t even phase him; the boy didn’t really care what he thought anymore. 

He takes the saw into his hand, staring at it with a twisted smirk. This could very well be the last time he has an opportunity to smirk with his normal face. Holding his left hand up to his face, he feels the skin that has been bruised and cut more than he could count in these last few years. He wants nothing more than to tear it off his face, piece by piece as he replaces it with metal. 

But it must be a quick yet steady process, otherwise there was no way he was surviving this. If he could just get the CRT hooked up to his nerves by forcing it on his head, it may generate a powerful enough force to keep his memories and sense of self intact. There is a small margin of error, however, and he needs to remember there is a risk of him waking up and not remembering anything at all. Or worse, not seeing the light of day ever again. 

That’s why concentration and intent are key. He had no doubt in his mind that this is possible. The only thing that frightened him was the fact that the odds of him surviving this are somewhere between a tenth and a quarter of a percent. 

It’s not like his life means anything to his father, or anyone else he’s come across. People in his school don’t even know he goes there, and his teachers still forget he’s in their classes all the time. While of course, he valued his own life, he still was willing to risk it all to achieve his dreams and get away from his abusive dad. 

After he finishes connecting one more wire, a smile spreads across his face. This one was much wider than his earlier smirk, and an immense feeling of joy filled him as he lifted the saw up and angled the top of his head to be right below the CRT, turned on its side. Now all he has to do is sever his head, then push his neck into the live wires of the TV, causing enough of an electroshock to connect his neurons and nerves to the metal box. 

Then, without another thought, he lowers the saw and cuts.  

Pain suddenly rushes through his entire body, causing him to convulse and feel like his muscles and nerves are seizing up. He’s about halfway through before he realizes this isn’t a clean cut at all, and he needs to just finish, get it over with so he can have at least a small chance of surviving. 

He tries to feel the metal go fully through his neck, but everything is just muffled by the pain, numbing every other outside sensation as he feels like he’s getting ripped, rather ripping himself apart by the seams. His flesh resists, trying to send enough pain for him to stop this madness, trying to get him to come to his senses and put down the old tool that he found in his garage. 

Was this handsaw rusty? The thought barely registered in his mind due to the pain overtaking his senses, but the burn was making him sure it must be. The jagged edges of this tool continued gnawing at his broken flesh, tearing deeper until he no longer felt like he was hurting anymore. He just felt numb; the agony crawling through his body was just a mere tingle like nothing was wrong. 

 He couldn’t even find it in him to fear for his life anymore, more focused on finishing this. To put an end to his excruciating suffering, to get out of this position one way or another. Besides, he was too far in to stop now, and such a deep cut to the throat would result in death if he didn’t replace his head. It’s not like he would regret this, anyway. He wanted freedom; in any form it could be granted. 

Then, nothing. A black void takes him in whole and he panics, jutting his neck forward onto the new head just as he is slipping away. He doesn’t know if it worked or if he’s dead now. He could just sit there like a limp doll watching everything from both the outside and inside at the same time. 

And not a second after that, an electric shock bursts out from the television, firmly trying his entire room and electrocuting him. That’s when his world goes truly black as he sits unknowingly in a pile of his own blood and singed hair, skin, and clothes. If only he could see how gross he looked, if anyone could see him and even try waking up, they would discover a one in a billion phenomenon. 

His body, blackened and burned with cuts along his neck, began to twist and form something brand new. His neck muscles and tendons, which had only connected to the small television screen about halfway, began to morph into thick, black, rubber-coated wires. They had a sound structure that connected the TV to his body in a way that truly synced it to his human form seamlessly. 

Next, to match his new wiry neck, his skin began to repair itself and become even darker, making the deep black his new skin tone. While parts of its white exterior were still visible along his chest and forearm, most of it had become a different thing entirely. Wires connected from his neck down to the tips of his fingers and even his toes, stretching out his limbs to an inhumanly length. Now, his legs alone were seven feet long, having the appearance of black extension cords merging with his torn flesh. 

As he continues to change, becoming a patchy mess of wires, HDMI cables and rubber-coated cords, small sparks begin to light. His memories, zapped into the TV by the electromagnetic shock that the connection initiated, began to transfer to the picture box. The energy, a pulsing bright blue, seemed to be entering at a stable pace, slowly powering more of his newly roboticized body. 

Once everything is finished transferring, his screen shows “Puzzlevision, please stand by” and it glitches slightly. It stays that way for about another thirty seconds before violent coughing can be heard from his speakers as his body jolts up. His hands fly up to where his face should be at once as he breathes heavily, trying to gather himself.  

“W-what...” He rasps out, desperately crawling into his bathroom to the best of his ability. “Ow, gosh, I, ow.” Pain ripples through him with every small movement. 

His new spindly limbs make this hard, but he eventually makes it through the door on his hands and knees. His body flops against the door, slamming it with a loud thud. As he fumbles to lock it, he can hear his disoriented father from the living room demanding to know what the noise was.  

“The fuck was that?!” He half-slurs, half screams, the sound muffled by the wall separating them. 

Oh no. He didn’t have long before he was discovered, and he didn’t even know what he looked like yet! There could be blood everywhere, or he could have burned, and there were millions of different things that could have gone wrong... Calm down. Let’s just get up and have a good look at ourselves in the mirror. 

He breathes in, a bit shocked by how crackly and distorted it sounded through a television speaker. Still, he grabs onto the counter and forces himself upward into a full standing position. It isn’t until that point that he realizes he’s now ten feet tall, and therefore way too tall to stand fully up without bonking his metal head on the ceiling. 

“Ow! What in the world?” He mutters, holding the top of his metal head.  

As he bends down, a horrified gasp leaves his speaker, and his hands fly to the sides of his new TV head. For the first time, he sees the full extent of damage he just induced on his fragile teenage body. He can see through the screen just exactly how hurt he is, as well as all the blood that is still seeping through cuts on his skin. Except everything is inky and black, especially the dark blood now oozing out of his neck that was making him feel nauseous. 

Can televisions even barf? He really felt like puking his guts out right about now, realizing his terrible mistake. What has he done to himself? He hasn’t even enhanced his body at all; he’s just a lanky mess of robotic and human parts! Mixed into one gigantic, disgusting creature who can’t even fit in his own house, oh Memes, what has he done? 

“Boy!” His bedroom door is kicked open by his enraged father. “I said to stop making so much noise, you goddamn-” He pauses in his tracks, clearly noticing whatever blood and burn marks the teen had obviously left behind. 

His eyes rake over his mangled body even more frantically, trying to figure out how to hide himself, or how to explain this to someone who was inevitably going to hurt him even more than he had hurt himself. That’s when he notices the cherry on top of his freakish body, the television itself. Or, more importantly, the image being portrayed on his screen. Instead of it being his face, or anything recognizable for that matter, it just shows an unfaltering, terribly creepy smile. 

He has two unmoving dots for eyes as well as a large smile showing the same colors as a TV screen with no signal. It scares him even more when he can’t change the expression plastered on his face, clawing at it with his black hands as the very tips of his fingers crumbled into ash. As he scrambled around the tight quarters of his bathroom, squatting to avoid hitting the ceiling yet again, his father’s footsteps drew closer. 

“No. No, no, no.” He whispers, terrified of what is going to happen when his father barges in, seeing him burnt, shirtless, powerless against his blows with his thin, wiry body and his clearly breakable TV head.  

He would barely have anything to defend himself, as all he was wearing were a singed pair of shorts that were hanging on him by a thread. How did his body even change this much? And why the hell is he still smiling? He can’t change his face at all. What has he done to himself, and why did he ever convince himself that this was a good idea whatsoever? How- 

His breathing nearly stops, his entire body seizing up so badly that he might as well just fall over dead. Then, a surge of electricity travels from his head all the way to his hand, sending a blue lightning bolt out of his pointer finger. It ricochets off the mirror and heads straight for him, causing him to scream and jump out of the way right as it blows a hole into the wall behind him. 

“Peter!” His father bellows in a louder and deeper voice than he has ever spoken to his son before. “I don’t know what the fuck you think you’re doing in there, but you are going to come out here and explain yourself right now. Otherwise, I’m going to beat your ass until you’re unrecognizable! What did ya even do, blow your guts out with a gun?! Get out here, bitch!” 

The boy in question just stands there, his screen glitching slightly as he stares at the gaping hole in his wall. He should fear what he’s become, what he’s created, but for an unfathomable reason, he’s not. In fact, it was the complete opposite. The more he looks at the wall, the more he is filled with a strange sense of pride. He is the one who just made that, and he could make it again if he were to just channel his emotions and... Shoot another. 

He does just that as he holds his hand out again, this time hitting the mirror and not shying away from the bolt. He doesn’t know why he would intentionally put himself in harm's way, but after all that’s happened, he’s building a resilience to his fear. Especially since he was able to cut off his head and survive. 

When the electricity hits him, it fills him with a bright feeling, spreading through his whole body faster than he can blink. Once he does, however, he is greeted with all-new clothes that are in perfect condition. He has a fancy vest, perfectly puffy shoulder pads, and suspenders holding up pants with puzzle piece patterns. He nearly squeals with a mixture of joy and surprise, feeling truly happy for the first time since he got the idea to become a TV in the first place. 

The best part about his new outfit is that it covers his ugly body, even his crumbling hands with practical clothing. Honestly, he looked just like a real TV host, with a fake smile to really take the cake. Oh, speaking of the smile. He really needed to fiddle with his screen and see if he had any other faces. It was still creeping him out beyond belief that he couldn’t change expressions. 

“Now, I’ll really have to get around to fixing that. And finding a name for myself at some point, of course.” He whispers to himself, still sounding crackly. 

With these electronic powers, why, he had the ability to cause good and bad things with the point of a finger! Talk about having everything he ever wanted at his fingertips. Power, something he’d never had before, felt so overwhelmingly amazing that he almost forgot all about his nausea. And the middle-aged deadbeat outside his door, on the verge of unlocking the bathroom door with his key. 

PETER.” He screams, banging on the hard wood with his fists as hard as he can. “This is your last warning, you little shit.”  

“That’s not my name.” He hoarsely speaks, his body clenching up and electricity crackling around him.  

“What was that? Are you talking back? I’ll fucking kill you; I’ll kill your ass!” 

He stares at the mirror, feeling a bout of uncontrollable rage taking him over as the energy goes from a vibrant blue to a staticky red. As his form begins to shake, his smile flickers for the first time and turns into something truly horrifying.  

His real eyes and lips are now spaced out onto a white screen, cracks appearing on the edges. The sight would make any normal person practically paralyzed with fright, but the teen couldn’t help but laugh. This is who he is now, and there’s no point in denying it anymore. He made this choice for himself, and if he has these powers now, he should use them. He should finally defend himself after years of enduring the physical and mental abuse his father laid on him. 

He should return the favor. 

“That is not my name!” He yells at the very top of his lungs, charging up enough energy to blow it clean off its hinges, blasting his father back and exploding the door into pieces. “I’m done taking shit from you!” 

Once his father regains his bearings and fully gets a chance to see who, or rather, what is standing in front of him, he falls silent.  

The boy can stand up fully in the bedroom, which has significantly higher ceilings. His real face is still spread out on his screen, red energy crackling around him. He looks like a villain straight out of a horror story, or a TV show for that matter, pointing his finger directly in his father’s face and staring at him menacingly. 

“P-Peter?” Now, his voice is uncharacteristically timid and quiet, like he’s both in awe and in disbelief. “There’s no way. You’re not...” 

“Why, dear father, I believe I have already stated that my name is no longer Peter. In fact, I have continuously said that for the past three years.” His voice is eerily calm as he speaks to the older man who is still staring at him with wide eyes. “You have been quite busy drowning yourself in bottle after bottle of that wretched beer to even listen to me for more than five seconds before you get tired of it. You get tired of my voice, and then you yell at me, insult me, and hit me like I am just nothing, and frankly, I’m tired of it. Can you tell that I’m tired of how I’ve been treated since my mother left me? She left me alone with the most cruel, heartless human being I have ever encountered. One who gets joy out of watching me suffer day after day as I pull glass out of my arm and tend to my constant wounds.” 

“You-” He tries to defend himself, but the TV-headed man wasn’t having it. 

“Nuh uh~ it’s my turn to talk now, and for once, you are going to listen with open ears.” He leans in a bit closer to the older man. “Unless you’d like to know what it’s like to be electrocuted. It will be quite unpleasant to burn to death whilst your very own son initiates such pain, keeping his electrical finger on your heart until you are thoroughly burnt to a crisp. Hmm. It certainly would be fun for me to watch the life drain from your eyes, however. Nearly as entertaining as watching Captain America, haha!” 

It was weirdly fun for him to watch more fear slowly accumulating in the man’s eyes. And it was exhilarating to finally be the one to initiate such a feeling. It made him feel as though he could do anything. 

“Okay, fine.” He sighs. “You’re pissed, but what is this? This weird getup with the electricity?”  

“You are in no position to ask questions, so I don’t have to tell you anything. But perhaps I can tell you that I cut off my head and replaced it with this lovely CRT. The rest of my body is all thanks to the electromagnetic shock that the connection produced. My body practically crisped!” He giggles. “But it was worth it.” He says this last part in a darker tone.  

“And you’re a villain.” His father says, making him pause in his tracks. 

“Pardon?” He laughs. “A villain? Now what makes you say something as foolish as that, dear father?” 

“You have some sob story that you can use as justification for going batshit crazy and cutting off your head. Now that you have powers, you’ll try to be good, but once you realize that no one will ever want a freak like you, the only path you’ll have left to turn to is using your powers for evil. Only then will you be able to be a TV host, then will you be able to open your own amusement park.” 

“How dare you try to speak to me like that when I hold your own life in my hands? Surely you have a larger sense of self-preservation than this.” 

“See? Your true side is already showing. Powerful, holding that over my head. Only shitty people make it to the top. You’ll learn that soon enough. Sure, you’ll work your ass off, watch every show in existence, whatever. But soon you’ll know that I’m right. You’re not special, you have no creative vision. Honestly, I bet the only show you’ll ever make is a bad parody of your own favorite show, reusing actors like someone who is desperate for attention, needing the public approval that you’ll never end up getting. You’ll end up alone, hellbent on revenge. You’ll never find friends, Peter.” He laughs under his breath. 

“Mr. Puzzles.” The TV headed man smiles normally down at his father.  

“What.” He raises an eyebrow. 

“My name is Mr. Puzzles. Do good to remember that, now. It’ll be the only thing you’ll remember when I’m done with you.” Instead of zapping his father with the lightning bolt he had been charging for the past five minutes, he absorbs the energy back in and tries something new. 

“Wait, what are you d-” 

Before his father can say another word, Mr. Puzzles’ screen flickers to a black picture, generating power before a vortex appears, sucking everything in like a vacuum. He points his head right at his father, who screams bloody murder as he is pulled right into his son’s head. The swirling goes for a few more seconds before it shuts off, leaving absolutely no trace of the drunk man who is now stuck inside Mr. Puzzles’ own pocket dimension.  

“You know what I think would suit you just right?” Mr. Puzzles grins, twisting one of the knobs on his face. “Being the narrator of my first show: an animal docuseries starring an extremely intriguing monkey tribe! Of course, I can’t have you remembering all this ‘being my father’ or ‘wanting to escape’ nonsense, so I’ll just have to, hmm. How would I go about erasing your- aha, let’s try this.” He charges up a small burst of electricity in his finger and points it at his head, his screen flickering to a picture of his terrified father. 

As the bolt of lightning hits the man, his face goes blank. He stares off into space for about ten seconds before static fills his eyes. As Mr. Puzzles continues fiddling with small electrical charges and twisting his knobs, his father suddenly begins speaking in a different accent as a jungle backdrop with a monkey tribe appears on his screen.  

“Welcome to the jungle. Today we are investigating a chimpanzee tribe in its natural habitat. I am your narrator-” 

The screen cuts back to his plastered-on grin as his father continues to drone on about monkeys deep inside the TV. Only this time, his grin is slightly more malicious as he stands there, completely silent for a moment. He stares at the empty space where his father was mere seconds ago, now the only thing that remains is a partially full bottle of beer. 

He crushes the bottle underneath his foot, feeling happier than he’s ever been. Freer than he’s ever felt. He hears the glass crunch, the cursed liquid spilling out all over his carpet. That’s when he looks out at all the damage he’s caused, admiring the bloodstains on the furniture and the ash scattered across the floor.  

Then, Mr. Puzzles touches the wires on his neck that connect his body to his head, tracing one of them all the way down his arm as he laughs maniacally. He’s horrifying. Every aspect of his body is sick, twisted, unnatural, and revolting. He should be disgusted by his appearance, and he should never want to see himself in a mirror again, but for some reason he isn’t. Instead, he’s oddly pleased. With his newfound powers, he really can accomplish anything.  

And he can say with confidence that eventually, this freak of nature will finally know what it’s like to be a star. 

~~~

6359 Words

Notes:

I had a lot of fun writing Mr. Puzzles' backstory! Hope you all enjoyed

Notes:

If you would like to make a request or you like my story, please comment! I will try my best to fulfill all good requests and I will have fun reading all the comments you write!